JP2020103390A - Game machine - Google Patents

Abstract

To provide a game machine which improves the amusement of a game.SOLUTION: In a game machine which includes display control means in which a variable display game is carried out by variably displaying a plurality of drawing pattern objects on a display device, and can produce a special game state advantageous for a player when a result of the variable display game is a special result, a plurality of drawing pattern objects include a first drawing pattern object, and a second drawing pattern object different in a variable display mode from the first drawing pattern object. The display control means can variably display the second drawing pattern object in a mode of axially rotating in a predetermined position, and can display identification information included in the second drawing pattern object in a front view and in a predetermined period, and can change the predetermined period on the basis of a size of the second drawing pattern object.SELECTED DRAWING: Figure 44

Description

The present invention includes display control means for variably displaying a plurality of symbol objects on a display device to perform a variable display game, and when the result of the variable display game is a special result, a special game state advantageous to the player is generated. Regarding possible gaming machines.

In the gaming machine, the variable display game is executed when the game ball passes (wins) a starting area (for example, a winning opening). In the variable display game, the variable display of the symbol object is performed in various modes, and particularly, the high speed variable display is performed in the middle thereof (see Patent Document 1).

JP, 2003-126438, A

However, in recent game machines, the variable display game is stopped with almost no effect on the symbol object during the high-speed variable display, so the player's attention should be paid if there is no place that can attract the player's attention. There is a possibility that the interest of the game may be reduced toward something other than the game machine.

An object of the present invention is to improve the interest of a game in a gaming machine.

In a typical embodiment of the present invention, a display control means is provided for variably displaying a plurality of symbol objects on a display device to perform a variably displaying game, and when the result of the variably displaying game is a special result, the player is informed. In a gaming machine capable of generating an advantageous special game state, the plurality of symbol objects include a first symbol object and a second symbol object having a variable display mode different from that of the first symbol object, and the display control The means can variably display the second symbol object in a manner of axially rotating at a predetermined position, and can display the identification information included in the second symbol object for a predetermined period in a front view. The predetermined period can be changed based on the size of the second symbol object.

According to one aspect of the present invention, it is possible to improve the enjoyment of the game.

It is the perspective view which looked at the game machine from the front side. It is a front view of a game board. It is a block diagram showing a configuration example of a game control system of the gaming machine. It is the block diagram which shows the constitution example of the production control system of the game machine. It is a flow chart which shows the procedure of the first half part of main processing. It is a flow chart which shows the procedure of the latter half part of main processing. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of a timer interruption process. It is a flow chart which shows the procedure of probability setting change / confirmation processing. It is a flow chart which shows the procedure of special figure game processing. It is a flow chart which shows the procedure of starting opening switch monitoring processing. It is a flow chart which shows the procedure of special processing starting switch common processing. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of a special figure normal process. It is a flow chart which shows the procedure of special figure 1 fluctuation start processing. It is a flow chart which shows the procedure of special figure 2 fluctuation start processing. It is a flow chart which shows the procedure of big hit flag 1 setting processing. It is a flow chart which shows the procedure of big hit flag 2 setting processing. It is a flow chart which shows the procedure of the big hit judging processing. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of a special figure information setting process. It is a flow chart which shows the procedure of change pattern setting processing. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of a 2-byte distribution process. It is a flow chart which shows the procedure of distribution processing. It is a flow chart which shows the procedure of change start information setting processing. It is a flow chart which shows the procedure of the universal figure game processing. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of a normal figure normal process. It is the flowchart which shows the main processing of the production control control equipment. It is a flow chart which shows reception command check processing. It is a flow chart which shows received command analysis processing. It is a flow chart which shows single-shot system command processing. It is a flow chart which shows pre-reading symbol type command processing. It is a flow chart which shows pre-reading variable system command processing. It is the flowchart which shows the design command processing. It is a flow chart which shows variable system command processing. It is a flow chart which shows change production setting processing. It is a flow chart which shows the procedure of hit type command processing. It is a transition diagram (first stage) showing a variation mode or a variation mode of a large symbol object, a small symbol object, and a hold object during high-speed variable display. It is a transition diagram (latter stage) showing a variation mode or a variation mode of a large symbol object, a small symbol object, and a hold object during high-speed variable display. It is a table showing the relationship between the large pattern object, the small pattern object, the variation mode or the variation mode of the hold object and the frame which are being displayed at high speed. It is the flowchart which shows the procedure of the production display edit processing which relates to the large design object, the small design object, the reservation object and the like. It is a figure showing a variation mode during high-speed variation display of a large symbol object (middle symbol). It is a transition diagram (first stage) showing a variation mode or a variation mode (first modified example) of a large symbol object, a small symbol object, and a holding object during high-speed variable display. It is a transition diagram (latter stage) showing a variation mode or a variation mode (first modified example) of a large symbol object, a small symbol object, and a hold object during high-speed variable display. It is a table showing a relationship between a frame and a variation mode or variation mode (first modification) of a large symbol object, a small symbol object, and a hold object during high-speed variable display. It is a figure showing the change mode of a reservation object, (a) shows the case where the amplitude of change is large, (b) shows the case where the amplitude of change is moderate, and (c) shows the case where the amplitude of change is small. It is a transition diagram (first stage) showing a variation mode or a variation mode of a large symbol object, a small symbol object, and a hold object at the time of starting the variable display game. It is a transition diagram (second stage) showing a variation mode or a variation mode of a large symbol object, a small symbol object, and a hold object at the time of starting the variable display game. It is a table showing the relationship between the large pattern object, the small pattern object, the variation mode or the variation mode of the hold object at the start of the variable display game, and the frame. It is a transition diagram (first stage) showing a variation mode or a variation mode of a large symbol object, a small symbol object, and a hold object at the time of ending the variable display game (or a freeze effect). It is a transition diagram (latter stage) showing a variation mode or a variation mode of a large symbol object, a small symbol object, and a hold object at the time of ending the variable display game (or freeze effect). It is a table showing the relationship between the variation mode or variation mode of the large symbol object, the small symbol object, and the hold object and the frame when the variable display game ends (or the freeze effect). It is a transition diagram showing a variation mode or variation mode (modification example) of a large symbol object, a small symbol object, and a hold object at the time of ending the variable display game (or freeze effect). It is a transition diagram (first stage) showing a variation mode or a variation mode (second modified example) of a large symbol object, a small symbol object, and a hold object during high-speed variable display. It is a transition diagram (latter stage) showing a variation mode or a variation mode (second modified example) of a large symbol object, a small symbol object, and a hold object during high-speed variable display. It is a transition diagram (first stage) showing the variation mode or variation mode (third modification) of the large symbol object, the small symbol object, and the hold object during high-speed variable display. It is a transition diagram (latter stage) showing the variation mode or variation mode (third modified example) of the large symbol object, the small symbol object, and the hold object during high-speed variable display. It is a figure explaining the area|region where the production button is reflected in the glass frame before and after the movement of the production button which concerns on 2nd Embodiment. It is a figure explaining the area|region where the player can visually recognize the virtual image of the effect button reflected in the back of the glass frame before and after the movement of the effect button which concerns on 2nd Embodiment. It is a perspective view of the game machine according to the second embodiment, and is a view for explaining the flow of light rays from an effect button that enters the player's view. It is a figure explaining the area|region where the production button is reflected in the glass frame before and after the movement of the production button of the modification which concerns on 2nd Embodiment. It is a figure explaining the area|region where the player can visually recognize the virtual image of the production button reflected in the back of the glass frame before and after the movement of the production button of the modification which concerns on 2nd Embodiment. It is a figure explaining the movement mode of the production button of the 2nd modification concerning a 2nd embodiment. It is a figure explaining the movement mode of the production button of the 3rd modification concerning a 2nd embodiment. It is a figure explaining the area|region where the production button of the 4th modification which concerns on 2nd Embodiment is reflected in a glass frame, and the area|region where the virtual image of the production button reflected in the back of a glass frame can be visually recognized by the player. It is a cross-sectional view of a projection effect unit of the gaming machine according to the second embodiment. It is a perspective view of the game machine according to the second embodiment, and is a view for explaining the flow of light rays from a projection effect unit that enters the player's field of view. It is a schematic side view of the game board etc. which concerns on 2nd Embodiment, Comprising: It is a figure explaining the flow of the light ray from the stage part and start winning opening which come into a player's visual field. It is an example of a timing chart when the effect control device according to the second embodiment executes a variable display game as an effect.

[First Embodiment]
Hereinafter, preferred embodiments of the present invention will be described with reference to the drawings. The front, rear, left, and right in the description of the gaming machine refer to the direction viewed by the player who is playing the game.

[Overall view of gaming machines]
FIG. 1 is a diagram illustrating a game machine.

The gaming machine 10 includes an opening/closing frame attached to a frame 11 fixed to the island facility so as to be openable/closable via a hinge. The open/close frame includes a front frame 12 (main body frame) and a glass frame 15.

A game board 30 (see FIG. 2) is arranged on the front surface frame 12, and a glass frame 15 having a cover glass 14 for covering the front surface of the game board 30 is attached. The cover glass 14 functions as a game visual recognition area that allows the game area 32 (see FIG. 2) formed on the game board 30 to be visually recognized.

The front frame 12 and the glass frame 15 can be individually opened. For example, the game area 32 of the game board 30 can be accessed by opening only the glass frame 15. Further, by opening the front frame 12 in a state where the glass frame 15 is not opened, it is possible to access the game control device (main board) 100 (see FIG. 3) and the like arranged on the back surface side of the game board 30. You can

Various frame components are arranged on the edge of the glass frame 15 around the cover glass 14.

At the upper center and the left side of the glass frame 15, decoration devices 18a and 18b capable of emitting light according to the game state are arranged. The decoration devices 18a and 18b house illumination members such as LEDs inside and perform a light-emission effect according to the gaming state. The illumination member arranged inside these decoration devices 18a and 18b constitutes a part of the frame decoration device 18 (see FIG. 4).

Upper speakers 19a are arranged at the upper right corner and the upper left corner of the glass frame 15, respectively. In addition to these upper speakers 19a, two lower speakers 19b are provided in the lower part of the gaming machine 10. The lower speaker 19b is arranged in the lower left corner of the glass frame 15 and the lower right corner of the front frame 12. The upper speaker 19a and the lower speaker 19b emit a sound effect, an alarm sound, a notification sound, and the like.

On the right side of the glass frame 15, a projecting effect unit 13 that extends in the vertical direction of the gaming machine 10 and projects toward the front (player side) is provided. The protrusion effect unit 13 is an effect device that performs light emission effect or the like according to the progress state of the game. The illumination member arranged inside the projection effect unit 13 also constitutes a part of the frame decoration device 18 (see FIG. 4).

An upper plate unit having an upper plate 21 capable of storing game balls is attached to the lower portion of the glass frame 15. The upper plate 21 is formed in a box shape having an open top surface. The game balls stored in the upper plate 21 are supplied to a ball launching device (not shown) one by one.

The upper plate unit further includes an effect operation device that accepts an input operation from a player, a ball lending operation device that accepts an input operation from the player, and a decoration device 22 that performs a light emission effect or the like according to a game state. ..

The effect operation device is an operation device in which the touch panel 25b is incorporated in the effect button 25, and is provided in the center of the upper part of the upper plate unit so that the player can easily operate it.

When the player operates the effect operation device, it is possible to perform an effect in which the operation of the player is intervened in the special figure variation display game (game) displayed on the display device 41 (see FIG. 2). For example, it is possible to select an effect pattern (effect mode) or execute a notice effect that gives advance notice of the result of the variable display game (game) corresponding to the starting memory. Note that the variable display game includes a special figure variable display game, and when it is simply referred to as a variable display game, this specification refers to the special figure variable display game.

Further, the effect pattern may be changed not only during execution of the variable display game but also by the player operating the effect operation device during non-execution.

The gaming state when the variable display game is executed is composed of a plurality of gaming states. The normal gaming state (normal state) is a gaming state in which no special gaming state has occurred. Further, the special gaming state is, for example, a short-time state as a specific gaming state or a state in which a high probability of occurrence of a special result (for example, a big hit) in a variable display game (probability change state, probability change state), big hit state (special game state). ).

Here, the probability variation state (specific game state) is one that continues until the next big hit (loop type), one that continues until a variable display game is executed a predetermined number of times (multi-turn type, ST), and There are those that continue until a predetermined probability falling lottery is won (falling lottery type).

Furthermore, without determining whether or not to generate a probability variation state by a big hit symbol random number, it is possible to always generate a probability variation state when a big hit occurs, or to provide a winning device or the like with a specific area to specify. The probability change state may be generated when the game ball passes through the area.

The ball lending operation device is an operation device operated by a player when borrowing a game ball, and is provided on the upper right side of the upper plate unit. The ball lending operation device includes a ball lending button 27, a return button 28, and a balance display unit 26. The ball lending button 27 is a button operated by the player when renting a game ball, and the return button 28 is for ejecting a prepaid card or the like from a card unit (not shown) arranged adjacent to the gaming machine 10. It is a button operated by the player. The balance display unit 26 is a display area in which the balance of a prepaid card or the like is displayed.

The decoration device 22 accommodates a lighting member such as an LED inside and is a device for performing a light emission effect or the like according to a game state, and is provided in a front portion of the upper plate unit. The lighting member arranged inside the decoration device 22 constitutes a part of the frame decoration device 18 (see FIG. 4 ).

Below the glass frame 15 including the above-mentioned upper plate unit and the like, in the lower part of the front frame 12, an operation handle 24 for controlling the operation of a ball launching device (not shown) and a game ball can be stored. The lower plate 23 is provided.

The operation handle 24 is arranged on the lower right side of the front frame 12 and below the lower speaker 19b on the right side. When the player turns the operation handle 24, the ball launching device launches the game ball supplied from the upper plate 21 to the game area 32 of the game board 30. The launch speed of the game ball launched from the ball launch device is set to increase as the amount of rotational operation of the operation handle 24 increases. That is, the ball launching device can change the launching force, which is the force (speed) of launching the game ball in the game area, in response to the operation of the operation handle 24 by the player, and the game can be performed in various launching modes with different launching forces. You can fire a ball. The launch mode includes left hitting (normal hitting) in which the game ball flows down on the left side of the game area 32 and right hitting in which the game ball falls down on the right side of the game area 32.

The lower plate 23 is arranged below the upper plate unit at a predetermined distance from the upper plate unit. The lower plate 23 has a ball removal hole 23a that vertically penetrates the bottom surface of the lower plate 23, and an opening/closing operation portion 23b for opening and closing the ball removal hole 23a. When the player operates the opening/closing operation portion 23b to open the ball removing hole 23a, the game balls stored in the lower plate 23 can be discharged to the outside through the ball removing hole 23a.

[Game board]
Subsequently, the game board 30 of the game machine 10 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 2 is a front view of the game board 30 provided in the game machine 10.

As shown in FIG. 2, the game board 30 includes a flat plate-shaped game board body 30a that serves as a mounting base for various members. The game board body 30a is made of wood or synthetic resin, and a game area 32 surrounded by a guide rail 31 is provided on the front surface of the game board body 30a. The gaming machine 10 is configured to shoot a game ball from a ball launching device in a game area 32 surrounded by a guide rail 31 to play a game. In the game area 32, windmills, obstacle nails and the like are arranged as members for converting the flow direction of the game balls, and the launched game balls flow down the game area 32 while changing the rolling direction by these members.

A center case (front structure) 40 that forms a window that serves as a display area of the variable display game is attached to the approximate center of the game area 32. A display device 41 as an effect display device (variable display device) that variably displays (variably displays) a plurality of pieces of identification information is disposed behind the window formed in the center case 40. The display device 41 includes, for example, a liquid crystal display, and is arranged so that the display content can be viewed from the front side of the game board 30 through the window of the center case 40. The display device 41 is not limited to one having a liquid crystal display, and may be one having a display such as an EL or CRT.

The display screen (display unit) of the display device 41 is provided with a plurality of variable display areas, and in each variable display area, identification information (special symbols) and a character that produces a variable display game are displayed. In addition, images (big hit display, fanfare display, ending display, etc.) based on the progress of the game are displayed on the display screen.

Further, in the center case 40, an inflow port 40a to the warp passage 40e for guiding the game ball flowing down the game area 32 to the inside of the center case 40, and a stage where the game ball passing through the warp passage 40e can roll. Section 40b is provided. Since the stage portion 40b of the center case 40 is arranged above the starting winning opening 36 and the normal variation winning device 37, the game balls rolled on the stage portion 40b are moved to the starting winning opening 36 or the ordinary variation winning device 37. It's easy to win.

An upper effect unit 40c and a side effect unit 40d are provided on the upper and right sides of the center case 40, respectively. The upper effect unit 40c and the side effect unit 40d constitute a part of the board decoration device 46 (see FIG. 4) and the board effect device 44 (see FIG. 4).

In the game area 32 on the right side of the center case 40, a normal symbol starting gate (universal figure starting gate) 34 is provided. Inside the universal figure starting gate 34, a gate switch (SW) 34a (see FIG. 3) for detecting a game ball that has passed through the universal figure starting gate 34 is provided. When the game ball hit in the game area 32 passes through the universal figure starting gate 34, the universal figure variation display game is executed.

The general winning opening 35 is arranged in the lower left gaming area 32 of the center case 40, and the general winning opening 35 is also arranged in the lower right gaming area 32 of the center case 40. The winning of the game ball into these general winning openings 35 is detected by the winning opening switches (SW) 35a to 35n (see FIG. 3) provided in the general winning openings 35.

In the game area 32 below the center case 40, there is provided a starting winning opening (first starting winning area) 36 for giving a start condition of the special figure variation display game, and a second starting winning opening (second An ordinary variable winning device 37 having a starting winning area) is provided. The normal variation winning device 37 includes a movable member (movable piece) 37b that is rotated in a direction in which the upper end side is tilted toward the front side to convert the gaming ball into a state in which the game ball easily flows. When the movable member 37b is in the closed state, the game ball cannot normally win the variable winning device 37. When the game ball wins the starting winning opening 36 or the normal variation winning device 37, the special figure variation display game is executed as an auxiliary game.

The movable member 37b is a so-called toro-type ordinary electric accessory, and is rotated via the universal electric solenoid 37c (see FIG. 3) when the result of the universal figure changing display game is a predetermined stop display mode. The game ball is opened to change to an open state (an easy winning state that is advantageous to the player) in which the game ball is easily flown into the normal variation winning device 37.

The movable member 37b is controlled by the game control device 100 described later. The game control device 100 increases the frequency of occurrence of the easy prize winning state by shortening the variation time of the universal figure variation display game or setting the hit probability of the universal figure variation display game to a higher probability than usual, or the normal game state. By increasing the generation time of the prize winning easy state than the prize winning easy state generated in, the time saving state (universal power support state) is generated as the specific game state. Even in the probability changing state (excluding the latent probability changing state), a time saving state (universal power support state) occurs redundantly.

In the game area 32 on the lower right side of the normal variation winning device 37, an attacker-type opening/closing door that opens the special winning opening by rotating in a direction in which the upper end side falls to the front side by the special winning opening solenoid 39b (see FIG. 3) The special variation winning device 39 having 39c is provided. The special variation winning device 39 converts the state in which the special winning opening is closed (a closed state that is disadvantageous to the player) to an open state (a special gaming state that is advantageous to the player) according to the result of the special figure variation display game, and wins a big prize. By facilitating the inflow of the game ball into the mouth, a predetermined game value (prize ball) is given to the player. In addition, inside the special winning opening, a count switch 39a (special winning opening switch 39a, see FIG. 3) is arranged as a detecting means for detecting a game ball that has entered the special winning opening. Further, a light emitting member that illuminates the special winning opening is arranged in or near the special winning opening.

A specific area 86 (so-called V winning opening) is provided inside the second special variation winning device 39. When a game ball enters the specific area 86 (V winning opening), the probability change state (high probability state, specific game state) after the jackpot is determined. The specific area 86 may be opened for a long time so that the game ball can easily pass only in the case of the probability variation big hit. The game control device 100 can detect passage of a game ball to the specific area 86 (V winning) through a sensor (a specific area switch 72 described later) or the like. In addition to confirming that it is done, information (a specific area passing command etc.) indicating that there is a V winning is transmitted to the effect control device 300 described later. Then, the effect control device 300 can notify the V winning on the display device 41 or the like.

When a game ball wins the major winning opening of the general winning opening 35, the starting winning opening 36, the normal variation winning device 37, and the special variation winning device 39, the payout control device 200 (see FIG. 3) indicates the type of the winning opening. The prize balls of the number corresponding to are discharged from the dispensing device to the upper plate 21. Further, in the game area 32 below the normal variation winning device 37, an out port 30b for collecting game balls that have not won a prize is provided.

Further, outside the game area 32 and in the lower right corner of the game board body 30a, a special figure variation display game (special figure 1 variation display game, special figure 2 variation display game) and a general figure variation display game are executed. A collective display device 50 is provided. The collective display device 50 includes display units 51 to 60 that display information such as the current game state.

The collective display device 50 includes a first special figure fluctuation display section 51 (special figure 1 display, lamp D1) and a second special figure fluctuation for a variable display game composed of a 7-segment type display (LED lamp) and the like. A display unit 52 (special figure 2 display device, lamp D2), a variation display unit 53 (general figure display device, lamps D10, D18) for the universal figure variation display game, and the number of starting (held) memories stored in each variation display game A storage display unit for notification (special figure 1 hold indicator 54, special figure 2 hold indicator 55, general figure hold indicator 56) is provided. The special figure 1 hold indicator 54 is composed of lamps D11 and D12. The special figure 2 hold indicator 55 is composed of lamps D13 and D14. The universal figure hold indicator 56 is composed of lamps D15 and D16.

In addition, the collective display device 50, the first game state display unit 57 (first game state indicator, lamp) for notifying that it is right-handed (when right-handed) or left-handed (normal) D8), a second gaming state display unit 58 (second gaming state indicator, lamp D9) that lights up when a time-saving state occurs and notifies the occurrence of the time-saving state, and the probability state of jackpot when the gaming machine 10 is turned on is high probability. The third game state display section 59 (third game state display unit, probability state display section, lamp D17) for displaying that the state is in effect, the number of rounds at the time of a big hit (the number of times of opening and closing the special variation winning device 39) are displayed. A round display unit 60 (lamps D3 to D7) is provided.

In the special figure 1 display device 51 and the special figure 2 display device 52, the variable display game is executed by a variable display in which identification information (for example, a central segment) is repeatedly turned on and off (blinking). The special figure 1 display 51 and the special figure 2 display 52 are not limited to such a segment type display section, and may be composed of an assembly of a plurality of LEDs, or when performing variable display. In addition, all the LEDs provided as indicators are all turned on and off (all LEDs are simultaneously blinked), cyclically turned on (one of the LEDs is turned on and off in a predetermined order at predetermined time intervals), or plural It may be performed by turning on/off (blinking) or circulating lighting by a predetermined number of the LEDs. Also on the public figure display device 53, the variable display game is executed by a variable display (blinking) in which the lamps D10 and D18 are repeatedly turned on and off. Further, the universal figure display 53 can also be appropriately configured similarly to the special figure 1 display 51 and the special figure 2 display 52.

Further, the lamp display device 80 provided on the upper part of the center case 40 includes a lamp display unit (LED) for performing variable display (blinking) that repeats lighting display and extinguishing display as a symbol (fourth special symbol), and each special symbol. It has a lamp display unit (LED) for notifying the number of starting (holding) memory of the variable display game. The lamp display device 80 is controlled by the effect control device 300 (described later). The lamp display unit (LED) for informing the number of starting (holding) memories of each special figure variation display game finishes displaying the number of holdings when a big hit occurs. (Including the case where is occurring), the number of holdings is displayed.

Next, the flow of the game in the gaming machine 10, details of the normal figure variation display game and the special figure variation display game will be described.

In the gaming machine 10, a game is played by launching a game ball from a ball launching device (not shown) toward the game area 32. The launched game ball flows down the game area 32 while changing the rolling direction by obstacle nails, windmills, etc. arranged at various places in the game area 32, and the universal figure starting gate 34, general winning opening 35, starting winning opening 36, the normal variation winning device 37, or the special variation winning device 39, or flows into the outlet 30b provided at the bottom of the game area 32 and is discharged from the game area 32. When a game ball is won in the general winning opening 35, the starting winning opening 36, the normal variation winning device 37, or the special variation winning device 39, the number of prize balls corresponding to the type of the winning opening is paid out through the payout device. It is discharged to the upper plate 21.

The universal figure starting gate 34 is provided with a gate switch 34a (see FIG. 3) for detecting a game ball that has passed through the universal figure starting gate 34. When the game ball passes through the universal figure starting gate 34, it is detected by the gate switch 34a, and the universal figure variation display game is executed based on the determination result of the random number value for collision determination extracted at this time.

The state in which the general figure fluctuation display game cannot be started, for example, when the general figure fluctuation display game has already been played and the general figure fluctuation display game has not ended, or the result of the general figure fluctuation display game is a win When the game ball passes through the universal figure starting gate 34 when the variable winning device 37 is converted to the open state, if the universal figure starting memory number is less than the upper limit number, the memory number is added (+1).

In the universal figure starting memory, a random number value for hit determination for determining the hit/miss of the universal figure variation display game is stored. When the random number value for hit determination matches the determination value, the universal figure variation display is displayed. The game is won and a specific result mode (specific result) is derived.

The general figure fluctuation display game is executed by the general figure display 53 provided in the collective display device 50. The ordinary figure display 53 is composed of LEDs that indicate a hit when the normal identification information (universal figure) is in a lighted state, and indicates a deviation when the light is in a non-illuminated state. By blinking the LED, the ordinary identification information fluctuates. The result is displayed by turning on or off the LED after a predetermined variable display time has elapsed.

When the universal figure random number value extracted at the time of passing the universal figure starting gate 34 is a winning value, the ordinary symbol displayed on the universal figure display 53 is stopped in the hit state and is in the hit state. At this time, the movable member 37b is converted into an open state for a predetermined time (for example, 0.3 seconds) by driving the universal solenoid 37c (see FIG. 3), and the game ball to the normal variation winning device 37 is changed. Winnings are allowed.

The winning of the game ball to the starting winning opening 36 and the winning of the normal variation winning device 37 are detected by the starting opening 1 switch 36a (see FIG. 3) and the starting opening 2 switch 37a (see FIG. 3). The game ball that has won the starting winning opening 36 is detected as the starting prize ball of the special display 1 variable display game, and is stored up to a predetermined upper limit, and the game ball that has won the normal variable winning device 37 is the special map 2 It is detected as a start winning ball of the variable display game and is stored within a predetermined upper limit.

At the time of detecting the start winning prize ball of the special figure variation display game, a big hit random number value, a big hit symbol random value, each variation pattern random value, etc. are extracted. These random number values are stored in a special figure reservation storage area (a part of RAM) of the game control device 100 as special figure starting prize winning memories, each for a predetermined number of times (for example, a maximum of eight times). The storage number of the special figure starting prize winning memory is displayed on the special figure 1 hold indicator 54 and the special figure 2 hold indicator 55 for notifying the start prize number of the collective display device 50, and also on the display screen of the display device 41. Is displayed.

The game control device 100 executes the special figure 1 variable display game on the special figure 1 display 51 based on the winning in the starting winning opening 36 or the first starting memory. Further, the game control device 100 executes the special figure 2 variable display game on the special figure 2 display device 52 based on the winning or the second starting memory to the normal variable prize device 37.

In the special figure 1 variable display game (first special figure variable display game) and the special figure 2 variable display game (second special figure variable display game), identification information ( It is performed by displaying the predetermined result mode in a stopped manner after the variable display of the special symbol and the special symbol). Further, the display device 41 executes a decorative special figure variable display game in which a plurality of types of identification information (for example, numbers, symbols, character patterns, etc.) are variably displayed corresponding to each special figure variable display game.

The decorative special figure variable display game in the display device 41, the decorative special symbol (identification information) composed of the above-mentioned numbers etc. is left (first special symbol), right (second special symbol), middle (third special symbol) ) Is started in a variable display (scroll display) in order, and the symbols that are changing after a predetermined time are sequentially stopped, and the result of the special figure variable display game is displayed. Further, on the display device 41, various effect displays such as the appearance of characters are performed in order to improve the interest. Furthermore, in the decorative special map variation display game, as another decorative special pattern (identification information), in the lamp display section (LED) of the lamp display device 80, the fourth special symbol is displayed by repeating the lighting display and the extinguishing display (blinking). (4th pattern) fluctuates. After a predetermined time from the start, the variable display of the lamp display unit is stopped by "lighting" in the case of off and "lighting out" in the case of big hit.

On the contrary, the variable display of the lamp display unit (LED) as the fourth special symbol (fourth symbol) can be stopped by "turning off" in the case of a big hit and "lighting" in the case of a big hit. .. Also, a configuration is possible in which a plurality of LEDs (fourth pattern LEDs) are provided as each lamp display unit, one of the plurality of LEDs is turned on in the case of a failure, and a plurality of all LEDs are turned on in the case of a big hit. It is possible.

When the winning of the game ball to the starting winning opening 36 or the normal variation winning device 37 is made at a predetermined timing (when the big hit random number value at the time of winning detection is the big hit value), the special map 1 display 51 or In the display unit 52 of FIG. 2, a specific result mode (special result mode) is derived by the display symbol as a result of the special figure variation display game, and the jackpot state (special game state) is set. Correspondingly, the display mode of the display device 41 becomes a special result mode (for example, a state where numbers such as “7, 7, 7” are aligned).

At this time, in the special variation winning device 39, by energizing the special winning opening solenoid 39b (see FIG. 3), the special winning opening is converted from the closed state to the open state for a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds). That is, the special winning opening provided in the special variation winning device 39 is wide open for a predetermined time or until a predetermined number of game balls are won, and during this time, the player is given the privilege of being able to obtain many game balls. It

Note that the special figure 1 display device 51 and the special figure 2 display device 52 may be configured as separate display devices or the same display device, but the special figure variation display games are not executed at the same time. Is set as follows.

Regarding the decorative special figure variable display game on the display device 41, the special figure 1 variable display game and the special figure 2 variable display game may be executed on different display devices or different display areas, or the same display may be performed. It may be executed in the device or the display area. In this case, the decorative special figure variable display games corresponding to the special figure 1 variable display game and the special figure 2 variable display game are not executed at the same time. The special figure 2 variable display game is designed to be executed with priority over the special figure 1 variable display game, and there is a starting memory for the special figure 1 variable display game and the special figure 2 variable display game. When it becomes possible to execute the figure variable display game, the special figure 2 variable display game is executed.

In the following description, when the special figure 1 variable display game and the special figure 2 variable display game are not distinguished, they are simply referred to as a special figure variable display game.

In addition, although not particularly limited, the starting opening 1 switch 36a in the starting winning opening 36, the starting opening 2 switch 37a in the normal variable winning device 37, the gate switch 34a, the winning opening switch 35a, the count switch 39a. Is a non-contact magnetic proximity sensor (hereinafter referred to as a proximity switch) that uses a phenomenon that a magnetic field changes when a metal approaches a coil for magnetic detection and that detects a game ball. .. Further, the glass frame open detection switch 63 provided on the glass frame 15 of the gaming machine 10 or the front frame open detection switch 64 (main frame open detection switch) provided on the front frame (game frame) 12 is a machine Microswitches with specific contacts can be used.

[Game control device]
FIG. 3 is a block diagram of a game control system of the gaming machine 10. The gaming machine 10 includes a game control device 100 (main board), and the game control device 100 is a main control device (main board) that controls a game in a centralized manner, and includes a game microcomputer (hereinafter referred to as a game microcomputer). CPU section 110 having an input port 111, an input section 120 having an input port, an output section 130 having an output port and a driver, and a data bus 140 connecting the CPU section 110, the input section 120, and the output section 130. And so on.

The CPU unit 110 includes a game microcomputer (CPU) 111 called an amusement chip (IC) and an oscillator such as a crystal oscillator, and generates a CPU operation clock, a timer interrupt, and a reference clock for a random number generation circuit. It has an oscillating circuit (crystal oscillator) 113 and the like. A DC voltage of a predetermined level such as DC32V, DC12V, or DC5V generated by the power supply device 400 is supplied to the game control device 100 and electronic components such as a solenoid and a motor driven by the game control device 100 to be operable. To be done.

The power supply device 400 includes a normal power supply unit 410 having an ACDC converter that generates a DC voltage of 32V DC from an AC power supply of 24V and a DC-DC converter that generates a DC voltage of a lower level such as DC 12V and DC 5V from a voltage of 32V DC. , A backup power supply unit 420 for supplying a power supply voltage to the internal RAM of the game microcomputer 111 at the time of a power failure, and a power failure monitoring circuit, and a power failure monitoring signal or a reset signal notifying the game control device 100 of the occurrence and recovery of the power failure And a control signal generation unit 430 that generates and outputs a control signal.

In the present embodiment, the power supply device 400 is configured separately from the game control device 100, but the backup power supply unit 420 and the control signal generation unit 430 are on separate boards or integrated with the game control device 100, that is, the main. It may be configured to be provided on the substrate. Since the game board 30 and the game control device 100 are subject to replacement when the model is changed, the backup power supply unit 420 and the control signal generation unit 430 are provided on a board different from the power supply apparatus 400 or the main board as in the embodiment. By providing it, the cost can be reduced by removing it from the replacement target.

The backup power supply unit 420 can be composed of one large-capacity capacitor such as an electrolytic capacitor. The backup power supply is supplied to the game microcomputer 111 (particularly, the built-in RAM) of the game control device 100, and the data stored in the RAM is retained even during a power failure or after the power is cut off. The control signal generation unit 430, for example, monitors the voltage of 32 V generated by the normal power supply unit 410, detects the occurrence of a power failure when the voltage drops to 17 V or less, changes the power failure monitoring signal, and resets the reset signal after a predetermined time. Is output. Further, even when the power is turned on or the power is restored, a reset signal is output after a predetermined time has elapsed from that point.

Further, the game control device 100 is provided with a RAM initialization switch 112. When the RAM initialization switch 112 is pressed and turned on, an initialization switch signal is generated, and based on this, the information stored in the RAM 111c in the gaming microcomputer 111 and the RAM in the payout control device 200 is forced. The process of initializing to is performed. Although not particularly limited, the initialization switch signal is read when the power is turned on, and the power failure monitoring signal is repeatedly read in the main loop of the main program executed by the gaming microcomputer 111. The reset signal is a kind of forced interrupt signal and resets the entire control system.

In addition, the game control device 100 (main board) includes a setting key switch 93. The setting key switch 93 is turned on by a rotation operation of the operator or the like to change the probability setting value (setting value) according to the setting relating to the game condition (game). The RAM initialization switch 112 can also be used as a setting value changing switch that can change the probability setting value according to the operation of the operator. In the present embodiment, the probability setting value is a setting value for setting a winning probability such as a big hit probability or a small hit probability (only when there is a small hit), but other game conditions (production etc.) other than the probability. Can be changed according to the probability setting value. The setting key switch 93 and the RAM initialization switch 112 constitute setting changing means (setting changing device 42) capable of changing the setting (probability setting value) relating to the game condition. It should be noted that instead of the RAM initialization switch 112, another switch may also serve as the set value change switch, or a unique set value change switch may be provided exclusively.

Since the setting key switch 93 and the RAM initialization switch 112 are provided on the game control device 100 inside the gaming machine 10, the setting key switch 93 and the RAM initialization switch 112 are arranged at positions (operational positions) that cannot be operated unless the front frame 12 (main body frame) is opened. To be done. That is, a general player cannot access and operate the setting key switch 93 and the RAM initialization switch 112.

As will be described later, when the power of the gaming machine 10 is turned on (power failure recovery, power restoration), the gaming machine 10 sets the probability setting value according to the ON/OFF state of the setting key switch 93 and the RAM initialization switch 112. It is possible to shift to various states such as a changeable setting variable state (setting change state, setting change mode) and a setting confirmation state (setting confirmation mode) in which the probability setting value can be confirmed.

In the present embodiment, the probability setting value is defined, for example, in six stages, and probability setting value 1 (setting 1), probability setting value 2 (setting 2), probability setting value 3 (setting 3), probability setting value 4 (setting) 4), probability setting value 5 (setting 5), and probability setting value 6 (setting 6). Generally, setting 1 is the most unfavorable setting for the player and setting 6 is the most unfavorable setting for the player. Settings 1 and 2 are low settings, settings 3 and 4 are intermediate settings (intermediate settings), and settings 5 and 6 are high settings.

In the probability setting changing process, every time the operator presses the RAM initialization switch 112, the work setting value (setting) in the work setting value area is set to 0 (setting 1, probability setting 1)→ Setting value 1 (Setting 2, probability setting value 2) → Setting value 2 (Setting 3, probability setting value 3) → Setting value 3 (Setting 4, probability setting value 4) → Setting value 4 (Setting 5, probability setting value 5) )→setting value 5 (setting 6, probability setting value 6)→setting value 0 (setting 1)→setting value 1 (setting 2)→... In this way, the RAM initialization switch 112 also functions as a set value change switch. For convenience of explanation, the work setting values 0 to 5 are provided corresponding to the probability setting values 1 to 6 in the setting changing state (setting changing mode), but the work setting value and the probability setting value are the same. They may be treated as the same in the numerical range (that is, 0 to 5 or 1 to 6) (the working setting value and the probability setting value are set to the same numerical value).

The probability setting value may be changed by rotating the setting key switch 93 to a predetermined position instead of operating the RAM initialization switch 112 (setting value changing switch). The probability setting value is not limited to 6 levels. The display probability setting value corresponding to the selected work setting values 0 to 5 is, for example, a 4-digit 7-segment type (8-segment type including the dot Dp) display device 152. Etc. are displayed.

The gaming microcomputer 111 includes a CPU (central processing unit: microprocessor) 111a, a read-only ROM (read only memory) 111b, and a RAM (random access memory) 111c that can be read and written at any time.

The ROM 111b stores invariant information (programs, fixed data, judgment values of various random numbers, etc.) for game control in a nonvolatile manner. The RAM 111c is used as a work area of the CPU 111a and a storage area for various signals and random values at the time of game control, stores information about games (game information), and stores and stores the stored information even when a power failure occurs. It becomes a holding storage means capable of An electrically rewritable nonvolatile memory such as an EEPROM may be used as the ROM 111b or the RAM 111c.

Further, the ROM 111b stores, for example, a variation pattern table for determining a variation pattern (variation mode) that defines the execution time of the special figure variation display game, the effect contents, the presence or absence of the reach state, and the like. The fluctuation pattern table is a table for the CPU 111a to refer to the fluctuation pattern random numbers 1 to 3 stored as start-up memory to determine the fluctuation pattern. Further, the variation pattern table includes a deviation variation pattern table selected when the result is a loss, a big hit variation pattern table selected when the result is a big hit, and the like. Further, in these pattern tables, there are tables for determining the latter half variation pattern which is the variation pattern after reaching the reach state (the latter half variation group table, the latter half variation pattern selection table, etc.) and the variation before the reach state. A table (first half variation group table, first half variation pattern selection table, etc.) for determining a first half variation pattern that is a pattern is included.

Here, the reach (reach state) has a display device whose display state can be changed, and the display device derives and displays a plurality of display results at different times, and the plurality of display results are predetermined. In the special result mode, in the gaming machine 10 in which the gaming state becomes a gaming state that is advantageous to the player (special gaming state), some of the plurality of display results have not yet been derived and displayed, and already derived. A display state in which the displayed display result satisfies the condition of the special result mode. In other words, the reach state is out of the display condition that is the special result mode even when the variable display control of the display device progresses to reach the stage before the display result is derived and displayed. Refers to a display mode that does not exist Then, for example, the reach state includes a state in which the variable display is performed by the plurality of variable display areas while maintaining the state in which the special result mode is uniform (so-called full rotation reach). Further, the reach state is a display state at the time when the display control of the display device progresses to reach the stage before the display result is derived and displayed, and is determined before the display result is derived and displayed. The display state in the case where at least a part of the display results of the plurality of variable display areas satisfying the condition satisfies the special result mode.

Therefore, for example, the decorative special figure variation display game displayed on the display device corresponding to the special figure variation display game varies a plurality of pieces of identification information for a predetermined time in each of the left, middle and right variation display areas of the display device. After displaying, if the result mode is displayed by stopping the variable display in the order of left, right, and middle, in the left and right variable display areas, the condition that satisfies the special result mode (for example, The state in which the variable display is stopped by the same identification information) is the reach state. In addition, at the time when the variable display of all variable display areas is temporarily stopped, the condition that the special result mode is satisfied in any two variable display areas of left, middle, and right (for example, the same identification information May be set as the reach state, and the remaining one variable display area may be variably displayed from the reach state.

Then, the reach state includes a plurality of reach effects, and a normal reach (N reach) is set as a reach effect system (type) in which a special result mode (big hit mode) is different (expected degree is different). Special 1 reach (SP1 reach), special 2 reach (SP2 reach), special 3 reach (SP3 reach), and premier reach are set. It should be noted that the expectation level (expected value) of the jackpot in the reach production is set to increase in the order of no reach <normal reach <special 1 reach <special 2 reach <special 3 reach <premier reach. In addition, the reach state is included in at least the variable display mode when the special result mode is derived in the special figure variable display game (when it is a big hit). That is, it may be included in the variable display mode in the case where it is determined that the special result mode is not derived in the special figure variable display game (when it is out of sync). Therefore, the state in which the reach state has occurred is a state in which there is a high possibility of a big hit compared to the case where the reach state does not occur.

The expectation of the effect (notice) indicates the probability of a big hit when the effect is selected, and the selection rate of the effect when it is a big hit and the effect of the effect when it is not a big hit (when it is off). It can be calculated based on the selectivity or the like.

The CPU 111a executes the game control program in the ROM 111b to generate a control signal (command) for the payout control device 200 or the effect control device 300, or generate and output a drive signal for a solenoid or a display device to output the game machine. Control of the whole 10 is performed. Further, although not shown, the gaming microcomputer 111 is a big hit random number for determining the big hit random number of the special figure variation display game, a big hit symbol random number for determining the big hit symbol, and a small hit for determining the small hit symbol. Design random number (only if there is a small hit), fluctuation pattern random number in the special figure fluctuation display game (including the execution time of the fluctuation display game in various reach and fluctuation display without reach) etc. A random number generation circuit for generating, a timer interrupt signal of a predetermined cycle (for example, 4 msec (milliseconds)) to the CPU 111a based on an oscillation signal (original clock signal) from the oscillation circuit 113, and an update timing of the random number generation circuit are given. It has a clock generator that generates a clock.

Further, the CPU 111a acquires any one of the plurality of fluctuation pattern tables stored in the ROM 111b in the processing related to the special figure fluctuation display game. Specifically, the CPU 111a causes the special figure change display game to have a game result (big hit or miss), the special figure change display game as the current game state, the probability state (normal probability state or high probability state), and the number of starting memories. Based on the above, any one of the fluctuation pattern tables is selected and acquired from the plurality of fluctuation pattern tables. Here, the CPU 111a serves as a variation distribution information acquisition unit that acquires any one of the plurality of variation pattern tables stored in the ROM 111b when executing the special figure variation display game.

The payout control device 200 includes a CPU, a ROM, a RAM, an input interface, an output interface, and the like, and drives a payout motor 91 of the payout unit according to a prize ball payout command (command or data) from the game control device 100 to win a prize ball. Control for paying out. Further, the payout control device 200 drives the payout motor 91 of the payout unit based on the ball rental request signal from the card unit 600 to perform control for paying out the ball.

The input unit 120 of the game control device 100 has an electric wave sensor 62 (a board electric wave sensor) for detecting the emission of an electric wave to the gaming machine, a gate switch 34a of the universal figure starting gate 34, a starting opening 1 in the first starting winning opening 36. The switch 36a, the starting opening 2 switch 37a in the second starting winning opening 37 (normal variation winning device), the winning opening switch 35a of the general winning opening 35, and the special winning opening switch 39a of the special variation winning device 39 are connected to these. An interface chip (proximity I/F) 121 is provided which receives a negative logic signal such as a high level of 11V and a low level of 7V supplied from the switch and converts the signal into a positive logic signal of 0V-5V.

Further, the interface chip (proximity I/F) 121 is connected to the specific area switch 72, the remaining ball discharge port switch 73, and the out ball detection switch 74. The specific area switch 72 detects passage of a game ball (V winning) to the specific area 86 (V winning opening). The remaining ball discharge switch 73 detects a game ball that has passed through the remaining ball discharge port for discharging the game ball from the special variation winning device 39. The out ball detection switch 74 may detect only the game ball passing through the out opening 30b, or may detect all the game balls that have been shot in the game area and finished the game.

The output of the proximity I/F 121 is supplied to the second input port 123, the third input port 124, or the fourth input port 126 and read by the gaming microcomputer 111 via the data bus 140. Among the outputs of the proximity I/F 121, the detection signals of the gate switch 34a, the starting opening 1 switch 36a, the starting opening 2 switch 37a, the winning opening switch 35a, and the special winning opening switch 39a are input to the third input port 124. ..

Further, among the outputs of the proximity I/F 121, the detection signal of the radio wave sensor 62 and the abnormality detection signal output when the abnormality of the sensor or the switch is detected are input to the second input port 123.

Further, among the outputs of the proximity I/F 121, the detection signals of the specific area switch 72, the remaining ball discharge port switch 73, or the out ball detection switch 74 are input to the fourth input port 126.

Further, the second input port 123, the detection signal of the magnetic sensor switch 61 for fraud detection provided on the front frame 12 of the gaming machine 10, the glass frame open detection provided on the glass frame 15 of the gaming machine 10, etc. A signal from a front frame open detection switch 64 (main frame open detection switch) provided on the switch 63, the front frame 12 (main frame), etc., and a signal from a vibration sensor 65 that detects vibration of the gaming machine 10 are input. ..

Further, the second input port 123 takes in a setting key switch signal from the setting key switch 93 and supplies it to the gaming microcomputer 111 via the data bus 140.

Further, among the outputs of the proximity I/F 121, the output to the third input port 124 is also supplied from the game control device 100 to the test shot test device (not shown) via the relay board 70. Further, the detection signals of the starting port 1 switch 36a and the starting port 2 switch 37a among the outputs of the proximity I/F 121 are configured to be input to the gaming microcomputer 111 in addition to the third input port 124.

As described above, the proximity I/F 121 has a signal level conversion function. In order to enable such a level conversion function, the proximity I/F 121 is supplied with a voltage of 12V from the power supply device 400 in addition to the voltage of 5V required for normal IC operation. Has become.

The data held by the third input port 124 is read by the gaming microcomputer 111 decoding the address assigned to the third input port 124 to assert the enable signal CE2 (change to a valid level). be able to. The same applies to the second input port 123, the fourth input port 126, and the first input port 122 described later.

Further, to the input unit 120, a frame radio wave incorrect signal output from the payout control device 200, a payout busy signal, a status signal indicating a payout abnormality, a shoot ball out switch signal indicating a shortage of game balls before payout, and an overflow are shown. The first input port 122 which takes in the overflow switch signal, the touch switch signal based on the input of the touch switch provided on the operation handle 24, and the signal from the RAM initialization switch 112 and supplies the signal to the gaming microcomputer 111 via the data bus 140. Is provided. The overflow switch signal is a signal output when it is detected that the game balls are stored in the lower plate 23 in a predetermined amount or more (full). The frame radio wave incorrect signal is a signal output based on the detection of radio waves by the frame radio wave sensor provided on the front frame 12 (main body frame), and whether the payout busy signal is in a state in which the payout control device 200 can receive a command. This is a signal indicating whether or not.

Further, the input section 120 is provided with a Schmitt buffer 125 for inputting signals such as a power failure monitoring signal and a reset signal from the power supply device 400 to the gaming microcomputer 111 and the like, and the Schmitt buffer 125 receives these input signals. It has a function to remove noise from. The power failure monitoring signal from the power supply device 400 is once input to the first input port 122, and taken into the gaming microcomputer 111 via the data bus 140. That is, it is treated as a signal equivalent to the signal from the above-mentioned various switches. This is because there is a limit to the number of terminals provided in the gaming microcomputer 111 for receiving signals from the outside.

On the other hand, the reset signal RST from which noise has been removed by the Schmitt buffer 125 is directly input to the reset terminal provided in the gaming microcomputer 111 and is also supplied to each port of the output unit 130. In addition, the reset signal RST is directly output to the relay board 70 without passing through the output unit 130, thereby turning off the test shot test signal held in the port (not shown) of the relay board 70 for output to the test shot test apparatus. Is configured.

In addition, the reset signal RST may be configured to be output to the test shot test device via the relay board 70. The reset signal RST is not supplied to the ports 122, 123, 124 of the input section 120. The data set to each port of the output unit 130 by the gaming microcomputer 111 immediately before the reset signal RST is input needs to be reset in order to prevent a malfunction of the system, but each of the input units 120 is input immediately before the reset signal RST is input. This is because the data read by the gaming microcomputer 111 from the port is discarded by resetting the gaming microcomputer 111.

The output unit 130 is provided with a Schmitt buffer 132 arranged on a communication path from the gaming microcomputer 111 to the effect control device 300 and a communication path from the gaming microcomputer 111 to the payout control device 200. Data is transmitted from the game control device 100 to the effect control device 300 and the payout control device 200 by serial communication. It should be noted that one-way communication is set so that no signal can be input from the effect control device 300 side to the game control device 100.

Further, the output unit 130 is connected to the data bus 140, and transmits data for notifying special test symbol information of the variable display game to a test firing test device of an accredited organization (not shown) and a signal indicating a probability state of a big hit via the relay board 70. The output buffer 133 is configured to be mountable. The buffer 133 is a component that is not mounted on the game control device (main board) of the pachinko gaming machine as an actual machine (mass-produced product) installed in the game shop. A detection signal of a switch that does not need to be processed, such as a starting port switch output from the proximity I/F 121, is supplied to the test-shooting test device via the relay board 70 without passing through the buffer 133.

On the other hand, a detection signal such as the magnetic sensor switch 61 and the radio wave sensor 62 that cannot be supplied to the test-shooting test device as it is is once taken into the game microcomputer 111 and processed into another signal or information, for example, a game machine controls the game. As an error signal indicating that the test is not possible, the error signal is supplied from the data bus 140 to the test-inspection test apparatus via the buffer 133 and the relay board 70.

The relay board 70 is provided with a port for receiving the signal output from the buffer 133 and supplying it to the test-shooting test apparatus, a connector for relaying and transmitting the signal line of the detection signal of the switch that does not pass through the buffer, and the like. There is. The chip enable signal CE output from the gaming microcomputer 111 is also supplied to the port on the relay board 70, and the signal of the port selectively controlled by the signal CE is supplied to the test-shooting test apparatus.

Further, the output unit 130 is connected to the data bus 140 to open a normal variation winning device 37 (a solenoid solenoid) 37c, a special variation winning device 39 to open a special winning opening solenoid 39b (big winning solenoid), A second output port 134 is provided for outputting the opening/closing data of the lever solenoid 86b that operates the lever to open the specific area 86.

Further, the output unit 130 has a third output port 135 for outputting ON/OFF data of the segment line to which the anode terminal of the LED is connected according to the content displayed on the collective display device 50, and the collective display device 50. A fourth output port 136 for outputting ON/OFF data of the digit line connected to the cathode terminal of the LED is provided.

Further, the output unit 130 is provided with a fifth output port 137 for outputting information about the gaming machine 10 such as big hit information to the external information terminal 71. The external information terminal 71 is provided with a photo relay and can be connected to, for example, an external device (such as an information collecting terminal or an amusement hall internal management device (hall computer)) installed in a game store, and information related to the gaming machine 10 is externally transmitted. It can be supplied to the device. Further, a firing permission signal is also output from the fifth output port 137 to the payout control device 200 via the Schmitt buffer 132.

Further, the output unit 130 receives the opening/closing data signal of the universal electric solenoid 37c or the special winning opening solenoid 39b output from the second output port 134 to generate and output a solenoid drive signal, which is a first driver (drive circuit). 138a, a second driver 138b that outputs an ON/OFF drive signal for a current supply side segment line of the collective display device 50 that is output from the third output port 135, and a collective display device 50 that is output from the fourth output port 136. A third driver 138c that outputs an ON/OFF drive signal for the digit line on the current drawing side, and a fourth driver 138d that outputs an external information signal supplied from the fifth output port 137 to an external device such as a management device to the external information terminal 71. Is provided.

The first driver 138a is supplied with 32V DC as a power supply voltage from the power supply device 400 in order to drive a solenoid that operates at 32V. Further, DC 12V is supplied to the second driver 138b that drives the segment lines of the collective display device 50. The third driver 138c for driving the digit line is for pulling out the digit line corresponding to the display data with a current, and therefore the power supply voltage may be either 12V or 5V.

The second driver 138b that outputs 12V causes a current to flow into the anode terminal of the LED through the segment line, and the third driver 138c that outputs the ground potential draws a current from the cathode terminal through the digit line, thereby providing a dynamic driving method. The power supply voltage flows to the LEDs that are sequentially selected by, and the LEDs are turned on. The fourth driver 138d, which outputs the external information signal to the external information terminal 71, is supplied with DC12V in order to give the external information signal a level of 12V. The buffer 133, the second output port 134, the first driver 138a, etc. may be provided not on the output unit 130 of the game control device 100, that is, on the main board, but on the relay board 70 side.

Further, the output unit 130 is provided with a photocoupler 139 for transmitting information such as an identification code of each gaming machine and a program to the external inspection device 500. The photocoupler 139 is configured to be able to communicate with each other so that the gaming microcomputer 111 can send and receive data to and from the inspection device 500 by serial communication. Since the data transmission/reception is performed using the serial communication terminal of the gaming microcomputer 111 as in the case of a general-purpose microprocessor, ports such as the input ports 122, 123, and 124 are not provided.

Furthermore, the output unit 130 receives the serial data (control data, lighting pattern data, character code (character code), etc.) output from the second output port 134, and outputs the performance display device 152 (status display device). A driver 150 for driving is provided. In the present embodiment, the performance display device 152 includes a plurality (four) of 7-segment type (8-segment type including the dot Dp) indicators (LED lamps), and the driver 150 is an LED driver. It is not limited to.

The performance display device 152 is provided on the game control device 100 (main board), but may be provided at another place. For example, the performance display device 152 can display, as a performance display, a display probability setting value, an accessory ratio, a ball output rate, and the number of discharged balls.

Here, the number of discharged balls is the number of game balls discharged from the game area 32 (also referred to as the number of out balls), the number of game balls that have passed through the winning opening (the number of winnings) and the game that has passed through the out opening 30b. It is the sum of the number of spheres. The number of discharged balls can be acquired by counting the signal of the out-ball detecting switch 74 or the like. In the present embodiment, the winning openings are a general winning opening 35, a starting winning opening 36 (first starting winning opening, starting opening 1), an ordinary variable winning device 37 (second starting winning opening, starting opening 2), and The special variation winning device 39 (large winning hole) is included.

The payout rate is a ratio (ratio) of the total number of prize balls to the number of discharged balls (or the number of shot balls), and is calculated by (number of acquired balls/number of discharged balls)×100(%). That is, the payout rate is the number of balls acquired (the total number of prize balls) per 100 discharged balls.

For example, the winning character ratio is in the state of big hit among the total number of award balls (total number of award balls) obtained by winning the prize hole in a predetermined period (for example, from turning on the game machine 10 to the present). Is the ratio (%) of the number of prize balls (the number of balls acquired for each character) obtained by winning the special winning opening (=so-called continuous character ratio). The ratio of the prizes may be the ratio of the number of prize balls (during the big hit state and the small hit state) obtained by winning the big prize hole (=the big prize hole ratio), out of the total number of prize balls. Or, the ratio of the number of prize balls obtained by winning the large winning a prize and the ordinary variable winning a prize device 37 (the second starting winning a prize) (= a so-called ratio of commonly used characters (total character ratio) )).

[Production control device]
Next, the configuration of the effect control device 300 (sub-board) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 4 is a block diagram of an effect control system of the gaming machine 10.

The production control device 300 is for displaying images on the display device 41 in accordance with commands and data from the main control microcomputer (CPU) 311 including an amusement chip (IC) and the main control microcomputer 311 as with the game microcomputer 111. A VDP (Video Display Processor) 312 as a graphic processor for performing the image processing, and a sound source LSI 314 for controlling the output of sound in order to reproduce various melodies and sound effects from the speaker 19.

In the main control microcomputer 311, a program ROM 321, which is a PROM (programmable read only memory) that stores programs executed by the CPU and various data, a RAM 322 that provides a work area, and the stored contents are retained even when power is not supplied during a power failure An FeRAM 323 that can be used, and an RTC (Real Time Clock) 338 that serves as a time counting unit that generates information indicating the current date and time (year, month, day, day of the week, etc.) are connected. A RAM for providing a work area is also provided inside the main control microcomputer 311.

A WDT (watchdog timer) circuit 324 is connected to the main control microcomputer 311. The main control microcomputer 311 analyzes the command from the game microcomputer 111, determines the effect content and instructs the VDP 312 on the content of the output video, instructs the sound source LSI 314 to give a reproduced sound, lights a decorative lamp, and drives the motor. And drive control of solenoids, management of production time, etc. are executed.

The VDP 312 is provided with a RAM 312a for providing a work area and a scaler 312b for enlarging and reducing an image. Further, the VDP 312 has an image ROM 325 in which character images and video data are stored, and an ultra-high-speed VRAM (video RAM) used for expanding and processing image data such as characters read from the image ROM 325. ) 326 is connected.

Although not particularly limited, data is transmitted and received between the main control microcomputer 311 and the VDP 312 in a parallel manner. By transmitting and receiving data in a parallel manner, it is possible to transmit commands and data in a shorter time than in the case of serial transmission.

From the VDP 312 to the main control microcomputer 311, a vertical synchronization signal VSYNC for synchronizing the image of the display device 41 and the lighting of the decorative lamp provided on the glass frame 15 or the game board 30, a synchronization signal for giving a data transmission timing. STS is input. It should be noted that the VDP 312 notifies the main control microcomputer 311 that it is in a waiting state for receiving the interrupt signals INT0 to INT and commands and data from the main control microcomputer 311 in order to notify the processing status such as the completion of drawing in the VRAM. A wait signal WAIT and the like are also input.

The effect control device 300 is provided with a signal conversion circuit 313 that generates a video signal to be transmitted to the display device 41 by the LVDS (small amplitude signal transmission) method. Video data, a horizontal synchronization signal HSYNC and a vertical synchronization signal VSYNC are input from the VDP 312 to the signal conversion circuit 313, and the image generated by the VDP 312 is sent to the display device 41 via the signal conversion circuit 313. Is displayed.

A voice ROM 327 storing voice data is connected to the sound source LSI 314. The main control microcomputer 311 and the tone generator LSI 314 are connected via an address/data bus 340. An interrupt signal INT is input from the sound source LSI 314 to the main control microcomputer 311. The effect control device 300 is provided with an amplifier circuit 337 including an audio power amplifier for driving the upper speaker 19a provided on the glass frame 15 and the lower speaker 19b provided on the front frame 12, and the sound source LSI 314 is provided. The generated sound is output from the upper speaker 19a and the lower speaker 19b via the amplifier circuit 337.

Further, the effect control device 300 is provided with an interface chip (command I/F) 331 that receives a command transmitted from the game control device 100. Through the command I/F331, the decoration special figure reservation number command, the decoration special figure command, the fluctuation command, the stop information command and the like transmitted from the game control apparatus 100 to the effect control apparatus 300, the effect control command signal (effect command) To receive as. Since the game microcomputer 111 of the game control device 100 operates at DC5V and the main control microcomputer 311 of the effect control device 300 operates at DC3.3V, the command I/F 331 has a signal level conversion function. There is.

In addition, in the effect control device 300, the board decoration LED control circuit 332 for driving and controlling the board decoration device 46 having the LED (light emitting diode) provided in the game board 30 (including the center case 40) and the glass frame 15 are provided. A frame decoration LED control circuit 333 that drives and controls a frame decoration device (for example, the frame decoration device 18 or the like) having an LED (light emitting diode) provided, and a board effect provided on the game board 30 (including the center case 40). A board effect movable body control circuit 334 is provided to drive and control the device 44 (for example, a movable accessory that enhances effect effects in cooperation with effect display on the display device 41). The board decoration device 46 may include the lamp display device 80 described above.

These control circuits 332 to 334 that drive and control lamps, motors, solenoids, etc. are connected to the main control microcomputer 311 via an address/data bus 340. A frame effect movable body control circuit for driving and controlling a frame effect device such as a motor provided in the glass frame 15 may be provided.

Further, in the effect control device 300, the effect button switch 25a built in the effect button 25 provided on the glass frame 15, the touch panel 25b provided on the surface of the effect button 25, and the motor in the board effect device 44. A function of detecting the on/off state of the performance accessory switch 47 (production motor switch) for detecting the initial position and the like and inputting a detection signal to the main control microcomputer 311, and a volume control switch provided in the production control device 300. A switch input circuit 336 for detecting the state of 335 and inputting a detection signal to the main control microcomputer 311 is provided.

The normal power supply unit 410 of the power supply device 400 supplies a DC voltage of a desired level to the effect control device 300 having the above-described configuration and electronic components controlled by the same, and thus drives a motor and a solenoid. DC32V, a display device 41 including a liquid crystal panel, DC12V for driving a motor and an LED, DC5V serving as a power supply voltage of the command I/F 331, and a voltage of DC15V for driving a motor, an LED and a speaker. Is configured to.

Further, when an LSI that operates at a low voltage such as 3.3V or 1.2V is used as the main control microcomputer 311, DC- for generating DC3.3V or DC1.2V based on DC5V is used. A DC converter is provided in the performance control device 300. The DC-DC converter may be provided in the normal power supply unit 410.

The reset signal generated by the control signal generation unit 430 of the power supply device 400 is supplied to the main control microcomputer 311 and puts the device in the reset state. In addition, in the form of being output from the main control microcomputer 311, the VDP 312 (VDPRESET signal), the sound source LSI 314, the amplifier circuit 337 (SNDRRESET signal) that drives the speaker, and the control circuits 332 to 334 (IORESET that drive and control the lamp and the motor) Signals) and put them in a reset state. In addition, the production control device 300 is connected to a cooling FAN 45 that cools each part of the gaming machine 10, and the cooling fan 45 is driven when the production control device 300 is powered on.

Next, game control performed in these control circuits will be described. The CPU 111a of the game microcomputer 111 of the game control device 100 extracts a random number value for hit determination of the general figure based on the input of the detection signal of the game ball from the gate switch 34a provided in the general figure starting gate 34 to extract the ROM111b. Is compared with the determination value stored in to determine whether or not the general figure variation display game has missed.

Then, on the public figure display device 53, after the identification symbol is variably displayed for a predetermined time, the public figure variability display game is displayed in which it is stopped. When the result of the universal figure variation display game is a hit, a special result mode is displayed on the universal figure indicator 53, the universal electric solenoid 37c is operated, and the movable member 37b of the regular variation winning device 37 is operated for a predetermined time (for example, , 0.3 seconds) The opening control is performed as described above. That is, the game control device 100 serves as conversion control execution means for performing conversion control of the conversion member (movable member 37b). In addition, when the result of the general figure fluctuation display game is out of alignment, control is performed to display the result mode of the outlay on the general figure display device 53.

In addition, based on the input of the detection signal of the game ball from the start opening 1 switch 36a provided in the start winning opening 36, the start winning (starting memory) is stored, and the big hit judgment of the special figure 1 variable display game is based on the starting memory. The random number for use is extracted and compared with the determination value stored in the ROM 111b to determine whether or not the special figure 1 variable display game is missed.

Also, the starting memory is stored based on the input of the detection signal of the game ball from the starting opening 2 switch 37a provided in the normal variation winning device 37, and the random number value for jackpot determination of the special figure 2 variation display game is based on the starting memory. Is extracted and compared with the determination value stored in the ROM 111b to determine whether or not the special figure 2 variable display game has missed.

Then, the CPU 111a of the game control device 100 outputs to the effect control device 300 a control signal (effect control command) including the determination result of the special figure 1 variable display game or the special figure 2 variable display game. Then, after the identification symbol is variably displayed for a predetermined time on the special figure 1 display 51 or the special figure 2 display 52, the special figure variation display game that is stopped and displayed is displayed. That is, the game control device 100 controls the progress of the variable display game based on the winning of the game balls flowing down the game region 32 to the starting winning region (first starting winning port 36, normal variable winning device 37). To make.

Further, the effect control device 300 displays the decorative special figure variation display game corresponding to the special figure variation display game on the display device 41 based on the control signal from the game control apparatus 100. Further, the effect control device 300 performs processing such as setting of effect state, output of sounds from the speakers 19a and 19b, and control of light emission of various LEDs based on the control signal from the game control device 100. That is, the effect control device 300 constitutes an effect control means for controlling the effect related to the game (variable display game, etc.).

Then, the CPU 111a of the game control device 100 displays the special result mode on the special figure 1 display 51 or the special figure 2 display 52 and generates the special game state when the result of the special figure variation display game is a hit. Let In the process of generating the special game state, the CPU 111a, for example, causes the special winning opening solenoid 39b to open the opening/closing door 39c of the special variation winning device 39 to perform control so that the game ball can flow into the special winning opening. ..

Either a predetermined number (for example, 10) of game balls is won in the special winning opening, or a predetermined openable time (for example, 27 seconds or 0.05 seconds) elapses from the opening of the special winning opening. Opening the special winning opening until one of the conditions is achieved is defined as one round (R), and this is continued (repeated) for a predetermined number of rounds (for example, 15 times, 11 times or 2 times) (cycle game) I do. That is, the game control device 100 serves as a special winning opening opening/closing control unit that controls the opening and closing of the special winning opening when the stop result appearance becomes the special result appearance. Further, when the result of the special figure variation display game is off, control is performed to display the deviation result mode on the special figure 1 display device 51 or the special figure 2 display device 52.

In addition, the game control device 100 can generate a high probability state as a game state after the special game state ends, based on the result mode of the special figure variation display game. The high probability state (probability change state) is a state in which the probability of a hit result in the special figure variation display game is higher than that in the normal probability state. In addition, even if the high probability state is reached based on the result mode of the special figure variable display game, the special figure 1 variable display game and the special figure 2 variable display game, Both are in high probability state.

Further, the game control device 100 can generate a time saving state (specific gaming state) as a gaming state after the special gaming state ends, based on the result mode of the special figure variation display game. In the time saving state, control is performed so that the universal figure variation display game and the normal variation winning device 37 are set to the time saving operation state, and the normal variation winning device 37 per unit time is longer than that in the case where the normal variation winning device 37 is in the normal operation state. Since it is controlled so that the opening time of is substantially increased, it becomes the universal communication support state. It should be noted that even in the high probability state (normal probability variation state) excluding the latent probability variation state, the time-saving state is duplicated and the ordinary electric power support is executed.

For example, in the time saving state, it is possible to perform a time-shortening variation in which the execution time (general figure variation time) of the above-mentioned universal figure variation display game is changed to a second variation display time shorter than the normal first variation display time (for example, (10000 msec is 1000 msec). In the time saving state, the execution time of the special figure variation display game (special figure variation time) is shortened as compared with the normal time, and the time reduction variation of the special figure variation display game is also executed.

In addition, in the time saving state, it is possible to control the universal figure stop time for displaying the result of the universal figure variation display game to be the second stop time (eg, 704 msec) shorter than the first stop time (eg, 1604 msec). Is.

Further, in the time saving state, when the universal figure variation display game is a hit result and the regular variation winning device 37 is opened, the opening time (normal communication opening time) is the first opening time in the normal state (for example, 100 msec). It is possible to control so that the second opening time is longer than that (for example, 1352 msec).

In addition, in the time saving state, the number of times the normal variation winning device 37 is opened (the number of ordinary electric open times) is larger than the first number of times of opening (for example, two times) with respect to one hit result of the universal figure variation display game. It is possible to set the second opening number (for example, 4 times). Further, in the time-saving state, it is possible to make the probability of being a hit result of the universal figure fluctuation display game (general figure probability) higher and higher than the ordinary probability (low probability) in the normal operation state.

In the time saving state, the general variable winning device 37 is opened by changing any one or more of the universal figure variation time, the universal figure stop time, the number of universal communication open, the universal communication open time, and the universal figure probability. Try to extend the conversion time longer than usual. As a result, in the time saving state, winning in the normal variation winning device 37 is easier than in the normal gaming state, and the number of executions of the special figure variation display game per unit time can be increased more than in the normal gaming state. Further, it is possible to set a plurality of types of time saving states that are different from each other. Further, the movable member 37b may be set not to be opened in the normal operation state (universal figure probability is 0). Further, in the case of a win, either the first opening mode or the second opening mode may be selected. In this case, the selection probabilities of the first opening mode and the second opening mode may be different. Further, the high-probability state and the short-time state can occur independently of each other, both of them can occur at the same time, or only one of them can occur.

[Transition state when power is turned on]
As described above, depending on the on/off state of the RAM initialization switch 112 and the setting key switch 93 when the power is turned on, the state shifts to four states (modes).

If the RAM initialization switch 112 and the setting key switch 93 are turned on when the power is turned on, the probability setting value (setting value) is changed to a variable setting state (setting changing state, setting changing mode) in which the probability setting value can be changed. (See A1027-A1036 in FIG. 5B and FIG. 6B).

Next, when the setting key switch 93 is turned on but the RAM initialization switch 112 is turned off when the power is turned on, the state shifts to a setting confirmation state (setting confirmation mode) in which the probability setting value can be confirmed (Fig. 5B, A1031-A1036 and FIG. 6B).

If the setting key switch 93 is off but the RAM initialization switch 112 is on when the power is turned on, the RAM initialization state (RAM clear mode) is entered and the RAM initialization process (RAM clear) is performed. (Processing) is executed, and the RAM 111c is initialized (see A1042-1044 in FIG. 5B).

When the setting key switch 93 and the RAM initialization switch 112 are off when the power is turned on, the normal power recovery state (normal power recovery mode) is entered, and the power is simply restored.

[Control of game control device]
Hereinafter, control of a gaming machine that performs such a game will be described. First, the control executed by the gaming microcomputer (gaming microcomputer) 111 of the gaming control device 100 will be described. The control process by the gaming microcomputer 111 mainly includes a main process shown in FIGS. 5A and 5B and a timer interrupt process shown in FIG. 9 which is performed in a predetermined time period (for example, 4 msec).

[Main processing (game control device)]
First, the main process will be described. 5A and 5B are flowcharts showing the procedure of main processing by the game control device 100. The main process is started when the power is turned on. In the flowchart of the process executed by the game control device 100, the code (number) of the step is expressed as "A***".

As shown in FIG. 5A, when starting the main process, the game control device 100 first executes a process of prohibiting an interrupt (A1001). Further, a stack pointer setting process for setting the stack pointer which is the top address of the area for saving the value of the register or the like when the interrupt occurs (A1002).

Then, register bank 0 is designated as the register bank to be used (A1003), and the upper address of the RAM start address is set in a predetermined register (A1004). For example, when the RAM address is in the range of 0000h to 01FFh, 00h is set as the upper address.

Next, the game control device 100 outputs a firing prohibition signal and sets the firing permission signal to a prohibited state (A1005). The firing permission signal is set to a prohibited state when at least one of the game control device 100 and the payout control device 200 outputs a firing prohibition signal, and the firing of the game ball is prohibited. After that, the game control device 100 reads the states of the setting key switch 93 and the RAM initialization switch 112 (A1006). That is, the signals from the setting key switch 93 and the RAM initialization switch 112 are read.

Further, the game control device 100 sets a power supply delay timer (A1007). By setting a predetermined initial value in the power supply delay timer, a program of sub-control means (for example, payout control device 200 or effect control device 300) that performs various controls in accordance with instructions from the game control device 100 that is the main control means. A waiting time (for example, 3 seconds) for waiting for the normal startup is set. As a result, when the power is turned on, the command is sent to the slave control device before the game control device 100 starts up first and the slave control devices (for example, the payout control device 200 and the effect control device 300) start up, and the slave control device. Can avoid dropping a command. That is, the game control device 100 delays the activation of the main control means (game control device 100) and waits for the activation of the slave control devices (payout control device 200, effect control device 300, etc.) when the power is turned on. It forms a standby means for setting the standby time.

In addition, the power supply delay timer measures time using a storage area (RAM area or register, which is not the target of validity determination) that is not the target of validity determination (checksum calculation) of RAM. As a result, when calculating check data such as a checksum of the RAM area, it is not necessary to exclude a part of the RAM area for calculation, and thus it is possible to prevent the control at power-on from becoming complicated.

By reading the states of the setting key switch 93 and the RAM initialization switch 112 before the start of the standby time, the operations of the setting key switch 93 and the RAM initialization switch 112 can be reliably detected. That is, if the states of the setting key switch 93 and the RAM initialization switch 112 are read after the waiting time has elapsed, the setting key switch 93 and the RAM initialization switch 112 are operated after the waiting time has elapsed, or the power is turned on. It is necessary to continue to operate the setting key switch 93 and the RAM initialization switch 112 from the time until the waiting time elapses. However, by reading the state before the start of the waiting time, there is a situation in which the operation of the setting key switch 93 and the RAM initialization switch 112 performed at the time of turning on the power cannot be accepted without performing such a troublesome operation. It can be prevented.

When the power supply delay timer is set (A1007), the game control device 100 executes a process of measuring a standby time and a process of monitoring occurrence of a power failure during the standby time (A1008 to A1010).

When the power failure monitoring process is started, the game control device 100 first determines whether a power failure occurs by reading the power failure monitoring signal input from the power supply device 400 via the port and the data bus. (A1008). When a power failure occurs (result of A1008 is “Y”), the game machine waits until the power is cut off.

When the power failure has not occurred (the result of A1008 is "N"), the game control device 100 updates the power-on delay timer by -1 (A1009), and determines whether the value of the timer is 0 or not. Yes (A1010). If the timer value is not 0 (result of A1010 is “N”), that is, if the waiting time has not ended, the process returns to step A1008.

That is, the game control device 100 serves as a power failure monitoring means for monitoring occurrence of power failure in a predetermined standby time. As a result, it becomes possible to deal with a power failure that has occurred during the period in which the activation of the game control device 100, which is the main control means, is delayed, and it is possible to appropriately deal with a problem at the time of turning on the power. Note that access to the RAM is not permitted until the end of the standby time, and the stored contents at the time of the previous power shutdown are retained, so backup processing etc. is performed when a power failure occurs here. No need. Therefore, even if a power failure occurs during the standby time, it is not necessary to back up the RAM, and the control load can be reduced.

On the other hand, when the value of the timer is 0 (the result of A1010 is “Y”), that is, when the waiting time is over, the game control device 100 can read and write RWM (read/write) such as RAM or EEPROM. Access to the memory is permitted (A1011), and off data is output to all output ports (set to a state where there is no output) (A1012).

Next, the game control device 100 sets a serial port (a port installed in advance in the game microcomputer 111, which is used for communication with the effect control device 300 and the payout control device 200 in this embodiment) (A1013). ).

Further, here, the driver 150 that drives the performance display device 152 (state display device) may be initialized. The game control device 100 writes a command including control data corresponding to the contents of the initial setting in the transmission buffer of the second output port 134 (serial communication circuit) and transmits it to the driver 150. For example, the game control device 100 sets the duty ratio in the initial setting. The duty ratio corresponds to the brightness of each LED (each segment) of the performance display device 152. The game control device 100 sets the number of used digits of the performance display device 152 in the initial setting. In this embodiment, the number of used digits is four.

Next, the game control device 100 activates a CTC (Counter/Timer Circuit) circuit that generates a timer interrupt signal and a random number update trigger signal (CTC) in the game microcomputer 111 (clock generator) (A1014). The CTC circuit is provided in the clock generator in the gaming microcomputer 111. The clock generator divides the oscillation signal (original clock signal) from the oscillation circuit 113 and a timer interrupt signal of a predetermined cycle (for example, 4 milliseconds) to the CPU 111a based on the divided signal. And a CTC circuit for generating a signal CTC that gives a trigger for updating the random number to be supplied to the random number generation circuit.

Subsequently, the game control device 100 sets a RAM abnormality flag indicating an abnormality in the RAM (here, the RAM 111c) (A1015). Here, the abnormality premise flag is temporarily set in a predetermined register.

Next, the game control device 100 determines whether or not the value of the power failure inspection area 1 in the RWM is normal power failure inspection area check data (A1016). If it is normal (result of A1016 is "Y"), it is determined whether the value of the power failure inspection area 2 in the RWM is normal power failure inspection area check data (A1017).

Furthermore, if the value of the power failure inspection area 2 is normal (the result of A1017 is “Y”), the game control device 100 calculates a checksum of a predetermined area (for example, a game control work area) in the RWM. A calculation process is executed (A1018), and it is determined whether or not the calculated checksum and the checksum at the time of power off match (A1019). If the checksums match (result of A1019 is "Y"), the RAM is normal and the RAM abnormality flag indicating abnormality of the RAM is cleared (A1020). Then, the process proceeds to step A1021.

In addition, when the game control device 100 determines that the check data in the power failure inspection area is not normal data (the result of A1016 is “N” or the result of A1017 is “N”), the checksums do not match. (The result of A1019 is “N”), the process proceeds to step A1021 without clearing the RAM abnormality flag.

Next, the game control device 100 determines whether or not both the setting key switch 93 and the RAM initialization switch 112 are on (A1021). When both switches are on (result of A1021 is “Y”), the game control device 100 shifts to a setting variable state (setting change mode), and executes the process of changing probability setting in steps A1027-A1037. ..

When at least one of the setting key switch 93 and the RAM initialization switch 112 is off (result of A1021 is "N"), the game control device 100 sets a RAM abnormality flag indicating an abnormality of the RAM (here, RAM111c). It is determined whether it has been done (A1022). When the RAM abnormality flag is not set (result of A1022 is “N”), it is determined whether the probability setting changing flag is set (A1023). When the probability setting changing flag is not set (result of A1023 is “N”), the process of confirming the probability setting of step A1031-A1037 (during setting confirmation state, setting confirmation mode), step A1041-1044 The RAM initialization processing (RAM clear processing) or the normal power-on processing (when the power is restored) in steps A1041, A1045, and A1046 is executed.

When the probability setting changing flag is set (the result of A1023 is “Y”), the game control device 100 informs that the game control device 100 (main board, main board) has an abnormality. An error notification command is transmitted to effect control device 300 (A1024). The effect control device 300 that has received the command for the main abnormality error notification notifies that there is an abnormality in the game control device 100.

Subsequently, the game control device 100 causes the driver 150 of the performance display device 152 to display the 7-segment display data when the game is stopped (data of the error display of “E1” in FIG. 9C) on the performance display device 152. To (A1025). Then, the ON data of the security signal for notifying the external device (the internal management device for the game hall (hall computer), the information collecting terminal, etc.) of the abnormality is output to the external information terminal 71 (A1026). Here, even when the information about the big hit remains in the RAM 111c, other signals such as the big hit signal to the external information terminal 71 are maintained in the off state. After that, the processing of steps A1025 and A1026 is repeated to wait, and the setting change operation (both the setting key switch 93 and the RAM initialization switch 112 are turned on) is performed again to wait for the power to be turned on. While the process of steps A1025 and A1026 is repeated and waiting, the interrupt remains disabled (A1001), and the timer interrupt process capable of executing the special figure 1 and 2 game processing and the general figure game processing is executed. Since (FIG. 7) cannot be executed, a game (special figure variation display game, general figure variation display game) cannot be executed.

As described above, it is determined that there is an abnormality when the probability setting changing flag is set even though the setting changing operation (the ON operation of both the setting key switch 93 and the RAM initialization switch 112) is not executed. , A1024-A1026 are executed. For example, if the power is turned off and restarted while the probability setting is being changed (before the setting change is completed), the probability setting changing flag may be set even though the setting changing operation has not been executed. is there.

On the other hand, when the RAM abnormality flag is set (the result of A1022 is “Y”), the game control device 100 notifies the game control device 100 (main board) of the abnormality by the main abnormality error notification. The command is transmitted to the effect control device 300 (A1024), and the 7-segment display data when the game is stopped (error display data of “E1” in FIG. 9C) is output to the driver 150 of the performance display device 152 (A1025). ), ON data of the security signal is output to the external information terminal 71 to notify the external device of the RAM abnormality (A1026). As in the case described above, other signals to the external information terminal 71 such as the big hit signal are maintained in the off state even when the information about the big hit remains in the RAM 111c. After that, the processes of steps A1025 and A1026 are repeated and the process stands by.

When both the setting key switch 93 and the RAM initialization switch 112 are on (the result of A1021 is “Y”), the gaming control device 100 starts the process of changing the probability setting (during the setting variable state). First, it is determined whether or not the RAM abnormality flag is set (A1027). When the RAM abnormality flag is set (the result of A1027 is “Y”), it is unknown whether the probability setting value is correct, so the probability setting value stored in the probability setting value area of the RAM 111c is cleared. After setting the initial value (for example, the lowest setting value “1”) (A1028), the probability setting changing flag indicating that the probability setting is being changed is set (A1029). If the RAM abnormality flag is not set (result of A1027 is “N”), the probability setting changing flag is set without clearing the probability setting value (A1029). Next, the command in the process of changing the probability setting is transmitted to the effect control device 300 (effect control board) (A1030), and the process proceeds to step A1034. Note that the effect control device 300 that has received the command for changing the probability setting notifies the display device 41 or the like that the probability setting is being changed.

In the game control device 100, at least one of the setting key switch 93 and the RAM initialization switch 112 is off (result of A1021 is “N”), and the RAM abnormality flag is not set (result of A1022 is “N”). ), and when the probability setting changing flag is not set (result of A1023 is "N"), it is determined whether the setting key switch 93 is on (A1031). When the setting key switch 93 is on (the result of A1031 is “Y”), the RAM initialization switch 112 is off, and the probability setting confirmation (during the setting confirmation state) processing is started. A probability setting confirmation flag indicating that the setting is being confirmed is set (A1032). Then, the command for which the probability setting is being confirmed is transmitted to the effect control device 300 (effect control board) (A1033), and the process proceeds to step A1034. Note that the effect control device 300 that has received the command for changing the probability setting notifies the display device 41 or the like that the probability setting is being confirmed.

After step A1030 or step A1033, the game control device 100 executes the processing of steps A1034 to A1040 as common processing during the probability setting change and the probability setting confirmation.

The game control device 100 first saves 128 ms (predetermined time) in the security signal control timer area in order to output the security signal during the probability setting change and the probability setting confirmation (A1034). Note that the count of the security signal control timer and the output of the security signal are executed in the probability setting change/confirmation process (FIG. 6B) described later, but when the probability setting change or the probability setting confirmation ends early, the remaining The counting of the security signal control timer and the output of the security signal are executed in the external information editing process (A1321). During the probability setting change and the probability setting confirmation, the security signal is output for at least 50 ms.

Next, the game control device 100 permits interruption (A1035). As a result, the timer interrupt process (FIG. 7) can be executed. Then, it is determined whether the setting key switch 93 is off (A1036). When the setting key switch 93 is on (result of A1036 is “N”), it is determined whether a power failure has occurred (A1037). If no power failure has occurred (result of A1037 is “N”), the process returns to step A1036. On the other hand, when a power failure has occurred (result of A1037 is "Y"), the process at the time of power failure of steps A1055-A1061 is executed.

As described above, as long as the setting key switch 93 is on and the power failure has not occurred, the probability setting value can be changed in the setting variable state (setting changing state, setting changing mode) or the probability setting value can be confirmed. The setting confirmation status (setting confirmation mode) continues.

On the other hand, when the setting key switch 93 is off (result of A1036 is “Y”), the game control device 100 prohibits interruption (A1038) and issues a notification end command to the effect control device 300 (effect control board). (A1039). The effect control device 300 that receives the notification end command ends the notification that the probability setting is being confirmed or the notification that the probability setting is being changed.

Next, the game control device 100 determines whether or not the probability setting changing flag is set, that is, whether or not the probability setting is being changed so far (A1040). If the probability setting changing flag is set (the result of A1040 is “Y”), that is, if the probability setting is being changed so far, the RAM initialization processing (to be described later) of steps A1042-A1044 is executed. To do. On the other hand, when the probability setting changing flag is not set (the result of A1040 is “N”), that is, when the probability setting is being confirmed so far, when the power is turned on after step A1045 (when the power is restored). Perform the normal processing of.

When the setting key switch 93 is off (result of A1031 is “N”), the game control device 100 determines whether or not the RAM initialization switch 112 is on (A1041). When the RAM initialization switch 112 is on (result of A1041 is “Y”), the RAM area other than the probability setting value area for storing the probability setting value is cleared to 0 in the RAM 111c (A1042). That is, the game information stored in the RAM 111c is cleared to 0, except for the probability setting value stored in the probability setting value area. Further, the above-mentioned probability setting changing flag is also cleared here. In addition to the probability setting value area, it is also possible to configure such that the stack area and unused area are not cleared, or the work area and stack area related to performance information and its display (performance display) are not cleared. .. The performance information is derived on the basis of the number of prize balls obtained by winning, and, for example, the winning rate, the base value (the winning rate in the normal gaming state), the role ratio, the number of discharged balls, etc. is there.

Next, the game control device 100 saves the initial value at the time of RAM initialization in the area to be initialized (A1043). Then, the command for RAM initialization is transmitted to the effect control device 300 (effect control board) (A1044), and the process proceeds to step A1047.

On the other hand, when the RAM initialization switch 112 is off (result of A1041 is “N”), the game control device 100 is a normal power source because both the setting key switch 93 and the RAM initialization switch 112 are off. When the power is turned on (when the power is restored), the processing is started, and the power failure restoration processing is executed (A1045). For example, the initial value when power is restored (when power is restored) is saved in the area to be initialized. Further, the above-mentioned probability setting confirmation flag is also cleared here. Next, the command at the time of power failure recovery corresponding to the processing number prepared for rationally executing the special figure game processing described later is transmitted to the effect control device 300 (effect control board) (A1046), and step A1047. Process shifts to.

The command for RAM initialization sent in the process of step A1044 and the command for power failure restoration sent in the process of step A1046 include a model designation command indicating the type of gaming machine, and suspension of special figures 1 and 2. Number of decoration special figure 1 hold number command and decoration special figure 2 hold number command, probability state (high-probability state or low probability state) or probability information command indicating presence/absence of time saving state, special figure variation in predetermined production mode An effect number information command indicating the number of times the display game has been executed and a power failure recovery command indicating that the power has been turned on are included.

Further, in the command at the time of RAM initialization and the command at the time of power failure recovery, a setting value information command (probability setting value information) indicating setting value information (setting information) which is information of the probability setting value (setting value) of the gaming machine 10. Command) is included. The game control device 100 need only transmit the setting value information command to the effect control device 300 only once when the power is restored (turned on), and thereafter, the effect control device 300 refers to the setting value information stored by itself. You can control production.

The RAM initialization command also includes a RAM initialization command (RAM clear command). Upon receiving the command for RAM initialization, the production control device 300 displays a customer waiting demo on the display device 41 and notifies the user of RAM initialization (RAM clear) by the sound of the LED and the speaker of the panel decoration device 46, for example. Do it for a second. Further, the command at the time of power failure recovery includes a screen designation command for designating the display content of the screen of the display device 41. Note that the screen designation command is a customer waiting demo command during normal processing (when it is neither changing nor hitting) for both special figures 1 and 2, and is a restoration screen command otherwise.

After step A1044 or step A1046, the game control device 100 activates and sets the random number generation circuit (A1047). Specifically, the CPU 111a sets a code (specified value) for activating the random number generation circuit in a predetermined register (CTC update permission register) in the random number generation circuit. Also, a bit transposed pattern of a hard random number (here, a big hit random number) generated by the hardware of the random number generation circuit is set.

A bit transposition pattern is a method of exchanging the bit arrangement of the extracted random numbers (arrangement before bit transposition in the upper row) in a predetermined order and storing as a different bit arrangement (arrangement after bit transposition in the lower row). Is a pattern that determines.

In the present embodiment, by exchanging the bits of the random number according to the bit transposed pattern, the regularity of the random number can be broken and the confidentiality of the random number can be improved. The bit transposition pattern may be a fixed single pattern or may be selected from a plurality of patterns prepared in advance. Further, the user may be allowed to arbitrarily set it.

After that, the game control device 100 extracts the value of a predetermined register (soft random number registers 1 to n) in the random number generation circuit when the power is turned on, and various corresponding initial value random numbers (the big hit symbol random number for determining the big hit symbol) Initial value (big hit design initial value random number), small hit design random number initial value to determine the small hit design random number (small hit design initial value random number) (only if there is a small hit) Saved in a predetermined area of the RWM as a start value of the initial value (random initial value random number), the initial value of the falling lottery random number used in the falling lottery (falling random number initial value random number), etc. (A1048), and the interruption is permitted (A1049). ). Since the random number generation circuit in the CPU 111a used in this embodiment is configured such that the initial value of the soft random number register changes every time the power is turned on, this value is used as the start value (initial value) of various initial value random numbers. By doing so, it is possible to break the regularity of the random numbers generated by the software and make it difficult for the player to obtain an illegal random number.

Subsequently, the game control device 100 executes an initial value random number updating process for updating the values of various initial value random numbers and breaking the regularity of the random numbers (A1050). Although not particularly limited, in the present embodiment, the big hit random number, the big hit pattern random number, the hit random number, and the falling lottery random number are configured to be generated using the random numbers generated in the random number generation circuit. There is. However, the big hit random number is a so-called "high-speed counter" that is updated based on a clock having a speed equal to or higher than the operation clock of the CPU, and the big hit symbol random number, the hit random number, and the falling lottery random number are timer interrupts that are the processing units of the program. This is a "low-speed counter" that is updated based on the CTC output (CTC (CTC2) different from CTC (CTC0) of the timer interrupt process) having the same cycle as the process.

In addition, in the case of big hit symbol random number, hit symbol random number, falling lottery random number, the so-called "initial value change method" is adopted in which the start value is changed every time the random number makes a round by using each initial value random number (generated by software). ing. Each of the random numbers may be updated by a counter method by +1 or 1, or may be a random update by which all values within the range appear in a scattered manner without duplication until one cycle. That is, the jackpot random number is a random number that is updated only by hardware, and the jackpot symbol random number, the hit random number, and the falling lottery random number are random numbers that are updated by hardware and software.

Next, the game control device 100 prohibits interruption (A1051) and executes a performance display editing process for editing the performance information and its display (performance display) (A1052). Here, performance information (such as a character ratio and a ball output rate) may be calculated. Further, when the RAM abnormality flag is set in the register, the work area and the stack area related to the performance information and its display (performance display) may be cleared (if not cleared in step A1042). After that, the interrupt is permitted (A1053). As a result, the timer interrupt process (FIG. 7) can be executed.

Next, the game control device 100 determines whether or not a power failure has occurred (A1054). When no power failure has occurred (result of A1054 is “N”), the process returns to step A1050. As a result, the processing of steps A1050-A1054 is repeated until a power failure occurs.

When a power failure occurs (result of A1054 is “Y”), the game control device 100 starts the process at the time of power failure, temporarily interrupts (A1055), and outputs off data to all output ports ( 1056). After that, the power failure inspection area check data 1 is saved in the power failure inspection area 1 (A1057), and the power failure inspection area check data 2 is saved in the power failure inspection area 2 (A1058). Further, a checksum calculation process for calculating a checksum when the power of the RWM is cut off is executed (A1059), and the calculated checksum is saved (A1060). Finally, the process of prohibiting access to the RWM is executed (A1061), and the process stands by until the power of the gaming machine is cut off.

In this way, by saving the check data in the power failure inspection area and calculating the checksum at the time of power shutdown, it is possible to check whether the information stored in the RWM before power shutdown was correctly backed up. It can be judged at the time of re-input.

[Timer interrupt processing]
Next, the timer interrupt process will be described. FIG. 6A is a flowchart showing the procedure of timer interrupt processing (interrupt processing program). The timer interrupt process is started when a periodic timer interrupt signal generated by the CTC circuit in the clock generator is input to the CPU 111a. When a timer interrupt occurs in the gaming microcomputer 111, timer interrupt processing is started.

When the timer interrupt process is started, the game control device 100 first designates the register bank 1 as the register bank to be used (A1301), and sets the upper address of the RAM start address in a predetermined register (A1302). Switching from register bank 0 used in the main process to register bank 1 at the start of the timer interrupt process is equivalent to saving the registers used in the main process. When the timer interrupt process is started, the interrupt is automatically disabled.

Next, the game control device 100 executes input processing from various sensors and switches and capture of signals, that is, input processing for reading the state of each input port (A1303). Next, based on the probability setting changing flag and the probability setting confirming flag, it is determined whether the probability setting is being changed or the probability setting is being confirmed (A1304). When the probability setting is being changed or the probability setting is being confirmed (the result of A1304 is “Y”), the probability setting changing/confirming process for changing or confirming the probability setting value is executed (A1305).

When the probability setting is not being changed or the probability setting is not being confirmed (the result of A1304 is “N”), the game control device 100 uses an actuator such as a solenoid (for example, a special winning opening solenoid 39b) based on the output data set in various processes. An output process for performing drive control of the LED, drive control of the LED (light emission control), and the like is executed (A1306). When the firing prohibition signal is output in the processing of step A1005 in the main processing, the firing permission signal is output by performing this output processing, and the firing permission signal can be set to the permission state.

Next, the game control device 100 executes a payout command transmission process for outputting the command set in the transmission buffer to the payout control device 200 in various processes (A1307), and further, a random number update process 1 (A1308), a random number update. The process 2 (A1309) is executed. After that, monitoring whether or not there is a normal signal input from the starting opening 1 switch 36a, the starting opening 2 switch 37a, the winning opening switch 35a, and the special winning opening switch 39a, and the error monitoring (the front frame and the glass frame are opened) A winning opening switch/state monitoring process is performed (A1310).

Next, the game control device 100 determines whether or not abnormal discharge of game balls is occurring at the special winning opening (A1311). When the abnormal discharge occurrence flag is set by the abnormal discharge monitoring process (A1318) described later, it can be determined that the abnormal discharge is occurring. When abnormal discharge is occurring (result of A1311 is “Y”), the processes of step A1315 and thereafter are executed.

When the abnormal discharge is not occurring (the result of A1311 is “N”), the game control device 100 executes the special figure game process for performing the process related to the special figure variation display game (A1312). The details of the special figure game process will be described later.

Next, the game control device 100 executes a universal figure game process for performing a process related to the universal figure variation display game (A1313). A segment LED edit process for driving a segment LED provided in the gaming machine 10 for displaying a special figure variation game and various information regarding a game so as to display desired contents is executed (A1314).

Further, the game control device 100 executes a magnet fraud monitoring process of checking the detection signal from the magnetic sensor switch 61 to determine whether there is any abnormality (A1315). Further, a radio wave fraud monitoring process (board radio wave fraud monitoring process) for checking whether a detection signal from the radio wave sensor 62 of the game board is normal or not is executed (A1316).

After that, the game control device 100 executes a vibration fraud monitoring process for monitoring fraud caused by vibration based on the input from the vibration sensor 65 (A1317). Next, an abnormal discharge monitoring process for monitoring abnormal discharge from the special winning opening is executed (A1318). In the abnormal discharge monitoring processing, the abnormal discharge of the special variation winning device 39 is performed based on the input from the special winning opening switch 39a, the specific area switch 72 (V winning opening switch), and the remaining ball outlet switch 73 in the special variation winning device 39. Is monitored, and the abnormal discharge occurrence flag is set when abnormal discharge occurs. The game balls that have passed through the special winning opening switch 39a of the special variation winning device 39 are discharged through the specific area switch 72 (V winning opening switch) or the remaining ball discharging switch 73.

Next, the game control device 100 executes an external information editing process of setting a signal to be output to various external devices in an output buffer (A1319). Then, the performance display monitor control process for controlling the display of the performance display device 152 is executed (A1320). After that, the timer interrupt processing ends.

Note that when the timer interrupt process returns, restoration of the interrupt disabled state and restoration of the register bank specification is configured to be performed automatically. However, depending on the CPU used, interrupts are enabled after the external information editing process. It is also possible to perform the processing for returning or the processing for returning the designation of the register bank to the register bank 0.

[Probability setting change/confirmation process]
Next, details of the probability setting change/confirmation process (A1305) in the timer interrupt process will be described. FIG. 6B is a flowchart showing a procedure of probability setting change/confirmation processing. In the probability setting change/confirmation process, the probability setting value can be changed or confirmed.

The game control device 100 first determines whether or not the probability setting value is within the normal range (A2401). The probability setting value here is stored in the probability setting value area of the RAM 111c.

When the probability setting value is within the normal range (result of A2401 is “Y”), the game control device 100 sets probability setting value display data corresponding to the probability setting value (A2402), and the performance display device 152. To the driver via the driver 150 (A2404). When the probability setting value is not within the normal range (result of A2401 is “N”), the extinction data is set as the probability setting value display data (A2403) and is output to the performance display device 152 via the driver 150 (A2404). ).

Here, the probability setting value display data is the display probability setting value data displayed on the performance display device 152, and is stored in the probability setting value display data area. In order to prevent confusion among people related to the hall, if the probability setting values are different but the same big hit probability (and small hit probability), the display probability setting value is associated with the big hit probability (and small hit probability). The same. That is, the same display probability setting value may mean the same big hit probability (and small hit probability).

Next, the game control device 100 updates -1 if the security signal control timer is not 0 (A2405). The security signal control timer is 128 ms (predetermined time) set in step A1034. Then, the ON data of the security signal for notifying the external device (game hall internal management device (hall computer) or the like) of the abnormality is output to the external information terminal 71 (A1026). Here, other signals to the external information terminal 71 such as the big hit signal are maintained in the off state.

After that, the game control device 100 determines whether or not the probability setting changing flag is set (A2407). If the probability setting changing flag is not set (result of A2407 is "N"), that is, if the probability setting is being confirmed, the probability setting changing/confirming process is terminated without doing anything.

The game control device 100 is the first timer interrupt process after the power is turned on when the probability setting changing flag is set (the result of A2407 is “Y”), that is, when the probability setting is being changed. It is determined whether or not (A2408). If it is the first timer interrupt process after the power is turned on (result of A2408 is “Y”), the probability setting change/confirmation process ends. This is to prevent the probability setting value from being unintentionally updated when the RAM initialization switch 112 is kept pressed.

When it is not the first timer interrupt process after the power is turned on (result of A2408 is "N"), the game control device 100 determines whether or not the RAM initialization switch 112 is input (A2409). If there is no input from the RAM initialization switch (result of A2409 is "N"), the probability setting change/confirmation processing ends.

When the RAM initialization switch 112 is input (the result of A2409 is “Y”), the game control device 100 sets the work setting value in the work setting value area (in the RAM 111c or the register) in the range of 0 to 5. +1 is updated, and the probability setting values 1 to 6 in the probability setting value area are updated by +1 corresponding to the work setting value (A2410). As a result, each time the RAM initialization switch 112 is operated, the probability setting value in the probability setting value area is updated by one. After that, the probability setting change/confirmation process ends. A value corresponding to the probability setting value read from the probability setting value area (1 from the probability setting value is stored in the work setting value area (in the RAM 111c or the register) for storing the work setting value when the setting change mode is entered. The subtracted value) may be stored.

In the above description, each time the RAM initialization switch 112 is operated, the probability set value in the probability set value area is directly updated in response to the update of the work set value. However, the work set value of the RAM 111c is updated. When the setting key switch 93 is turned off and the setting change work is completed (the result of A1036 is “Y”), the probability setting value (setting value for work) under setting change is stored in the area, and the setting for work is set. A value corresponding to the work setting value in the value area may be stored in the probability setting value area for the first time. By doing this, if a power failure occurs during the setting change (the result of A1037 is “Y”), the probability setting value used in the game control, the effect control, etc. (the probability setting value stored in the probability setting value area) (Value) can be prevented from being changed with an unintended value.

[Special game processing]
Next, details of the special figure game process (A1312) in the above-mentioned timer interrupt process will be described. FIG. 7 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the special figure game process. In the special figure game processing, the input of the starting opening 1 switch 36a and the starting opening 2 switch 37a is monitored, the entire processing relating to the special figure changing display game is controlled, and the display of the special drawing is set.

The game control device 100 first executes a starting opening switch monitoring process for monitoring the winning of the starting opening 1 switch 36a and the starting opening 2 switch 37a (A2601). In the starting opening switch monitoring process, when a gaming ball wins the starting winning opening 36 and the normal variation winning device 37 that constitutes the second starting winning opening, various random numbers (such as big hit random numbers) are extracted and a special figure variation display based on the winning is made. Prior to the start of the game, a game result pre-judgment is performed in which the game result based on the winning prize is pre-judged. The details of the starting port switch monitoring process will be described later.

Next, the game control device 100 executes a special winning opening switch monitoring process (A2602). In the special winning opening switch monitoring process, the detection of the game ball by the count switch 39a provided in the special variation winning device 39 is monitored. The details of the special winning opening switch monitoring process will be described later.

Next, the game control device 100, if the special figure game processing timer is not 0, updates -1 (subtracts only 1) (A2603). The special figure game processing timer is timed by the interrupt period (4 msec) of the timer interrupt processing by updating -1. The minimum value of the special figure game processing timer is set to 0. Next, it is determined whether the special figure game processing timer is 0 (A2604). When the special figure game processing timer is not 0 (result of A2604 is “N”), the process proceeds to step A2619.

The game control device 100 corresponds to the special figure game processing number when the special figure game processing timer is 0 (the result of A2604 is “Y”), that is, when the time has expired or has already expired. The special figure game sequence branch table to be referred to for branching to the process is set in the register (A2605). Further, the branch destination address of the process corresponding to the special figure game processing number is acquired using the special figure game sequence branch table (A2606). Subsequently, a subroutine call is executed by the special figure game process number to execute a game branch process corresponding to the special figure game process number (A2607).

When the game process number is “0” in step A2607, the game control device 100 monitors the variation start of the special figure variation display game to set the variation start of the special figure variation display game, the effect setting, and the like. The special figure normal process for setting the information necessary for performing the special figure changing process is executed (A2608). The details of the special figure normal process will be described later with reference to FIG.

When the game process number is "1" in step A2607, the game control device 100 sets a special display stop display time and information necessary for performing the special figure displaying process. The process during figure fluctuation is executed (A2609). For example, in the special figure changing process, necessary information such as a symbol stop command indicating a stop of the special symbol and a stop display time corresponding to the stop symbol pattern is set, and the process number "2" relating to the special symbol displaying process is set. Set it and save it in the special figure game processing number area.

When the game process number is "2" at step A2607, if the game result of the special figure variation display game is a big hit, the game control device 100 sets the fanfare command according to the kind of big hit, and each big hit. The special figure displaying process for setting the fanfare time according to the special winning opening opening pattern, setting the information necessary for performing the fanfare/interval processing, etc. is executed (A2610). For example, in the special figure display processing, if the result of the special figure change display game is a big hit, necessary information such as the fanfare command and the fanfare time is set, and the processing number “3” related to the processing during the fanfare/interval is set. Save it in the special figure game processing number area. If the result of the special figure variation display game is not a big hit, the process number "0" related to the special figure normal process is set and saved in the special figure game process number area.

When the game process number is “3” in step A2607, the game control device 100 sets information necessary for setting the opening time of the special winning opening, updating the number of times of opening, and performing the process during opening of the special winning opening. A fanfare/interval processing for setting is executed (A2611). For example, in the fanfare/interval processing, necessary information such as the round command corresponding to the round of the round to be executed and the opening time of the special winning opening is set, and the processing number "4" related to the processing for opening the special winning opening is set. Set it and save it in the special figure game processing number area.

When the game process number is “4” in step A2607, the game control device 100 sets an interval command if the jackpot round is not the final round, and sets an ending command if it is the final round, The process for opening the special winning opening is executed to set the information necessary for performing the special winning opening remaining ball processing (A2612). For example, in the processing for opening the special winning opening, necessary information such as an interval command and an ending command is set, and the processing number "5" related to the processing for remaining special winning opening balls is set and saved in the special figure game processing number area.

When the game process number is “5” in step A2607, the game control device 100 sets a time for discharging the remaining balls in the special winning opening if the big hit round is the final round, The special winning opening remaining ball process for setting the information necessary for performing the big hit ending process is executed (A2613). For example, in the process of opening the special winning opening, if it is not the final round, the interval time is saved in the special figure game processing timer area, and the processing number "3" relating to the fanfare/interval processing is set to the special figure game processing number area. Save. If it is the final round, the ending time is saved in the special figure game processing timer area, the processing number "6" relating to the big hit end processing is set, and the ending time is saved in the special figure game processing number area.

When the game process number is "6" in step A2607, the game control device 100 executes a jackpot end process for setting information necessary for executing the special figure normal process (A2614). For example, in the jackpot end process, based on the probability variation determination data corresponding to the stop symbol number (big hit symbol number) of the special figure variation display game, the probability state after the jackpot state ends or the Poden support state after the jackpot state ends ( Necessary information such as (time saving state) is set, and a process number "0" related to special figure normal processing is set and saved in the special figure game process number area. The probability fluctuation judgment data includes the number of continuous games (probability state (high probability/low probability) after the big hit state ends, and number of continuous games (time shortening change count, power support count) in the Hoden support state (time saving state) after the big hit state ends. ) Information is included.

When the process based on the special figure game process number is finished, the game control device 100 prepares a special figure 1 variation control table for controlling the variation of the special figure 1 display device 51 (A2615), and then the special figure 1 display device. The symbol variation control process relating to 51 is executed (A2616). Then, after preparing the special figure 2 fluctuation control table for controlling the fluctuation of the special figure 2 display 52 (A2617), the symbol fluctuation control process relating to the special figure 2 display 52 is executed (A2618).

[Starting switch monitoring process]
Next, the details of the starting opening switch monitoring process (A2601) in the special figure game process will be described. FIG. 8 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the starting opening switch monitoring process.

The game control device 100 first prepares a winning prize monitoring table for the starting winning opening 36 (starting opening 1) (A2701), executes a hard random number acquisition process (A2702), and determines whether or not there is a winning in the starting winning opening 36. It is determined (A2703). When there is no winning in the starting winning opening 36 (the result of A2703 is "N"), the processes of step A2709 and thereafter are executed. On the other hand, if there is a winning in the starting winning opening 36 (result of A2703 is “Y”), it is determined whether or not it is during special time saving (during normal power support state) (A2704).

When the game control device 100 determines that it is not during special time saving (during normal communication support state) (result of A2704 is “N”), it executes the process from step A2707. On the other hand, when it is during special time saving (during normal power support state) (result of A2704 is “Y”), right-handing instruction notification command is prepared as a production command (A2705), and production command setting processing is executed ( A2706). In the effect command setting process, the effect command is written in the serial transmission buffer, and the effect command is transmitted to the effect control device 300.

That is, in the normal power support state (time saving state), regardless of the probability state (high-probability state/low-probability state) of the variable display game, the right-handing instruction notification command is prepared and the effect command setting process is executed. .. In the case of the present embodiment, it is easier for the left winning to enter the starting winning opening 36, and to the normal variable winning device 37, the right winning is not applied to the normal variation winning device 37. Also, the game ball does not pass through the universal figure starting gate 34 unless it is hit to the right. Therefore, in the normal power support state (time saving state), right-handed is more advantageous than left-handed, but if there is a winning at the start winning port 36 during the normal power support state (that is, in the normal power support state When left-handed), a right-handing instruction notification command is transmitted to the effect control device 300, and the effect control device 300 executes a notification (warning) for instructing right-handing by the display device 41 or the like.

Next, the game control device 100 prepares a table for setting information on hold by the start winning opening 36 (starting opening 1) (A2707), and then executes special figure starting opening switch common processing (A2708). Then, a winning monitor table for the second starting winning opening (normal variation winning apparatus 37) is prepared (A2709), a hard random number acquisition process is executed (A2710), and it is determined whether or not there is a winning at the second starting winning opening. The determination is made (A2711). When there is no winning in the second starting winning opening (the result of A2711 is “N”), the starting opening switch monitoring processing is ended.

On the other hand, the game control device 100, if there is a winning in the second starting winning opening (the result of A2711 is "Y"), whether or not the ordinary electric auditors (ordinary variation winning device 37) is operating. That is, it is determined whether or not the normal variation winning device 37 is activated and the gaming ball is in an open state in which a winning can be made (A2712). When the ordinary electric accessory is in operation (result of A2712 is “Y”), the process proceeds to step A2714.

On the other hand, when the ordinary electric accessory is not in operation (result of A2712 is “N”), the game control device 100 determines whether or not the illegal electric power generation is occurring (A2713). When the number of illegal winnings to the normal variation winning device 37 is equal to or more than the number of fraudulent occurrence determinations (for example, 5), it is determined that the ordinary electric fraud is occurring. The normally variable winning device 37 cannot win the game ball in the closed state, and can only win the game ball in the open state. Therefore, if the game ball wins in the closed state, it means that some abnormality or dishonesty has occurred, and if there is a game ball won in such a closed state, the number is counted as the fraudulent winning number. When the number of fraudulent prizes thus counted is equal to or larger than a predetermined fraud occurrence determination number (upper limit value), it is determined that fraud has occurred.

In the case where the illegal attempt to generate a regular telephone is not occurring (the result of A2713 is “N”), the game control device 100 prepares a table for setting information on hold by the second start winning a prize mouth (normal variation winning device 37) (A2714). The special figure starting port switch common process is executed (A2715), and the starting port switch monitoring process is ended. In addition, when it is determined in A2713 that the unauthorized use of general electric power is occurring (the result of A2713 is "Y"), the starting port switch monitoring process is ended. That is, the second starting memory is not generated any more.

[Common processing of special drawing starter switch]
Next, details of the special figure starting port switch common process (A2708, A2715) in the starting port switch monitoring process will be described. FIG. 9 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the special figure starting port switch common processing. The special figure starting port switch common process is a process commonly performed for each input when the starting port 1 switch 36a and the starting port 2 switch 37a are input.

The game control device 100 first outputs the information regarding the number of winnings to the start port switch to be monitored among the start port 1 switch 36a and the start port 2 switch 37a to the management device outside the game machine 10. Is loaded (A2901), the loaded value is updated by +1 (A2902), and it is determined whether or not the output number overflows (A2903). If the number of outputs does not overflow (result of A2903 is “N”), the updated value is saved in the starting port signal output number area of the RWM (A2904), and the process proceeds to step A2905. On the other hand, if the output count overflows (result of A2903 is “Y”), the process moves to step A2905. In the present embodiment, a value from "0" to "255" can be stored in the starting port signal output frequency area. When the loaded value is "255", the value after updating becomes "0" by +1 update, and it is configured to determine that the output count overflows.

Next, the game control device 100 determines whether or not the number of special figure reservations to be updated (starting memory number) corresponding to the starting port switch to be monitored among the starting port 1 switch 36a and the starting port 2 switch 37a is less than the upper limit value. It is determined (A2905). When the number of reserved special-drawing figures to be updated is not less than the upper limit (the result of A2905 is “N”), the special-drawing starting port switch common processing ends. When the number of reserved special maps to be updated is less than the upper limit (the result of A2905 is “Y”), the number of reserved special maps to be updated (the number of reserved special maps 1 or the number of reserved special maps 2) is updated by +1. Then (A2906), the target starting opening winning flag is saved (A2907).

Next, the game control device 100 calculates the address of the random number storage area corresponding to the starting mouth switch and the special figure reservation number to be monitored (A2908), and stores the jackpot random number prepared in step A2805 to the RWM jackpot random number. Save to area (A2909). Next, the big hit symbol random number of the starting mouth switch to be monitored is extracted, prepared (A2910), and saved in the big hit symbol random number storage area of the RWM (A2911).

Next, the game control device 100 saves the fluctuation pattern random numbers 1 to 3 in the fluctuation pattern random number storage area of the corresponding RWM (A2912), and executes the special figure reservation information determination process (A2913). In the special figure hold information determination process, prefetch stop design command corresponding to the stop design information based on the saved big hit random number and big hit design random number, the first half fluctuation number based on the saved fluctuation pattern random numbers 1 to 3 (number of fluctuation before reach) Also, the look-ahead variation pattern command corresponding to the latter half variation number (number of variation after reach) is set as an effect command. Then, a starter switch to be monitored and a decorative special figure reservation number command corresponding to the special figure reservation number are prepared as an effect command (A2914), and an effect command setting process (A2915) is executed to make the special figure starter switch common. The process ends.

Here, the game control device 100 (RAM 111c) extracts a predetermined random number based on the inflow of the game balls into the starting winning area and the starting winning area of the normal variation winning device 37, and becomes the execution right of the variation display game. As a starting memory, a starting memory means for storing a predetermined number at the upper limit is formed. Further, the starting storage means (game control device 100) uses various random number values extracted based on the winning of the game ball into the first starting winning opening (starting winning opening 36) as a first starting memory with a predetermined number as an upper limit. Various random number values that are stored and extracted based on the winning of the game ball into the second starting winning opening (ordinary variation winning device 37) are stored as a second starting memory with a predetermined number as an upper limit.

[Normal processing of special drawings]
Next, details of the special figure normal process (A2608) in the special figure game process will be described. FIG. 10 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the special figure normal process.

The game control device 100 first determines whether or not the special figure 2 holding number (second starting memory number) is 0 (A3201). When the special figure 2 reservation number is 0 (result of A3201 is “Y”), it is determined whether or not the special figure 1 reservation number (first starting memory number) is 0 (A3206). Then, when the special map 1 hold number is 0 (the result of A3206 is “Y”), it is determined whether or not the customer waiting demo is started (A3211), and when the customer waiting demo is not started (A3211). If the result is “N”), the customer waiting demonstration flag is set in the customer waiting demo flag area (A3212).

Subsequently, the game control device 100 prepares a customer waiting demo command as an effect command (A3213), performs an effect command setting process (A3214), and proceeds to the process of step A3215. On the other hand, in step A3211, if the customer waiting demo has been started (result of A3211 is "Y"), "0" relating to special figure normal processing is set as the processing number (A3215), and the special figure game processing number is set. The processing number is saved in the area (A3216), and the variable symbol determination flag area is cleared (A3217). Then, the flag during the fraud monitoring period is saved in the special winning opening fraud monitoring period flag area (A3218), and the special figure normal process is ended.

If the special figure 2 hold number is not 0 (the result of A3201 is “N”), the game control device 100 executes the special figure 2 variation start process (A3202), and the decoration feature corresponding to the special figure 2 hold number. A figure reservation number command (decorative special figure 2 reservation number command) is prepared as an effect command (A3203), and effect command setting processing is executed (A3204). Then, the special figure changing process transition setting process of special figure 2 is executed (A3205), and the special figure normal process is ended.

If the special figure 1 hold number is not 0 (A3206 result is “N”), the game control device 100 executes the special figure 1 variation start process (A3207) to display the special figure 1 hold number. A figure reservation number command (decorative special figure 1 reservation number command) is prepared as an effect command (A3208), and effect command setting processing is executed (A3209). Then, the special figure changing process transition setting processing of special figure 1 is executed (A3210), and the special figure normal processing is ended.

In this way, by checking the special figure 2 pending number before checking the special figure 1 pending number, the special figure 2 fluctuation start process (A3202) is executed when the special figure 2 pending number is not 0. The Rukoto. That is, the special figure 2 variable display game is executed with priority over the special figure 1 variable display game. In other words, when the game control device 100 has the second start memory in the second start storage means (game control device 100), the variable display game based on the second start memory is displayed as the variable display game based on the first start memory. It forms a priority control means that is executed with priority over the game.

[Special map 1 fluctuation start processing]
Next, details of the special figure 1 variation start process (A3207) in the special figure normal process will be described. FIG. 11 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the special figure 1 variation start process. The special figure 1 variation start process is a process performed at the start of the special figure 1 variation display game.

The game control device 100 saves the special figure 1 variation flag indicating the type of the special figure variation display game to be executed (here, special figure 1) in the variation symbol determination area (A3401). Subsequently, a big hit flag 1 setting process for setting deviation information and big hit information to the big hit flag 1 for determining whether or not the special figure 1 variable display game is a big hit is executed (A3402). Details of the jackpot flag 1 setting process will be described later.

Next, the game control device 100 executes the special figure 1 stop symbol setting process related to the setting of the special figure 1 stop symbol (symbol information) regarding the special figure 1 variable display game (A3403). In the special figure 1 stop symbol setting process, the stop symbol number at the time of the outfall or the big hit, and the loss stop symbol pattern or the big hit stop symbol pattern corresponding to this stop symbol number are saved. Then, a decoration special figure command corresponding to the stop symbol pattern is prepared as an effect command, and effect command setting processing is executed. Also, the number-of-rounds information (round upper limit value) corresponding to the stopped symbol number and the probability variation determination data corresponding to the stopped symbol number are acquired and saved.

Furthermore, the game control device 100 executes special figure information setting processing for setting special figure information which is a parameter for setting the variation pattern (A3404).

Subsequently, the game control device 100 prepares a special figure 1 fluctuation pattern setting information table which is a table in which information for referring to various kinds of information regarding the setting of the fluctuation pattern of the special figure 1 fluctuation display game is set (A3405). ).

After that, the game control device 100 executes a variation pattern setting process for setting a variation pattern (variation pattern number) which is a variation mode in the special figure 1 variation display game (A3406). Next, the game control device 100 executes variation start information setting processing for setting variation start information of the special figure 1 variation display game (A3407), and ends the special figure 1 variation start processing. In the fluctuation start information setting processing, the fluctuation time value corresponding to the fluctuation pattern (fluctuation pattern number) is acquired and saved in the special figure game processing timer area. Then, a variation command (MODE, ACTION) corresponding to the variation pattern number is prepared as an effect command, and effect command setting processing is performed. Further, in the fluctuation start information setting process, the special figure reservation number related to the special figure type (special figure 1 or special figure 2) of the special figure variation display game to be started is updated by -1 (decrement by 1).

[Special figure 2 fluctuation start processing]
Next, details of the special figure 2 variation start process (A3202) in the special figure normal process will be described. FIG. 12 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the special figure 2 variation start process. The special figure 2 variation start process is a process performed at the start of the special figure 2 variation display game, and is the same process as the process of the special figure 1 variation start process shown in FIG. It is something to do.

The game control device 100 first saves a special figure 2 variation flag indicating the type of special figure variation display game to be executed (here, special figure 2) in the variation symbol determination area (A3501). Subsequently, a big hit flag 2 setting process for setting deviation information and big hit information to the big hit flag 2 for determining whether or not the special figure 2 variable display game is a big hit is executed (A3502).

Next, the game control device 100 executes the special figure 2 stop symbol setting process related to the setting of the special figure 2 stop symbol (symbol information) regarding the special figure 2 variable display game (A3503). Further, a special figure information setting process for setting special figure information which is a parameter for setting the variation pattern is executed (A3504). Then, a special figure 2 fluctuation pattern setting information table, which is a table in which information for referring to various information regarding the setting of the fluctuation pattern of the special figure 2 fluctuation display game is set (A3505).

After that, the game control device 100 executes a variation pattern setting process for setting a variation pattern of the special figure 2 variable display game (A3506). Finally, the fluctuation start information setting process for setting the fluctuation start information of the special figure 2 fluctuation display game is executed (A3507), and the special figure 2 fluctuation start process is ended.

[Big hit flag 1 setting process]
Next, details of the big hit flag 1 setting process (A3402) in the special figure 1 variation start process will be described. FIG. 13 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the big hit flag 1 setting process.

The game control device 100 first saves the deviation information in the big hit flag 1 area (A3601). Next, a jackpot random number is loaded from the special figure 1 big hit random number storage area (for 1 hold number) and prepared (A3602), and the special figure 1 big hit random number storage area (for 1 hold number) is cleared to 0. (A3603). The reserved number 1 is an area for storing information (random numbers, etc.) about the special figure starting memory having the earliest digestion order (here, the earliest in special figure 1). After that, a jackpot determination process of determining whether or not it is a jackpot is executed according to whether or not the prepared jackpot random number value matches the jackpot determination value (A3604).

When the determination result of the jackpot determination process (A3604) is a jackpot (the result of A3605 is “Y”), the game control device 100 overwrites the jackpot information in the jackpot flag 1 area in which the deviation information is saved in step A3601. It saves (A3606), and ends the jackpot flag 1 setting process. On the other hand, when the determination result of the big hit determination process (A3605) is not a big hit (the result of A3605 is “N”), the big hit flag 1 setting process ends. As described above, in the present embodiment, the result of the special-figure 1 variable display game is one of “big hit” and “outlier”.

[Big hit flag 2 setting process]
Next, details of the big hit flag 2 setting process (A3502) in the special figure 2 variation start process will be described. FIG. 14 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the big hit flag 2 setting process. In this process, the same process as the process of the big hit flag 1 setting process shown in FIG. 13 is performed for the second starting memory.

The game control device 100 first saves the deviation information in the big hit flag 2 area (A3701). Next, a big hit random number is loaded from the special figure 2 big hit random number storage area (for holding number 1) and prepared (A3702), and the special figure 2 big hit random number storage area (for holding number 1) is cleared to 0. (A3703). The reserved number 1 is an area for storing information (random numbers, etc.) about the special figure starting storage in which the digestion order is the earliest (here, the earliest in the special figure 2). After that, a jackpot determination process of determining whether or not it is a jackpot is executed depending on whether or not the prepared jackpot random number value matches the jackpot determination value (A3704).

When the determination result of the jackpot determining process (A3704) is a jackpot (the result of A3705 is “Y”), the game control device 100 overwrites the jackpot information in the jackpot flag 2 area where the deviation information is saved in step A3701. It saves (A3706), and ends the jackpot flag 2 setting process. On the other hand, when the determination result of the big hit determination process (A3704) is not a big hit (the result of A3705 is "N"), the big hit flag 2 setting process is terminated while the deviation information is saved in the big hit flag 2. As described above, in the present embodiment, the result of the special figure 2 variable display game is any one of "big hit" and "off".

[Big hit determination processing]
Next, the details of the jackpot determination processing (A3605, A3704) in the jackpot flag 1 setting processing, the jackpot flag 2 setting processing, and the like will be described. FIG. 15 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the big hit determination process. The big hit judging process is a process common to the big hit judging process in other processes executed during the timer interrupt process, and is also executed in step A3004 of the special figure reservation information judging process.

The game control device 100 first sets a lower limit determination value of the big hit determination value (A3801), and determines whether or not the value of the target big hit random number is less than the lower limit determination value (A3802). The big hit means that the big hit random number matches the big hit determination value. The big hit judgment value is a plurality of consecutive values, and when the big hit random number is greater than or equal to the lower limit judgment value, which is the lower limit value of the big hit judgment value, and less than or equal to the upper limit judgment value, which is the upper limit value of the big hit judgment value. , Determined to be a big hit.

When the value of the target big hit random number is less than the lower limit judgment value (result of A3802 is “Y”), the game control device 100 sets a deviation (other than big hit) as a judgment result (A3807), and ends the big hit judgment process. To do.

Further, when the value of the big hit random number is not less than the lower limit judgment value (the result of A3802 is “N”), the game control device 100 judges whether or not the big hit occurrence probability is in a high probability state (probability change state). (A3803). If it is in the high probability state (result of A3803 is “Y”), the upper limit determination value in the high probability is set (A3804). On the other hand, if it is not in the high probability state (result of A3803 is “N”), the upper limit determination value in the low probability is set (A3805).

After setting the upper limit judgment value of the value of the big hit random number, the game control device 100 judges whether or not the value of the target big hit random number is larger than the upper limit judgment value (A3806). When the value of the big hit random number is larger than the upper limit judgment value (the result of A3806 is “Y”), a deviation (other than the big hit) is set as the judgment result (A3807). On the other hand, when the value of the big hit random number is not larger than the upper limit judgment value (the result of A3806 is “N”), the big hit is set as the judgment result (A3808). When the determination result is set, the jackpot determination process ends.

[Special map information setting process]
Next, details of the special figure information setting processing (A3404, A3504) in the special figure 1 fluctuation start processing and the special figure 2 fluctuation start processing will be described. FIG. 16 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the special figure information setting process. In the present embodiment, the probability state (low probability/high probability, presence/absence of time saving) does not directly affect the distribution of fluctuations, and the effect mode managed by the game control device 100 affects the distribution of fluctuations. As the effect mode, one effect mode among a plurality of effect modes is set according to the probability state, the presence/absence of a time saving state, the progress of the special figure variation display game, and the like.

The game control device 100 first sets the first-half variation group selection pointer table (A4201), and acquires the first-half variation group selection pointer corresponding to the effect mode information (A4202). Next, the first half variable group selection offset table is set (A4203), and the offset data corresponding to the target special figure reservation number (special figure 1 reservation number or special figure 2 reservation number) and the stop symbol pattern is acquired (A4204). ..

Next, the game control device 100 adds the first half variation group selection pointer and the offset data (A4205), and saves the value obtained by the addition in the variation distribution information 1 area (A4206). As a result, in the variable distribution information 1 area, the variable distribution information 1 generated based on the type of the stop symbol, the number of holdings, and the effect mode is saved. This variation distribution information 1 is a table pointer for allocating the first half variation (variation mode before the start of reach), and is used later for selecting a variation group. However, depending on the specifications of the model, the fluctuation time is shortened when there are a large number of holdings only in the case of the deviation, so in cases other than the deviation, as a result, the holding number does not affect the distribution of the first half fluctuations. It should be noted that the fluctuation group includes a plurality of fluctuation patterns.When determining the fluctuation pattern, first, the fluctuation group is selected, and then one fluctuation pattern is selected from the fluctuation groups. ing.

Next, the game control device 100 sets the latter half variation group selection pointer table (A4207) and acquires the latter half variation group selection pointer corresponding to the effect mode information (A4208). Next, the latter half variation group selection offset table is set (A4209), and the offset data corresponding to the target special figure reservation number and the stop symbol pattern is acquired (A4210).

Next, the game control device 100 adds the latter half variation group selection pointer and the offset data (A4211), saves the value obtained by the addition in the variation distribution information 2 area (A4212), and sets the special figure information. The process ends. Thereby, the variable distribution information 2 is saved in the variable distribution information 2 area, which is generated based on the type of the stop symbol, the number of holdings, and the effect mode. This variation distribution information 2 is a table pointer for allocating the latter half variation (reach type (including no reach)) and is used later for selecting a variation group. However, since the reach occurrence rate changes according to the number of pending calls only in the case of failure (reach occurrence rate decreases when the number of pending tasks is large), in cases other than failure, as a result, the number of pending calls is distributed in the latter half of the fluctuation. Does not affect

[Variation pattern setting process]
Next, details of the variation pattern setting processing (A3406, A3506) in the special figure 1 variation start processing and the special figure 2 variation start processing will be described. FIG. 17 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the fluctuation pattern setting process.

The variation patterns are a first half variation pattern that is a variation mode from the start of the special figure variation display game to the reach state, and a second half variation pattern that is a variation mode from the reach state to the end of the special figure variation display game. The first half variation pattern is set first, and then the first half variation pattern is set.

The game control device 100 first sets the variable group selection address table (A4301), acquires the address of the latter half variable group table corresponding to the variable distribution information 2 and prepares (A4302), and the target variation pattern random number. The variable pattern random number 1 is loaded from one storage area (for one reserved number) and prepared (A4303). In the present embodiment, the structure of the second-half variation group table is different for the hit type and the non-win type. Specifically, the hit type has a 1-byte size, and the loss type has a 2-byte size. Since the hit occurrence rate is lower than the hit occurrence rate, and even 1 byte is sufficient, the hit size is 1 byte in size from the viewpoint of saving the data capacity. Therefore, at the time of winning, only the lower value of the fluctuation pattern random number 1 of 2 bytes is used. Further, the occurrence rate of deviating is higher than the occurrence rate of hitting, and in order to make more diverse effects appear, the size for deviating is 2 bytes.

Then, the game control device 100 determines whether or not the result of the special figure variation display game is off (A4304), and if it is off (the result of A4304 is “Y”), the 2-byte allocation process (A4305) is performed. Then, the process proceeds to step A4307. If it is not out of alignment (result of A4304 is “N”), distribution processing (A4306) is performed, and the process proceeds to step A4307.

Next, the game control device 100 acquires the address of the latter half fluctuation selection table (second half fluctuation pattern selection table) obtained as a result of the distribution, prepares it (A4307), and stores the target fluctuation pattern random number 2 storage area (holding). The variation pattern random number 2 is loaded from the formula 1) and prepared (A4308). Then, the allocation processing is executed (A4309), the latter half variation number obtained as a result of the distribution is acquired, and the latter half variation number area is saved (A4310). By this processing, the latter half variation pattern is set.

Next, the game control device 100 sets the first half fluctuation group table (A4311), and calculates the table selection pointer based on the fluctuation distribution information 1 and the second half fluctuation number (A4312). Then, the address of the first-half variation selection table (first-half variation pattern selection table) corresponding to the calculated pointer is acquired and prepared (A4313), and the variation pattern random number is stored from the target variation pattern random number 3 storage area (for the number of reservations 1). 3 is loaded and prepared (A4314). After that, the distribution process (A4315) is performed, the first-half variation number obtained as a result of the distribution is acquired, and saved in the first-half variation number area (A4316), and the variation pattern setting process is ended. By this processing, the first half variation pattern is set, and the variation pattern of the special figure variation display game is set. That is, the game control device 100 serves as a variation pattern setting unit that sets a variation pattern, which is a mode of executing the game, from a plurality of variations.

[2-byte sorting process]
Next, details of the 2-byte allocation processing (A4305) in the fluctuation pattern setting processing will be described. FIG. 18 is a flowchart showing the procedure of 2-byte allocation processing. The 2-byte sorting process is a process for selecting the second half variation selection table of the special figure variation display game from the second half variation group table based on the variation pattern random number 1.

The game control device 100 first checks whether the leading data of the selection table (the latter half variation group table prepared in A4302) is a code without distribution (that is, “0”) (A4401). Here, the latter half fluctuation group table stores a predetermined distribution value in association with at least one latter half fluctuation selection table, but defines only the latter half fluctuation selection table in which the latter half fluctuation pattern is “no reach”. In the variable group table (for example, a part of the variable group table when the result is out of order), it is not necessary to sort, so the sorting value “0”, that is, the code without sorting is defined at the beginning. ..

Then, when the top data of the selection table (second half variation group table) is a code without distribution (result of A4402 is “Y”), the game control device 100 updates the address of the data corresponding to the distribution result. Then (A4407), the 2-byte allocation process is terminated. On the other hand, when the leading data of the selection table (latter half fluctuation group table) is not the code without distribution (the result of A4402 is "N"), the first distribution specified in the selection table (latter half fluctuation group table) is set. A value is acquired (A4403).

Subsequently, the distribution value acquired in step A4403 is subtracted from the random value prepared in step A4303 (value of fluctuation pattern random number 1) to calculate a new random value (A4404), and the calculated new random value is calculated. Is smaller than "0" (A4405). If the new random number value is not smaller than "0" (result of A4405 is "N"), after updating to the address of the next distribution value (A4406), the process proceeds to step A4403, Perform the following processing. That is, the distribution value defined next in the selection table (second-half variation group table) is acquired (A4403), and thereafter, the distribution value is subtracted from the random number value determined in the previous step A4405 to create a new random value. A numerical value is calculated (A4404), and it is determined whether the calculated new random number value is smaller than "0" (A4405).

The above-described processing is executed until it is determined in step A4405 that the new random number value is smaller than "0" (the result of A4405 is "Y"). As a result, any one of the latter half fluctuation selection tables is selected from at least one latter half fluctuation selection table defined in the selection table (second half fluctuation group table). If it is determined in step A4405 that the new random number value is smaller than "0" (result of A4405 is "Y"), the address of the data corresponding to the sorted result is updated (A4407) and 2 bytes. The sorting process ends.

[Distribution processing]
Next, details of the distribution processing (A4306, A4309, A4315) in the fluctuation pattern setting processing will be described. FIG. 19 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the distribution process. In the distribution process, the second half variation pattern of the special figure variation display game is selected from the second half variation selection table (second half variation pattern group) based on the variation pattern random number 2 or the first half variation selection table (based on the variation pattern random number 3 ( This is a process for selecting the first half variation pattern of the special figure variation display game from the first half variation pattern group).

First, the game control device 100 first data of the target selection table (the latter half variation group table prepared in A4302, the latter half variation selection table prepared in step A4307, or the first half variation selection table prepared in step A4313). It is checked whether is a code without distribution (that is, "0") (A4501). Here, the second half variation group table, the second half variation selection table, and the first half variation selection table are associated with at least one of the second half variation selection table, the second half variation pattern (second half variation number), and the first half variation pattern (first half variation number), and are predetermined. However, in the case of a selection table that does not require allocation, the allocation value “0”, that is, the code without allocation, is specified at the beginning.

Then, the gaming control device 100, when the leading data of the target selection table (the latter half variation group table, the latter half variation selection table, or the first half variation selection table) is a code without distribution (the result of A4502 is “Y”), The address of the data corresponding to the distribution result is updated (A4507), and the distribution process ends. On the other hand, when the leading data of the target selection table (the latter half variation group table, the latter half variation selection table, or the first half variation selection table) is not the code without distribution (the result of A4502 is “N”), the target selection table (second half variation) One distribution value first defined in the group table, the second half variation selection table, or the first half variation selection table is acquired (A4503).

Subsequently, the game control device 100 subtracts the distribution value acquired in step A4503 from the random number values (the values of the fluctuation pattern random number 1, the fluctuation pattern random number 2, and the fluctuation pattern random number 3) prepared in steps A4303, A4308, and A4314. Then, a new random number value is calculated (A4504), and it is determined whether the calculated new random number value is smaller than "0" (A4505). If the new random number value is not smaller than "0" (result of A4505 is "N"), after updating to the address of the next distribution value (A4506), the process proceeds to step A4503, and Perform the following processing.

That is, the distribution value defined next in the target selection table (the latter half variation group table, the latter half variation selection table, or the first half variation selection table) is acquired (A4503), and thereafter, the disturbance determined in step A4505 of the previous time is acquired. A new random number value is calculated by subtracting the distribution value from the numerical value (A4504), and it is determined whether the calculated new random number value is smaller than "0" (A4505). The above processing is executed until it is determined in step A4505 that the new random number value is smaller than "0" (the result of A4505 is "Y"). As a result, at least one second-half fluctuation selection table, second-half fluctuation pattern (second-half fluctuation number), and first-half fluctuation pattern (first-half fluctuation pattern) defined in the target selection table (second-half fluctuation group table, second-half fluctuation selection table, first-half fluctuation selection table) Any one of the second half variation selection table, the second half variation pattern (second half variation number), and the first half variation pattern (first half variation number) is selected from the variation numbers).

When the game control device 100 determines in step A4505 that the new random number value is smaller than “0” (result of A4505 is “Y”), it is updated to the address of the data corresponding to the sorted result. (A4507), and the distribution process ends.

[Variation start information setting process]
Next, details of the fluctuation start information setting processing (A3407, A3507) in the special figure 1 fluctuation start processing and the special figure 2 fluctuation start processing will be described. FIG. 20 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the fluctuation start information setting process.

The game control device 100 first clears the random number storage areas of the target fluctuation pattern random numbers 1 to 3 (A4601). Next, the first half fluctuation time value table is set (A4602), and the first half fluctuation time value corresponding to the first half fluctuation number is acquired (A4603). Further, the latter half fluctuation time value table is set (A4604), and the latter half fluctuation time value corresponding to the latter half fluctuation number is acquired (A4605).

Then, the game control device 100 adds the first half fluctuation time value and the second half fluctuation time value (A4606), and saves the added value in the special figure game processing timer area (A4607). After that, a variation command (MODE) corresponding to the first half variation number is prepared (A4608), and a variation command (ACTION) corresponding to the second half variation number is prepared as an effect command (A4609), and an effect command setting process is performed (A4610). ). Next, the special symbol reservation number corresponding to the variable symbol determination flag is updated by -1 (A4611), and the address of the random number storage area corresponding to the variable symbol determination flag is set (A4612). Next, the random number storage area is shifted (A4613), the empty area after the shift is cleared (A4614), and the fluctuation start information setting process is ended.

By the above processing, the information regarding the start of the special figure variation display game is set. That is, the game control device 100 serves as a determination unit that determines various random number values stored in the start storage unit (game control device 100). Further, the game control device 100 constitutes a variation pattern determination means capable of determining the variation pattern of the identification information to be executed in the variable display game, based on the determination information stored in the starting memory.

Then, the information regarding the start of the special figure variation display game is later transmitted to the effect control device 300, and the effect control device 300 responds to the determined variation pattern based on the reception of the information regarding the start of the special figure variation display game. Set the detailed effect contents in the decoration display variable display game. The information about the start of the special figure variation display game includes a decoration special figure hold number command including information on the number of starting memories (holding number), a decoration special figure command including information about a stop pattern, and variation of the special figure variation display game. A variation command including information about a pattern and a stop information command including information about extending stop time are given, and the commands are transmitted to the effect control device 300 in this order. In particular, by transmitting the decorative special drawing command before the variable command, the processing in the effect control device 300 can be efficiently advanced.

[Public game processing]
Next, details of the universal figure game process (A1310) in the timer interrupt process will be described. FIG. 21 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the universal figure game process. In the general figure game process, the input of the gate switch 34a is monitored, the entire process related to the general figure variation display game is controlled, the display of the general figure is set, and the like.

The game control device 100 first executes a gate switch monitoring process for monitoring the input from the gate switch 34a (A7601).

Subsequently, the game control device 100 executes the ordinary electric prize winning switch monitoring process of monitoring the input from the starting opening 2 switch 37a (A7602).

Next, the gaming control device 100, if the universal figure game processing timer is not 0, updates -1 (subtracts 1) (A7603). The minimum value of the universal figure game processing timer is set to 0. Then, the game control device 100 determines whether or not the value of the universal figure game processing timer has become 0 (A7604).

When the value of the universal figure game processing timer is 0 (the result of A7604 is “Y”), that is, when the time has expired or has already expired, the game control device 100 displays the universal figure game processing number. The universal figure game sequence branch table to be referred to for branching to the corresponding process is set in the register (A7605).

Further, the game control device 100 obtains the branch destination address of the process corresponding to the universal figure game process number based on the set universal figure game sequence branch table (A7606). Then, a subroutine call by the universal figure game process number is performed to execute a game branch process corresponding to the universal figure game process number (A7607).

When the game process number is “0” in step A7607, the game control device 100 monitors the start of fluctuation of the general figure fluctuation display game, and sets the start of fluctuation and effect setting of the general figure fluctuation display game, The ordinary figure normal process for setting information necessary for performing the ordinary figure change process is executed (A7608). Details of the normal/normal processing will be described later with reference to FIG.

Further, when the game process number is “1” in step A7607, the game control device 100 executes the general figure changing process for setting the information necessary for performing the general figure displaying process ( A7609). For example, in the process of changing the figure, in order to shift to the process of displaying figure, the game processing number is set to "2" and saved in the figure game processing number area. Save to processing timer area.

Further, when the game process number is “2” in step A7607, if the result of the universal figure variation display game is a hit, the game control device 100 determines whether or not it is in the time saving state. The general figure display processing is executed to set the opening time and the information necessary for performing the general figure hit processing (A7610). For example, in the processing for displaying a figure, when the result of the figure changing display game is a hit, in order to shift to the processing for hitting a figure, "3" is set as the game processing number and the figure game processing number area is set. On the other hand, in the case of the loss, the game processing number is set to "0" and the game processing number is saved in the general/universal game processing number area in order to shift to the normal/universal figure normal processing.

If the game process number is “3” in step A7607, the game control device 100 sets the information necessary for continuing the process of hitting the universal figure or performing the normal ball remaining ball process. The middle process is executed (A7611). For example, in the normal figure hitting process, after setting the normal variation winning device 37 for a predetermined number of times, the game process number is set to "4" in order to shift to the normal ball remaining ball process. Save to the universal figure game processing number area.

If the game process number is "4" in step A7607, the game control device 100 executes a normal electric ball remaining ball process that sets information necessary to perform the end-of-universal figure process (A7612). ). For example, in the normal ball remaining ball process, in order to shift to the normal process per end process, "5" is set as the game process number and saved in the general figure game process number area. Save to processing timer area.

Further, when the game process number is "5" in step A7607, the game control device 100 executes the universal figure per end process for setting the information necessary for performing the ordinary figure normal process (A7608). (A7613). For example, in the universal figure ending process, in order to shift to the regular figure normal process, "0" is set as the game process number and saved in the universal figure game process number area.

After that, the game control device 100 prepares a universal figure variation control table for controlling the variation of the ordinary symbols by the universal figure display 53 (A7614). After that, the symbol variation control process relating to the control of the variation of the ordinary symbol by the universal symbol display 53 is executed (A7615), and the universal symbol game process is ended.

On the other hand, when the value of the universal figure game processing timer is not 0 (result of A7604 is “N”), that is, when the time is not up, the game control device 100 executes the processing of step A7614 and subsequent steps.

[Usually processing]
Next, details of the ordinary figure ordinary process (A7608) in the ordinary figure game process will be described. FIG. 22 is a flow chart showing the procedure of the ordinary figure ordinary processing.

The game control device 100 first determines whether or not the universal figure reservation number is 0 (A7901). When the number of reserved universal figures is 0 (result of A7901 is “Y”), the routine setting transition processing 1 of regular figures is executed (A7923), and the regular processing of regular figures ends. In the ordinary figure normal process shift setting process 1, in order to shift to the ordinary figure normal process, "0" is set as the game process number and saved in the ordinary figure game process number area.

In addition, when the general-use figure hold number is not 0 (the result of A7901 is “N”), the game control device 100 loads the hit random number from the RWM random number storage area (for hold number 1) of the RWM, and the RWM The random number per symbol is loaded from the per symbol random number storage area (for the number of reservations 1) (A7902). Then, the random number storage area per universal figure (for holding number 1) and the random number storage area per universal figure (for holding number 1) are cleared to 0 (A7903). Furthermore, whether or not the probability that a hit result in the universal figure fluctuation display game is higher than normal is in high probability of regular figure (during high-probability state), that is, whether it is in a time-saving state (state of universal communication support). It is determined (A7904). Note that the probability of hitting a universal figure in the high probability is 250/251, and the probability of hitting a universal figure in the low probability is 0/251.

When the universal figure high probability is not in progress (the result of A7904 is "N"), the game control device 100 sets a low probability lower limit determination value (here, 251) which is the lower limit determination value in the universal figure low probability (A7905). , If the figure high probability is in progress (the result of A7904 is “Y”), the high probability lower limit determination value (here, 1) that is the lower limit determination value in the figure high probability is set (A7906), and step A7907 is executed. Move to processing.

The game control device 100 determines whether or not the hit random number is equal to or greater than the upper limit determination value (251 in this case) (A7907). It should be noted that the upper limit determination value here is common between the high probability of universal figure and the low probability of regular figure. If the hit random number is greater than or equal to the upper limit determination value (result of A7907 is “Y”), that is, if there is no match, the process proceeds to step A7909. When the hit random number is less than the upper limit judgment value (result of A7907 is "N"), it is determined whether the hit random number is less than the lower limit judgment value (A7908).

When the hit random number is less than the lower limit determination value (result of A7908 is “Y”), that is, when the hit random number is not found, the hit information is saved in the hit flag area (A7909). Further, the deviation stop symbol number is set as the universal figure stop symbol number (A7910), and the deviation symbol information is saved in the general symbol stop symbol information area (A7911), and the process proceeds to step A7915.

If the hit random number is not less than the lower limit judgment value (the result of A7908 is “N”), that is, in the case of a hit, the hit information is saved in the hit flag area (A7912), and the hit symbol random number is loaded. The corresponding hit stop symbol number is set (A7913), and the hit stop symbol information corresponding to the hit stop symbol number is saved in the general symbol stop symbol information area (A7914), and the process proceeds to step A7915. There may be several types of hit stop symbols.

Next, the game control device 100 saves the stop symbol number in the normal symbol stop symbol area (A7915), and saves the stop symbol number in the test signal output data area (A7916). Next, a public figure command corresponding to information related to the general figure fluctuation display game (particularly, information on hit/miss of the general figure fluctuation display game) is prepared as an effect command (A7917), and effect command setting processing is executed. (A7918). Then, the random number storage area per universal figure is shifted (A7919), the empty area after the shift is cleared to 0 (A7920), and the number of reserved universal figures is updated by -1 (A7921).

That is, with the execution of the universal figure fluctuation display game relating to the oldest universal figure reservation number 1, the number of the universal figure reservation numbers 2 to 4 that are on hold after the universal figure reservation number 1 is advanced one by one. By this process, the values for the number of reserved figures of 2 in the random number storage area per figure to the number of retained figures of 4 in the random number storage area per figure are moved from the number of reserved figures of 1 in the random number storage area for 3 figures Will be done. Then, the value for the number of reserved universal figures of 4 in the random number storage area per universal figure is cleared, and the number of reserved universal figures is decremented by one.

Next, the game control device 100 executes processing transition setting processing during normal figure fluctuation (A7922), and ends the normal figure normal processing. In the universal figure changing process transition setting process, in order to shift to the ordinary figure changing process, "1" is set as the game process number and saved in the universal figure game process number area. Save to the game processing timer area.

[Control of production control device]
The control (process) executed by the effect control device 300 according to the effect control program will be described below.

[Main processing (production control device)]
First, the details of the main process executed by the effect control device 300 will be described. FIG. 23 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the main process (main program) executed by the effect control device 300. The main processing is executed by the main control microcomputer 311 (production microcomputer) when the game machine 10 is powered on. In addition, in the flowchart of the process executed by the performance control device 300, the code (number) of the step is represented as “B***”.

When the execution of the main process is started, effect control device 300 first prohibits interruption (B0001). Next, the CPU 311 and VDP 312 are initialized (B0002, B0003) and interrupts are permitted (B0004). When the interrupt is permitted, the command reception interrupt process for receiving the command transmitted from the game control device 100 is ready to be executed.

Next, the production control device 300 permits generation of display data to be displayed on the display device 41 or the like (B0005) and sets a random number seed used for random number generation (B0006). Then, the initial value at power-on is saved in the area to be initialized (B0007).

Then, production control device 300 clears WDT (watchdog timer) (B0008). The WDT is activated by the above-mentioned CPU initial setting (B0002) and monitors whether the CPU 311 is operating normally. If the WDT is not cleared even after the lapse of a certain period, the WDT times out and the CPU 311 is reset.

After that, the production control device 300 executes an RTC reading process of reading time information from the RTC (real time clock) 338 (B0009).

In the RTC reading process, the time information may be read from the RTC 338 at a predetermined cycle (eg, every two hours), and it is not necessary to read the time information each time the process moves to step B0009. The RTC reading process may be executed only once when the effect control device 300 is powered on (that is, the gaming machine 10 is powered on) (for example, by changing the position of the RTC reading process, steps B0003 and B0004). May be run between). The production control device 300 sets a time timer (time measuring means) for measuring the time in the timer area in the RAM, and reads the time information from the RTC 338 only once when the time information is read from the RTC 338 at a predetermined cycle or when the power is turned on. When reading the information, the time timer (time measuring means) may be adjusted to match the time of the RTC 338. And production control device 300 may use a timer for time to execute various processes. By doing so, the number of times of processing for reading the time from the RTC 338 can be reduced, and the load on the CPU 311 is reduced.

Next, the effect control device 300 detects the operation signal of the effect button 25 (signal of the effect button switch 25a or the touch panel 25b) by the player, and changes the effect content (setting) according to the detected signal. Performance button input processing is executed (B0010). Subsequently, a hall/player setting mode process is executed for accepting operations such as changing the brightness and volume of the LEDs and liquid crystal by the manager of the game hall (game shop) or the player (B0011). In the hall/player setting mode process, the player can customize the effect according to the effect points described later.

Next, the production control device 300 executes production point control processing for executing addition and clearing of production points (B0012). In the production point control processing, the production points to be added to the production points by performing the productions and the operations to be added to the production points are performed, and at the end of the game, the production points can be carried over to the next game. For example, information including information on effect points is displayed on the display device 41 as a QR code (registered trademark). For example, the effect control device 300 can display the QR code (registered trademark) on the display device 41 in the hall/player setting mode process.

Next, the production control device 300 executes a random number update process for updating a random number such as a production random number (B0013), analyzes the received command received from the game control device 100, and executes the corresponding received command check process. (B0014). Details of the received command check processing will be described later with reference to FIG.

Next, the production control device 300 executes the customer waiting demo editing process of editing and controlling the contents of the customer waiting demo displayed on the display device 41 (B0015), and saves the power of the gaming machine 10 waiting. A power saving control process for controlling is executed (B0016).

Next, the production control device 300 updates various data according to the contents displayed on the display device (display means) such as the display device 41, or sets the drawing displayed on the display device 41 in the display frame buffer. Perform effect display edit processing (B0017). The drawing data set at this time can update the image on the display device 41 without any problem as long as the VDP 312 can complete the drawing within a frame period of 1/30 second (about 33.3 msec). Then, the drawing preparation for the display frame buffer is completed, and the drawing command preparation end setting is executed (B0018).

Next, the production control device 300 determines whether or not it is the frame switching timing (B0019). If it is not the frame switching timing (result of B0019 is “N”), the process of B0019 is repeated until the frame switching timing is reached. If it is frame switching timing (result of B0019 is “Y”), the display device 41 is displayed. The screen drawing is instructed (B0020). Since the frame cycle of the present embodiment is 1/30 seconds, for example, when the periodic V blank (image update) is executed twice every 1/60 seconds (1/2 of the frame cycle), the frame switching is performed. .. The image may not be updated in 1/60 seconds, and the interval may be further increased.

The effect control device 300 also executes a sound control process for controlling the sound output from the speaker 19 (B0021).

The effect control device 300 also executes a decoration control process for controlling the decoration device (the board decoration device 46, the frame decoration device 18) including LEDs or the like (B0022). In the decoration control process, for example, brightness control (light emission control) of a decoration device such as an LED is executed.

Furthermore, the performance control device 300 executes a movable body control process for controlling a performance device (board performance device 44) such as an electric accessory driven by a motor and a solenoid (B0023). In the movable body control process, for example, the accessory motion effect for driving the motor is set.

And production control device 300 will return to the processing of B0008, after finishing the processing of B0023 mentioned above. After that, the processing from B0008 to B0023 is repeated.

[Reception command check processing]
Next, with reference to FIG. 24, the details of the received command check processing (B0014) in the above-mentioned main processing (FIG. 23) will be described. FIG. 24 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the received command check processing executed by the production control device 300.

The production control device 300 first loads the value of the command reception counter in the command reception counter area of the RAM as the command reception number in order to check the number of commands received from the game control device 100 (B1101). Then, it is determined whether the command reception number is not 0 (B1102). If the number of received commands is 0, that is, if there is no command received from the game control device 100 (result of B1102 is “N”), there is no command to analyze, and the received command check process ends.

On the other hand, the effect control device 300, when the command reception number is not 0, that is, when the command is received from the game control device 100 (the result of B1102 is “Y”), the command reception counter in the command reception counter area. After the value is subtracted by the number of received commands (B1103), the contents of the received command buffer of RAM are copied to the command area for analysis (B1104). Here, since the received command buffer is a ring buffer, there is no problem in subtracting the number of received commands before copying the contents of the buffer to the command area. Further, even if a new command is received during copying, the data will not be overwritten.

Then, production control device 300 updates the command read index by +1 within the range of 0 to 31 (adds 1) (B1105). The receive command buffer is configured to store up to 32 received commands. The received commands are stored in the received command buffer in the order of command read indexes 0 to 31, and here the commands received in the order of index are read and copied to the command area for analysis. It should be noted that at the timing when copying to the command area for analysis is completed, the storage area of the received command buffer corresponding to the read command read index is cleared.

Rendering control device 300 determines whether or not the copying of the command for the number of received commands loaded in the process of step B1101 is completed (B1106), and when the copying is not completed (the result of B1106 is “N )), the processes of steps B1104 to B1106 are repeated.

When the effect control device 300 receives the command transmitted from the game control device 100, the content of the received command is stored in the received command buffer, and at the same time, the command reception counter value in the command reception counter area is added and updated. Although 32 commands can be stored in the received command buffer, the received command is separately analyzed in the command area for analysis. Then, when the content of the received command is copied to the analysis command area, the reception command buffer and the command reception counter value are cleared. As described above, by always allocating a free area in the received command buffer without directly analyzing it, it is possible to prepare for a large number of commands to be received.

Next, when the copy is completed (result of B1106 is “Y”), the effect control device 300 loads the received command content of the analysis command area (B1107) and analyzes the content. The processing is executed (B1108). The details of the received command analysis processing will be described later with reference to FIG. 25. Also, the address of the command area for analysis is updated (B1109). After that, it is determined whether or not the analysis of the commands corresponding to the number of received commands loaded in the process of step B1101 is completed (B1110), and if the analysis is not completed (result of B1110 is “N”), step The processing from B1107 to B1110 is repeated. When the analysis is completed (the result of B1110 is “Y”), the received command check processing is ended.

[Reception command analysis processing]
Next, the details of the received command analysis process (B1108) in the received command check process (FIG. 24) described above will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 25 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the received command analysis processing executed by the production control device 300.

The production control device 300 first separates the upper byte of the received command into the MODE part and the lower byte into the ACTION part (ACT part) (B1201). The command transmitted from the game control device 100 to the effect control device 300 is composed of a MODE section (MODE command) and an ACTION section (ACTION command), and is normally transmitted continuously from the MODE section indicating the type of command. It Therefore, the upper part and the lower part of the received command are configured in the order of the MODE part and the ACTION part.

Next, effect control device 300 determines whether or not the MODE part is within the normal range (B1202). That is, it is determined whether or not it is a value that can be taken by the MODE part indicating the command type (value assigned as the command specification indicating the type). If the MODE part is within the normal range (result of B1202 is “Y”), it is similarly determined whether or not the ACTION part is within the normal range (B1203). That is, it is determined whether or not the value is a value (a value assigned as a command specification indicating the content) that can be taken by the ACTION section indicating the content of the command (a concrete effect instruction or the like). If the ACTION part is within the normal range (result of B1203 is “Y”), it is further determined whether or not the ACTION part for the MODE part is a correct combination (B1204). That is, it is determined whether or not the value of the ACTION section is a value that can be taken by the command of the type specified by the MODE section. If the combination is correct (the result of B1204 is “Y”), the command processing corresponding to the command system is executed in the processing of B1205 and thereafter.

The production control device 300 first determines whether or not the value of the MODE part is within the range of the variable system command (B1205). The variation system command is a command for instructing a variation pattern or the like of a decorative special symbol, and there is, for example, a variation command (A3407). Then, when the MODE part indicates the variable command (result of B1205 is “Y”), the variable command process is executed (B1206), and the received command analysis process is ended.

When the MODE part does not represent a variable system command (result of B1205 is “N”), production control device 300 next determines whether or not the MODE part is within the range of the big hit system command (B1207). The big hit system command is a command for instructing an operation (display of a fanfare screen or a round screen, etc.) related to an effect during a big hit, and for example, a fanfare command (A2610) for instructing a fanfare screen or a round screen is commanded. Round command (A2611), an interval command (A2612) for instructing an interval screen, and an ending command (A2612) for instructing an ending screen. If the MODE part indicates a big hit type command (result of B1207 is "Y"), big hit type command processing is executed (B1208), and the received command analysis processing ends.

When the MODE part does not represent the big hit type command (the result of B1207 is “N”), the effect control device 300 next determines whether or not the MODE part is within the range of the symbol type command (B1209). Note that the symbol-based commands include, for example, a decorative special figure command (A3403, A3503) corresponding to a stop symbol pattern. Then, when the MODE part indicates a symbol-based command (the result of B1209 is "Y"), symbol-based command processing is executed (B1210), and the received command analysis processing is ended.

When the MODE part does not represent the symbol type command (result of B1209 is “N”), the effect control device 300 next determines whether or not the MODE part is within the range of the one-shot type command (B1211). If the MODE part indicates a single-shot system command (result of B1211 is “Y”), single-shot system command process is executed (B1212), and the received command analysis process is terminated.

Production control device 300, if the MODE part does not represent a one-shot system command (the result of B1211 is “N”), then the MODE part determines whether or not it is within the range of the prefetch symbol system command (B1213). .. The read-ahead symbol system command includes, for example, a read-ahead stop symbol command (A2913). Then, when the MODE part represents the prefetching symbol type command (the result of B1213 is "Y"), the prefetching symbol type command process is executed (B1214), and the received command analysis process is ended.

Production control device 300, if the MODE part does not represent the look-ahead symbol system command (the result of B1213 is "N"), then the MODE part determines whether it is in the range of the look-ahead variable system command (B1215). ). The look-ahead variation system command includes, for example, a look-ahead variation pattern command (A2913). Then, when the MODE part represents the prefetching variable system command (result of B1215 is “Y”), the prefetching variable system command process is executed (B1216), and the received command analysis process is ended.

On the other hand, if the MODE part does not represent the look-ahead variation system command (the result of B1215 is “N”), the effect control device 300 may have received an unexpected command (for example, a command used only in the test mode). Therefore, the received command analysis processing ends. Also, when the MODE part is not in the normal range (the result of B1202 is “N”), the ACTION part is not in the normal range (the result of B1203 is “N”), or when the ACTION part for the MODE part is not a correct combination ( When the result of B1204 is "N"), the received command analysis processing ends.

[Single command processing]
Next, with reference to FIG. 26, the details of the one-shot system command processing (B1212) in the above-described received command analysis processing (FIG. 25) will be described. FIG. 26 is a flowchart showing the procedure of single-shot system command processing executed by effect control device 300.

The production control device 300 first determines whether or not the MODE section represents a model designation command indicating the type of gaming machine (B1301). When the MODE part indicates a model designation command (result of B1301 is “Y”), model setting processing for setting the type of gaming machine is executed (B1302), and the single-shot command processing is terminated.

When the MODE part does not represent the model designation command (result of B1301 is “N”), production control device 300 next determines whether or not the MODE part represents a RAM initialization command (B1303). ). When the MODE part indicates a RAM initialization command (result of B1303 is “Y”), RAM initialization setting processing for notifying RAM initialization is executed (B1304), and single-shot system command processing is executed. finish.

When the MODE section does not represent the RAM initialization command (result of B1303 is “N”), production control device 300 next determines whether or not the MODE section represents a power failure recovery command (B1305). ). If the MODE part indicates a power failure recovery command (result of B1305 is "Y"), power failure recovery setting processing is executed (B1306), and the single-shot system command processing ends.

When the MODE part does not represent the power failure recovery command (the result of B1305 is “N”), the production control device 300 next determines whether or not the MODE part represents a customer waiting demo command (B1307). .. Then, when the MODE part indicates the customer waiting demo command (the result of B1307 is "Y"), the customer waiting demo setting processing is executed (B1308), and the single shot system command processing is ended.

When the MODE part does not represent the customer waiting demo command (the result of B1307 is “N”), the effect control device 300 next determines whether or not the MODE part represents the decoration special figure 1 hold number command. (B1309). If the MODE part indicates the decoration special figure 1 reservation number command (result of B1309 is "Y"), the special figure 1 reservation information setting process is executed (B1310), and the single-shot system command process is ended.

If the MODE part does not represent the decoration special figure 1 hold number command (the result of B1309 is “N”), then the production control device 300 determines whether the MODE part represents the decoration special figure 2 hold number command. It is determined (B1311). When the MODE part indicates the decoration special figure 2 reservation number command (the result of B1311 is "Y"), the special figure 2 reservation information setting process is executed (B1312), and the single command system command process is ended.

When the MODE part does not represent the decoration special figure 2 hold number command (result of B1311 is “N”), the effect control device 300 next determines whether or not the MODE part represents a probability information command. (B1313). If the MODE part indicates the probability information command (result of B1313 is “Y”), the probability information setting process is executed (B1314), and the single-shot system command process is ended.

If the MODE part does not represent the probability information command (result of B1313 is “N”), production control device 300 then determines whether or not the MODE part represents an error/illegal command ( B1315). The error/illegal commands include, for example, a fraud command, a fraud cancellation command, a state off command, and a state on command. As a state-on command, a signal is generated from the glass frame opening detection switch 63 (glass frame opening error) or a signal is generated from the front frame opening detection switch 64 (body frame opening detection switch) (body frame opening error, front frame opening error). There is a command indicating a release error). The status off command indicates that no error has occurred.

If the MODE part indicates an error/illegal command (result of B1315 is “Y”), an error/illegal setting process for reporting or canceling the error or fraud is executed (B1316), Terminates single-shot command processing.

When the MODE section does not represent an error/illegal command (the result of B1315 is “N”), the MODE control section 300 then causes the MODE section to execute a command for effect mode switching (special figure displaying process). Etc.) is determined (B1317). When the MODE part indicates a command for effect mode switching (result of B1317 is “Y”), effect mode switching setting processing is executed (B1318), and the single shot system command processing ends.

If the MODE part does not represent the command for mode switching (result of B1317 is "N"), the production control device 300 next indicates whether the MODE part represents an out ball number command indicating the out ball number. It is determined whether or not (B1319). If the MODE part indicates the out-ball number command (result of B1319 is “Y”), the out-ball number receiving process is executed (B1320), and the single shot system command process is ended.

If the MODE part does not represent the out-ball number command (the result of B1319 is “N”), the production control device 300 next determines whether or not the MODE part represents a count command (special winning hole count command). It is determined (B1321). Then, when the MODE part indicates the command for counting the special winning opening switch (the result of B1321 is “Y”), the count information setting process is executed (B1322), and the single shot system command process is ended.

If the MODE part does not represent the count command (result of B1321 is “N”), production control device 300 determines whether or not the MODE part represents a set value information command (probability set value information command). (B1323). The set value information command is included in the command at the time of power failure recovery in step A1046 of FIG. 6B and the command at the time of RAM initialization transmitted in the process of step A1044. When the MODE part indicates the set value information command (result of B1323 is “Y”), the set value receiving process is executed (B1324), and the single-shot system command process is ended. In the set value reception process, the set value (probability set value) is stored in a storage unit such as a RAM and necessary processing is executed.

When the MODE section does not represent the setting value information command (result of B1323 is “N”), production control device 300 determines whether or not the MODE section represents a setting change type command (B1325). As the setting change type command, for example, there is a command (A1030) during changing the probability setting. If the MODE part indicates a setting change type command (result of B1325 is “Y”), the setting change type information setting process is executed (B1326), and the one-shot type command process is ended. In the setting change type information setting process, the contents of the setting change type command are stored and the process corresponding to the command is executed. For example, when the command for changing the probability setting is received, in the setting change system information setting process, a setting change display for notifying the player that the setting is being changed is displayed on the display device 41.

If the MODE part does not represent a setting change type command (result of B1325 is “N”), production control device 300 determines whether or not the MODE part represents a setting confirmation type command (B1327). .. As a command for setting confirmation, for example, there is a command (A1033) during confirmation of probability setting. Then, when the MODE part indicates a command of the setting confirmation system (the result of B1327 is “Y”), the setting confirmation system information setting process is executed (B1328), and the single-shot system command process is ended. In the setting confirmation system information setting process, the contents of the setting confirmation system command are stored and the process corresponding to the command is executed. For example, when the command for confirming the probability setting is received, the setting confirmation system information setting process displays a setting confirmation display for notifying the player that the setting is being confirmed.

Next, it is determined whether or not the MODE part represents a symbol stop command (B1329). In addition, the command of the symbol stop includes, for example, a symbol stop command of the special figure 1 (decorative special figure 1 stop command) and a symbol stop command of the special figure 2 (decorative special figure 2 stop command). Then, when the MODE part represents the command of the symbol stop (the result of B1329 is “Y”), the production control device 300 next determines whether or not the command of the MODE part is a normal command ( B1330).

When the command of the MODE part is a normal command (the result of B1330 is “Y”), the effect control device 300 sets the stop mode of the corresponding special drawing (B1331), and after all the symbols stop the game. The status flag is set to the normal status (B1332), and the single-shot system command processing ends. In the processing of B1332, as an example, the game state flag is set to the normal state, but the game state flag is a flag of “in change”, “in big hit”, “in small hit” depending on the timing of execution of this processing. Is set.

On the other hand, when the MODE part does not represent the command to stop the symbol (result of B1329 is “N”), or when the command of the MODE part is not normal (result of B1330 is “N”), the effect control device 300 terminates the single-shot command processing.

In addition, the effect control device 300 may execute processing for commands not shown in FIG.

[Read-ahead command processing]
Next, with reference to FIG. 27, the details of the prefetching symbol type command process (B1214) in the above-described received command analysis process (FIG. 25) will be described. FIG. 27 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the prefetch symbol type command processing executed by the effect control device 300.

The production control device 300 first determines whether or not the latest pending information is information of special figure 1 hold (special figure 1 starting memory), for example, the latest received special special figure hold number command is the decoration special figure 1 hold number. It is determined whether the command is a command (B1601). If the latest hold information is the special figure 1 hold information (the result of B1601 is “Y”), the prefetch symbol system command (prefetch stop symbol command) is placed in the special figure 1 prefetch symbol command area corresponding to the special figure 1 hold number. It is saved (B1602).

If the latest hold information is not the information on the special figure 1 hold (the result of B1601 is “N”), the effect control device 300 receives the latest decoration special figure hold number command as the decoration special figure 2 hold number command. In this case, the prefetch symbol system command (prefetch stop symbol command) is saved in the special figure 2 prefetch symbol command area corresponding to the special figure 2 reservation number (B1603).

Rendering control device 300, after steps B1602 and B1603, sets a readahead variable system command reception wait flag indicating that it is waiting to receive a readahead variable system command (B1604). This is because the pre-reading symbol system command and the pre-reading variable system command are set, so that the pre-reading variable system command is transmitted from the game control device 100 following the pre-reading symbol system command. After that, the prefetching symbol type command processing is ended.

[Prefetch variable system command processing]
Next, with reference to FIG. 28, the details of the prefetching variable system command process (B1216) in the above-described received command analysis process (FIG. 25) will be described. FIG. 28 is a flow chart showing the procedure of the look-ahead variable system command processing executed by the production control device 300.

The production control device 300 first determines whether or not the prefetch variation system command (prefetch variation pattern command) is waiting to be received (B1701). When the read-ahead variable system command reception wait flag (B1604) is set, it can be determined that the read-ahead variable system command is waiting to be received. If the prefetch variable system command is not waiting (the result of B1701 is “N”), the prefetch variable system command processing is ended. If the prefetch variable system command is waiting to be received (result of B1701 is “Y”), the prefetch variable system command reception wait flag is cleared (B1702).

Next, the production control device 300 (sub-board) sets the look-ahead variation MODE conversion table corresponding to the number of holdings of the design (special figure 1 or special figure 2) of the latest pending information (B1703), and the pre-reading variation system command An intra-sub-readahead variation command MODE part is acquired corresponding to the MODE part (B1704). Next, the look-ahead variation ACT conversion table is set (B1705), and the sub-prefetch variation command ACT section corresponding to the ACTION section (ACT section) of the look-ahead variation system command is acquired (B1706).

Next, the production control device 300 determines whether or not both of the converted MODE part and ACT part (that is, the intra-sub prefetch change command MODE part and ACT part) are other than 0 (B1707). If the command is normal (valid), it is converted to a value other than 0. If both the converted MODE part and ACT part are other than 0 (the result of B1707 is "Y"), the converted command composed of the converted MODE part and ACT part corresponds to the latest hold information and the hold number. It is saved in the pre-reading variable command area (special figure 1 pre-reading variable command area or special figure 2 pre-reading variable command area) (B1708). Then, the prefetch command consistency check process is executed (B1709), and it is determined whether or not the combination of the converted MODE part and ACT part is normal (B1710).

Note that the time of the first half fluctuation corresponding to the MODE part changes depending on the number of holds when the hold is started when the variable display game is started. When the hold starts the variable display game, if there is no other hold, the first half change becomes longer, and if a new hold occurs and the number of hold is large, the first half change becomes shorter. Therefore, even if the time value of the first-half variation is changed, the MODE part of the received prefetching variation type command is converted into the sub-internal prefetching variation command MODE section so that the internal command of the effect control device 300 can be treated the same.

Further, since the type of reach does not relate to the number of holdings, the latter half fluctuation corresponding to the in-sub prefetch change command ACT unit does not depend on the number of holdings. However, since there are different types of reach in the same system, if the production control device 300 is used as it is without converting the ACT part (value of the latter half variation) of the look-ahead variation system command, the number becomes large and the check becomes difficult. .. For example, in normal reach, there are types such as normal reach-1 stop deviation and normal reach+1 stop deviation. Therefore, by converting the ACT units showing the reach of the same system into the same sub-prefetch variable command ACT units, the number is reduced and the load of the check process such as the prefetch command consistency check process is reduced.

Next, the production control device 300 determines that at least one of the converted MODE part and ACT part (that is, the sub prefetch change command MODE part and ACT part) is 0 (the result of B1707 is “N”), or If the combination of the MODE part and the ACT part after conversion is not normal (the result of B1710 is “N”), it is determined that the command after conversion is abnormal, and the prefetch variable system command processing is ended.

When the combination of the converted MODE part and ACT part is normal (result of B1710 is “Y”), the production control device 300 loads the prefetch target hold information (latest hold information) from the preread variable command area. (B1711), the prefetch lottery process regarding the latest pending prefetch effect is executed (B1712). Examples of the prefetching effect include a continuous notice effect (including a chance eye prefetching effect), a prefetch zone effect, and a pending change notice. Subsequently, it is determined whether or not the latest read-ahead look-ahead effect (holding change notice, etc.) is generated (B1713). When the latest hold prefetching effect occurs (the result of B1713 is "Y"), the point information corresponding to the selected prefetching effect is set (B1714).

Next, the effect control device 300 determines whether or not the generated look-ahead effect (holding change notice, etc.) is an effect that starts immediately (B1715). When the prefetching effect that occurs is an effect that starts immediately (the result of B1715 is “Y”), the display corresponding to the selected prefetching effect is set (B1716). When the prefetching effect that occurs is not an effect that starts immediately (the result of B1715 is “N”), the display corresponding to the prefetching effect at the time of the hold shift (when the hold display is moved, when the number of hold is decreased) is set and saved (B1717). ). Then, the prefetching variable system command processing is ended.

On the other hand, the effect control device 300, when the latest pending lookahead effect does not occur (B1713 result is "N"), or when the generated lookahead effect is not an immediate start effect (B1715 result is "N"). As it is. The prefetching variable system command processing ends.

[Design command processing]
Next, with reference to FIG. 29, the details of the symbol-based command processing (B1210) in the received command analysis processing (FIG. 25) described above will be described. FIG. 29 is a flowchart showing a procedure of symbol-based command processing executed by the production control device 300.

The production control device 300 sets the special figure type corresponding to the MODE part of the received symbol system command (decorative special figure 1 command or decorative special figure 2 command) (B1801). The special map type is special map 1 or special map 2. Then, the symbol type corresponding to the combination of the MODE part and the ACTION part (ACT part) of the symbol system command is set and saved in a predetermined area such as a RAM (B1802). Here, in the special figure 1 and the special figure 2, since the distribution ratio of the symbols changes, the symbol type is set using the table for each MODE. In the present embodiment, the symbol type is a deviating symbol, a 4R probability variation big hit symbol (4R-A1, symbol 1), a 4R normal jackpot symbol (4R-A2, symbol 2), an 8R probability variation jackpot symbol (8R-A1, Design 3), 8R normal big hit design (8R-A2, design 4), 12R probability variation big hit design (12R-A1, design 5), 12R normal big hit design (12R-A2, design 6) it corresponds.

[Variable command processing]
Next, with reference to FIG. 30, details of the variable command processing (B1206) in the received command analysis processing (FIG. 25) described above will be described. FIG. 30 is a flowchart showing the procedure of variable system command processing executed by the effect control device 300.

The production control device 300 determines whether or not the special figure type (special figure 1 or special figure 2) of the received variation system command (variation command) is undetermined (B1901). When the special figure type is undetermined (the result of B1901 is “Y”), the variable system command processing ends. If the special figure type is not undetermined (the result of B1901 is "N"), the combination of the received variable system command and the symbol system command is checked (B1902), and whether the variable system command and the symbol type are inconsistent or not. Is determined (B1903). Here, the inconsistency is a contradiction in performing the production, such as when a symbol system command of a big hit symbol is received although an outlying variable system command is received. When the variable type command and the symbol type are not consistent (the result of B1903 is “Y”), the variable type command processing is ended.

When the variation type command and the symbol type are not inconsistent (the result of B1903 is “N”), the effect control device 300 determines the variation pattern type from the variation type command (fluctuation command) (B1904), and the effect is changing. A variation effect setting process for setting a certain variation effect is executed (B1905). There are a plurality of effects for the same variable command. Then, the special state is being changed in the game state flag indicating the game state (P machine state) (B1906), and if the number of prefetching effects such as continuous effects is not 0, -1 is updated (B1907).

[Variation effect setting process]
Next, with reference to FIG. 31, the details of the variable effect setting process (B1905) in the above-described variable system command process (FIG. 30) will be described. FIG. 31 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the variable effect setting process executed by the effect control device 300.

The production control device 300 first determines whether or not the variation pattern type is a variation without reach (variation that does not reach the reach state) (B2001). When the variation pattern type is variation without reach (the result of B2001 is “Y”), the number of production points, model code, special figure type, production mode, first-half notice distribution group corresponding to setting information (setting value) The address table is set (B2002), and the MODE part of the variable system command (fluctuation command) and the address of the first-half notice distribution group table corresponding to the number of reservations of the special figure type are acquired (B2003). In the case of the fluctuation without reach, the fluctuation time is shortened as the number of reservations is large, and therefore the address of the table corresponding to the number of reservations is acquired.

When the variation pattern type is not the reachless variation (the result of B2001 is “N”), that is, when the reachable variation, the effect control device 300, the number of effect points, the model code, the special figure type, the effect mode, The first half notice distribution group address table corresponding to the symbol type and the setting information (setting value) is set (B2004), and the MODE part of the variable system command (variation command) and the first half notice distribution group table corresponding to the variation pattern type are set. The address is acquired (B2005).

After the steps B2003 and B2005, the effect control device 300 performs the lottery of the notice that appears during the first half fluctuation (before the reach) (B2006). Next, the second half notice distribution group address table corresponding to the number of production points, model code, special drawing type, production mode, design type, and setting information (setting value) is set (B2007), and the ACT of the variable system command is set. The address of the latter half notice distribution group table corresponding to the division is obtained (B2008), and the notice lottery that appears during the second half change (during reach) is performed (B2009). After that, the contents of the variation effect corresponding to the MODE part and the ACT part of the variation system command (variation command) are determined (B2010). It should be noted that the variation time command and main reach contents can be known from the variation system command.

Next, the effect control device 300 determines the content of the effect (advance effect) corresponding to the result of the advance notice lottery (B2011). After that, the stop design of the decorative special figure variable display game is determined according to the contents of the variation effect such as the reach effect and the notice effect (B2012). Here, the decorative stop design is specifically determined, such as determining the separation in the case of the outlying design.

Next, the effect control device 300 performs the display setting of the variable effect (B2013) and the display setting of the notice effect (B2014). Then, the display setting of the hold reduction corresponding to the special figure type is set, and for example, the display that the hold display corresponding to the decorative special figure that changes this time is reduced is set (B2015). Next, a voice number that determines the effect mode (sound output mode) by the sound of the speaker and a decoration number that determines the effect mode by the light emission of the decoration device are set (B2016). The decorating device (board decorating device 46, frame decorating device 18) has a plurality of decorative light emitting portions (decorative LEDs, etc.), and emits light in a light emitting mode (color of each LED, light emitting timing, etc.) determined by a decoration number. ..

The voice number and the decoration number can be set based on the setting information (setting value) as well as the effect contents. In this way, the player can enjoy inferring the setting information (setting value) of the gaming machine 10 from the light emitting mode of the decoration device, that is, the light emitting mode of the decorative light emitting unit (LED).

Next, the effect control device 300 performs display setting of the decoration special figure variation corresponding to the special figure type (B2017), and the fourth special symbol other than the above-mentioned first to third special symbols that varies on the display device 41. The display setting of the fourth symbol variation regarding (4th symbol, identification information) is performed (B2018). The fourth symbol variation may be displayed on the lamp display units 1 and 2 (LED) of the above-described lamp display device 80 provided in addition to the display device 41, or may be executed on the display screen of the display device 41. Good.

[Winning command processing]
Next, the details of the hit command processing (B1208) in the received command analysis processing (FIG. 25) described above will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 32 is a flowchart showing a procedure of a hit command processing executed by the effect control device 300.

The effect control device 300 first determines whether or not the MODE part of the received hit system command represents a fanfare (B2101). If the MODE part of the hit system command indicates a fanfare (the result of B2101 is "Y"), that is, if the hit command is a big hit fanfare command (or a small hit fanfare command if there is a small hit), a fanfare effect is set. The fanfare effect setting process for executing is executed (B2102). It should be noted that the fanfare command includes information on the maximum number of rounds for this big hit. Then, the fan state is set to the game state flag showing the current game state (P machine state) of the game machine 10 (B2103), and the hit system command processing is ended. The upper limit number of rounds can also be obtained from the symbol type determined from the symbol system command (decorative special command corresponding to the stop symbol pattern).

If the MODE part of the received hit command does not represent fanfare (the result of B2101 is “N”), production control device 300 determines whether or not the MODE part of the hit command represents a round ( B2104). When the MODE part indicates a round (the result of B2104 is “Y”), that is, when the hit system command is a round command (or a small hit opening command if there is a small hit), the effect control device 300 makes the round effect. The setting process is executed, the game state flag indicating the current game state (P machine state) of the game machine 10 is set to "round" (B2105, B2106), and the hit system command process is ended.

When the MODE part of the received hit command does not represent a round (the result of B2104 is “N”), the effect control device 300 determines whether or not the MODE part of the hit command indicates an interval ( B2107). When the MODE part indicates an interval (the result of B2107 is “Y”), that is, when the hit system command is an interval command, the effect control device 300 executes the interval effect setting process, and the current game of the gaming machine 10 is executed. The interval state is set to the game state flag indicating the state (P machine state) (B2108, B2109), and the hit command processing is ended. (Note that there is no interval command when there is a small hit and the big winning opening is opened only once in the small hit, that is, when the small hit is one round.)

When the MODE part of the received hit system command does not represent the interval (the result of B2107 is “N”), the effect control device 300 determines whether or not the MODE part of the hit system command indicates the ending ( B2110). When the MODE part indicates the ending (the result of B2110 is “Y”), that is, when the hit system command is the ending command (or the small hit end screen command if there is a small hit), the effect control device 300 determines the ending effect. The ending effect setting process for setting is executed, the ending state is set in the game state flag indicating the current game state (P machine state) of the gaming machine 10 (B2111, B2112), and the hit system command processing is ended. ..

If the MODE part of the received hit system command does not indicate the ending (the result of B2110 is “N”), the effect control device 300 ends the hit system command process without executing any process. To do.

[Large symbol object, small symbol object, variation mode or variation mode of holding object]
FIG. 33 is a screen transition diagram (previous stage) showing the variation mode or the variation mode of the large symbol objects 610A, 610B, 610C, the small symbol object 615, and the holding objects 633, 633a which are being displayed at high speed on the display device 41. FIG. 34 is a screen transition diagram (second stage) showing a variation mode or a variation mode of the large symbol objects 610A, 610B, 610C, the small symbol object 615, and the hold objects 633, 633a which are being displayed at high speed on the display device 41. FIG. 35 is a table showing the relationship between the large pattern objects 610A, 610B, 610C, the small pattern object 15, and the hold objects 633, 633a in the high-speed variable display, and the frames and the changing or changing modes.

As shown in FIG. 33 (for example, (a1)), a variable display area 610 is arranged in the center of the display device 41, and a large symbol object 610A (first large symbol object) is arranged on the left side of the variable display area 610. The large symbol object 610B (first large symbol object) is arranged on the right side of the variable display region 610, and the large symbol object 610C (second large symbol object) is arranged in the center of the variable display region 610. In (a1) of FIG. 33, the large symbol objects 610A, 610B, and 610C are all displayed with “7” as identification information, but each can display arbitrary identification information (an integer from 1 to 9). .. Further, the large pattern objects 610A, 610B, 610C are configured as identification information (for example, "7") written on the front surface or the back surface of a rectangular plate-shaped main body, but the identification information (for example, " 7”) only.

In addition, a reserved digestion area 640 is arranged at a position below the display device 41 and directly below the large symbol object 610C, and a reserved display portion 630a (special figure 1 reserved display portion) is arranged on the left side thereof. .. The right side of the reserved digestion area 640 is a special figure 2 reserved display portion. In the special figure 1 hold display section (hold display section 630a) and the special figure 2 hold display section, the hold objects 633 before the digestion are arranged in a line according to the number of reserves (maximum 4) respectively, and the reserve digestion is performed. In the area 640, the pending object 633a being digested is displayed. The hold object 633a is a hold display corresponding to the starting memory (holding during change) of the special figure change display game being executed. The special figure 1 hold display section displays a hold object 633 (hold display) corresponding to the first starting memory (special figure 1 hold, special figure 1 start memory), and the special figure 2 hold display section displays the second object. The hold object 633 (hold display) corresponding to the start memory (special figure 2 hold, special figure 2 start memory) is displayed.

On the upper right of the display device 41 (on the right side of the large symbol object 610B), the special figure 1 reserved number display section 650 and the special figure 2 reserved number display section 660 are arranged in order from the top. The special figure 1 reserved number display section 650 and the special figure 2 reserved number display section 660 respectively display the number "2" indicating the special figure 1 reserved number and the number "0" indicating the special figure 2 reserved number. .. Therefore, two to-be-held objects 633 are displayed on the special figure 1 holding display section (holding display section 630a), and no holding object 633 is displayed on the toku-zu 2 holding display section.

Further, a small symbol object 615 is arranged on the lower right side of the display device 41 (on the right side of the special figure 2 hold display section). The small pattern object 615 displays identification information composed of, for example, Chinese numerals “1” to “9”, and although only one is displayed in FIG. 33, for example, three small pattern objects in a horizontal row. 615 may be displayed.

As described above, the pending object 633a is displayed in the pending digest area 640. Therefore, the game control device 100 and the effect control device 300 execute the variable display game accompanying the consumption of the hold object 633a (starting memory).

In the variable display game (decorative special figure variable display game) on the display device 41, the large symbol objects 610A, 610B, 610C and the small symbol object 615 are variably displayed. Further, the hold objects 633 and 633a can be variably displayed such that the displayed form (shape, pattern, etc.) temporally changes regardless of the execution of the variably displayed game, but variably displayed only during the variably displayed game. You may do it.

In the variable display game, the large symbol objects 610A, 610B, and 610C are variably displayed in the order of preliminary operation, low speed variation, medium speed variation, high speed variation, medium speed variation, low speed variation, and temporary stop variation. Further, the large pattern objects 610A and 610B and the large symbol object 610C have different variation modes (variation display modes).

The small pattern object 615 is synchronized with the update period (for example, 1/30 second, 33.3 ms) of the screen (frame) of the display device 41 (or synchronized with an integer multiple of the update period) during the variable display game. The identification information from "1" to "9" is sequentially switched.

The hold objects 633 and 633a are variably displayed (variable display) in a manner that their shapes vibrate in a predetermined cycle.

In the present embodiment, the effect control device 300 (display control means) moves the large symbol objects 610A and 610B from the upper end (base end) of the specific route (here, the straight line route along the vertical direction) to the lower end (end) of the specific route. After erasing it by moving it toward, the large pattern objects 610A and 610B whose identification information (first identification information) has been switched are moved from the upper end (base end) to the lower end (end) and disappear. In a repeating mode, the large symbol objects 610A and 610B are vertically scrolled (scrolled). As the specific route, not only a straight route extending in the vertical direction, but also various routes such as a straight route inclined in a predetermined direction and an arcuate curved route can be applied.

In addition, in the present embodiment, the effect control device 300 (display control means) displays the large symbol object 610C in a mode in which the symbol is rotated stepwise, and the front surface or the back surface on which the identification information (second identification information) is displayed is displayed. The large symbol object 610C is variably displayed in such a manner that the front surface and/or the rear surface are alternately viewed from the front and the identification information (second identification information) is switched every time the front surface is viewed from the front.

The large symbol object 610C has, for example, a display mode that rotates in the axial direction so that the front surface and the back surface where the identification information is displayed alternately at a predetermined position (screen center), and the front surface or the back surface is viewed in front. A fluctuation display is made due to a rotation fluctuation in which the identification information is switched (see FIG. 37(a)). The large symbol object 610C rotates in such a manner that the portion on the left side of the rotation axis moves to the back side of the paper and the portion on the right side moves to the front side of the paper, but may be rotated in the opposite direction.

In low-speed fluctuation, medium-speed fluctuation, and high-speed fluctuation, large symbol objects 610A and 610B are variably displayed by vertical scrolling, and large symbol object 610C is variably displayed by rotational fluctuation, but the varying speed (scrolling speed, rotating speed) is It becomes faster in the order of low speed fluctuation, medium speed fluctuation, and high speed fluctuation. The fluctuation speed of the small symbol object 615 is constant in low speed fluctuation, medium speed fluctuation, and high speed fluctuation.

The preliminary movement is a display in which the large symbol objects 610A, 610B, and 610C move a predetermined distance in the direction opposite to the vertical scroll direction before entering the low-speed fluctuation. The temporary stop change is a change display just before the end of the change display game, and is a change display in which the display positions of the large symbol objects 610A, 610B, and 610C vibrate in the vertical direction at a predetermined cycle.

[High-speed fluctuation display]
A variation mode (variation display mode) during high-speed variable display will be described. Here, the variable display such as the high-speed variable display is to sequentially update and display the frame (screen). In FIGS. 33 and 34, a case will be described where, for example, the 101st (arbitrary number) frame to the 125th (arbitrary number) frame are used.

In the frame 101 shown in (a1) of FIG. 33, the large symbol object 610A is displayed on the upper left side of the display device 41, and the large symbol object 610B is displayed on the upper right side of the display device 41, each displaying identification information “7”. ing. The large symbol object 610C is displayed in a state where the identification information “7” is viewed from the front in the central portion of the display device 41. Further, the small symbol object 615 displays the identification information “seven”, and the holding objects 633, 633a are displayed in the most expanded form (shape “large”) (FIG. 41).

In the frame 102 (the frame next to the frame 101) shown in (a2) of FIG. 33, the large symbol object 610A is displayed on the left side of the display device 41 at the center in the height direction, and the large symbol object 610B is displayed. , Which is displayed on the right side of the display device 41 at the center position in the height direction and displays the identification information “7”, respectively, but has not moved in the horizontal direction as compared with the frame 101 (hereinafter, referred to as “movement”). The same).

The large symbol object 610C is displayed at a predetermined position (center of the screen) with the entire object rotated by 60 degrees in the axial direction from the posture in which the identification information “7” is viewed from the front, and the identification information “7” is obliquely displayed. The figure in the form seen is displayed. The direction of shaft rotation is such that the left side moves from the rotation shaft to the back and the right side comes to the front, but it may rotate in the opposite direction. Further, the large symbol object 610C does not move in the horizontal direction and the vertical direction as compared with the frame 101 (the same applies hereafter). Further, the small pattern object 615 displays the identification information “eight”, and the hold objects 633, 633a also maintain the form (shape “large”).

In the frame 103 (frame next to the frame 102) shown in (a3) of FIG. 33, the large symbol object 610A is displayed on the lower left portion of the display device 41, and the large symbol object 610B is displayed on the lower right portion of the display device 41. The identification information “7” is displayed for each. The large symbol object 610C is displayed in a mode in which the entire object is rotated by 120 degrees from the posture in which the identification information “7” is viewed from the front.

Here, since the large pattern object 610C can be made transparent except for the identification information, in this case, as shown in (a3), the outer shape of the identification information “7” is horizontally inverted and seen from diagonally. A graphic is displayed (Fig. 35). The small symbol object 615 displays the identification information “9”, and the hold objects 633, 633a also maintain the form (shape “large”). Although a part of the large symbol object 610A is displayed in a state of being hidden by the holding object 633, conversely, a part (or all) of the holding object 633 is displayed in a state of being hidden by the large symbol object 610A. May be (and so on).

In the frame 104 (the frame next to the frame 103) shown in (a4) of FIG. 33, the large symbol objects 610A and 610B displaying the identification information “7” disappear, and the identification information “8” is displayed on the upper left side of the display device 41. Is displayed, and a large symbol object 610B displaying identification information “8” is displayed on the upper right side of the display device 41. The large symbol object 610C is displayed in a state where the entire object is rotated by 180 degrees from the posture in which the identification information “7” is viewed from the front and the back surface is viewed in front, and the identification information “8” is displayed on the back surface. There is. Further, the small pattern object 615 displays the identification information "1", and the hold objects 633, 633a also maintain the form (shape "large").

In the frame 105 (the frame next to the frame 104) shown in (a5) of FIG. 33, the large symbol object 610A is displayed on the left side of the display device 41 at the center position in the height direction, and the large symbol object 610B is displayed. Is displayed on the right side of the display device 41 and at the center position in the height direction, and displays identification information “8”. The large symbol object 610C is displayed in a mode in which the entire object is rotated by 60 degrees from the posture in which the identification information “8” is viewed from the front, and the figure in a mode in which the identification information “8” is viewed obliquely is displayed. .. Further, the small symbol object 615 displays the identification information "two", and the hold objects 633, 633a also maintain the form (shape "large").

In the frame 106 (the frame next to the frame 105) shown in (a6) of FIG. 33, the large symbol object 610A is displayed on the lower left portion of the display device 41, and the large symbol object 610B is displayed on the lower right portion of the display device 41. The identification information “8” is displayed for each. The large symbol object 610C is displayed in a state in which the entire object is rotated by 120 degrees from the posture in which the identification information “8” is viewed from the front, and the outer shape of the identification information “8” is horizontally flipped and is viewed obliquely. The figure is displayed. Further, the small symbol object 615 displays the identification information "three", and the hold objects 633 and 633a also maintain the form (shape "large").

In the frame 107 (frame next to the frame 106) shown in (a7) of FIG. 33, the large symbol objects 610A and 610B displaying the identification information “8” disappear, and the identification information “9” is displayed on the upper left side of the display device 41. Is displayed, and a large symbol object 610B displaying the identification information “9” is displayed on the upper right side of the display device 41. The large symbol object 610C is displayed in a state in which the entire object is rotated by 180 degrees from the posture in which the identification information “8” is viewed from the front and the surface is viewed from the front, and the identification information “9” is displayed on the surface. There is. The small symbol object 615 displays the identification information “four”. The holding objects 633 and 633a are switched from the most inflated form (shape "large") to the one-stage contracted form (shape "medium") (FIG. 41).

In the frame 108 (frame next to the frame 107) shown in (a8) of FIG. 33, the large symbol object 610A is displayed at the left side of the display device 41 and at the center position in the height direction, and the large symbol object 610B is displayed. The identification information “9” is displayed on the right side of the display device 41 and at the center position in the height direction. The large symbol object 610C is displayed in a mode in which the entire object is rotated by 60 degrees from the posture in which the identification information "9" is viewed from the front, and the figure in a mode in which the identification information "9" is viewed obliquely is displayed. .. The small symbol object 615 displays the identification information "five", and the hold objects 633 and 633a also maintain the form (shape "medium").

In a frame 113 (a frame five frames after the frame 108) shown in (a9) of FIG. 34, a large symbol object 610A displaying the identification information “2” is displayed on the upper left side of the display device 41, and the right side of the display device 41. A large symbol object 610B displaying the identification information "2" is displayed on the upper part. The large symbol object 610C is displayed in a front view of the surface, and the identification information “2” is displayed on the surface. The small symbol object 615 displays the identification information "1". The holding objects 633 and 633a are switched from the one-stage contracted form (shape "medium") to the two-stage contracted form (shape "small") (FIG. 41).

In the frame 119 (frame 6 frames after the frame 113) shown in (a10) of FIG. 34, the large symbol object 610A displaying the identification information “4” is displayed on the upper left side of the display device 41, and the right side of the display device 41. A large symbol object 610B displaying the identification information "4" is displayed at the top. The large symbol object 610C is displayed in a front view of the surface, and the identification information "4" is displayed on the surface. The small symbol object 615 displays the identification information “7”. The holding objects 633 and 633a are switched from the shape "small" to the shape "medium" (FIG. 41).

In a frame 125 (frame 6 frames after the frame 119) shown in (a11) of FIG. 34, a large symbol object 610A displaying the identification information “6” is displayed on the upper left side of the display device 41, and the right side of the display device 41. A large symbol object 610B displaying the identification information "6" is displayed at the top. The large symbol object 610C is displayed in a front view of the surface, and the identification information "6" is displayed on the surface. The small symbol object 615 displays the identification information “four”. The hold objects 633 and 633a are switched from the shape "medium" to the shape "large" (FIG. 41).

As shown in FIGS. 33 and 34, the large symbol objects 610A and 610B move in the order of the upper portion, the central portion, and the lower portion of the display device 41 in a state (identical form) having the same identification information using three frames. Is displayed. Further, in the large symbol object 610C, the same identification information (identification information to be viewed from the front) is displayed only in one frame. The shapes of the hold objects 633 and 633a change every 6 frames, and the original shape is restored in the frame 125.

As shown in FIG. 35, the large symbol object 610A (FIG. 35: left symbol) and the large symbol object 610B (FIG. 35: right symbol) maintain the same identification information in three frames, and the identification information is changed every three frames. Are displayed as if they switch. Therefore, the display period T1 of the large symbol objects 610A and 610B having the same form as the switching period P1 of the large symbol objects 610A and 610B is the same and is 3 frames (100 ms).

In the large symbol object 610C (FIG. 35: medium symbol), the identification information is switched every 3 frames, but the display period T2 of the same identification information (identification information to be viewed from the front) is 1 frame (33.3 ms). ..

Therefore, the switching period P1 of the large symbol object 610C is 3 frames (100 ms), but the display period T2 of the large symbol object 610C of the same form is 1 frame (33.3 ms).

Since the identification information of the small pattern object 615 is switched every time one frame is switched, the switching period P2 of the small pattern object 615 and the display period S1 of the small pattern object 615 of the same form are the same for one frame (33.3 ms). Become.

The holding objects 633 and 633a each have a shape of “large”, a shape of “medium”, and a shape of “small” that are continuously displayed for 6 frames. , Shape “medium”, and shape “large” in this order, and this is repeated cyclically. Therefore, the shaking period P3 (the period in which the shape changes) of the hold objects 633, 633a is 24 frames (800 ms), and the display period H1 of the hold objects 633, 633a of the same form is 6 frames (200 ms).

In the present embodiment, for the display period (continuous display period) of each object of the same form, the display period S1 of the small symbol object 615=the display period T2 (for one frame) of the large symbol object 610C<the large symbol objects 610A and 610B. The display period T1 (for 3 frames)<the display period H1 (for 6 frames) of the hold objects 633 and 633a.

Here, since the large symbol objects 610A and 610B are vertical scrolls and the movement amount is large, it is easy to recognize that they are changing. Further, since the large pattern objects 610A and 610B having the same identification information are vertically scrolled without changing the form, it is possible to recognize that they are the same even if the movement amount is large. Therefore, even if the large symbol objects 610A and 610B are semitransparent, it is possible to easily recognize that the variable display is performed by vertical scrolling.

On the other hand, the large symbol object 610C has a small movement amount due to rotation fluctuation (zero). However, in the large symbol objects 610A, 610B, 610C, the switching cycle P1 for switching the identification information is the same. Then, the period for displaying the same identification information in the large symbol object 610C (for one frame) is made shorter than the period for displaying the same identification information in the large symbol objects 610A, 610B (for three frames). Further, in a frame in which the large symbol object 610C does not display the identification information in a front view, a large symbol object 610C having a different shape from the large symbol object 610C on which the identification information is displayed (even if a figure imitating the identification information is displayed, (It does not need to be displayed) is displayed to show that the shape of the large symbol object 610C changes periodically. Therefore, even if the large symbol object 610C is semi-transparent, it can be easily recognized that the variable display is performed due to the rotational fluctuation.

Further, the display period H1 (for 6 frames) of the holding objects 633, 633a is made longer than the display period T1 (for 3 frames) of the large symbol objects 610A, 610B and the display period T2 (for 1 frame) of the large symbol object 610C. ing. As a result, the player naturally directs his or her line of sight to the person who is moving fast, so that the line of sight of the player can be directed to the large symbol objects 610A, 610B, and 610C when the player is moving at high speed. Further, when the large symbol objects 610A, 610B, 610C are stopped (including the temporary stop state), the line of sight can be directed to the pending objects 633, 633a that are variably displayed.

As described above, the swinging period P3 (period in which the shape changes) of the holding objects 633, 633a is 24 frames (800 ms), which is longer than the launching period (600 ms) of the game ball by the ball launching device. ing. Here, the game ball is launched by the ball launching device to be felt by the player by the sound and vibration generated at that time. Therefore, by setting the swing period P3 (800 ms) of the hold objects 633, 633a to be slower than the firing period (600 ms), the player can relax and enjoy the game leisurely.

By the way, in the lamp display device 80, one of the lower two lamp display portions (LEDs) notifies as the fourth symbol of the special figure 1 variable display game, and the other LED of the special figure 2 variable display game. Notify as the fourth symbol. The two LEDs are controlled by the effect control device 300, and when the special figure 1 variable display game is played, one of the LEDs is made to blink at intervals of 100 ms (100 ms on, 100 ms off: cycle 200 ms) to display the special figure 2 variable display game. Also when performing, the other LED is made to blink at intervals of 100 ms. Further, in the lamp display device 80, the two LEDs at the upper left (decorative special figure 1 hold LED1, decorative special figure 1 hold LED2) are turned off, lit, or blinking, depending on the number of decorative special figure 1 held (first start The number of memories is displayed, and the two LEDs on the upper right (decorative special figure 2 hold LED1, decorative special figure 2 hold LED2) are turned off, lit, or blinking, depending on the decorative special figure 2 hold number (second start memory Number) is displayed. The blinking interval of the LED regarding these reservations (the number of reservations) is also 100 ms (100 ms on, 100 ms off: cycle 200 ms). Therefore, it is also preferable to set the swing cycle P3 of the hold objects 633, 633a to a cycle of three frames (100 ms) or a cycle of an integral multiple thereof. Thereby, the vibration of the holding objects 633 and 633a and the blinking of the fourth symbol can be associated with each other.

Further, as described above, in the collective display device 50, the special figure 1 reserved indicator 54 is composed of the lamps D11 and D12, and the special figure 2 reserved indicator 55 is composed of the lamps D13 and D14.

When the number of holdings is 1, the lamp D11 or the lamp D12 is turned on, the lamp D11 and the lamp D12 are turned on when the number of holdings is 2, and the lamp D11 or the lamp D11 when the number of holdings is 3 The lamp D12 blinks and the remaining lamps light up. When the number of holdings is 4, the lamps D11 and D12 blink.

Similarly, in the special figure 2 hold indicator 55, the lamp D13 or the lamp D14 is turned on when the hold number is 1, the lamp D13 and the lamp D14 are turned on when the hold number is 2, and the hold number is 3. The lamp D13 or the lamp D14 blinks and the remaining lamps light up. When the number of holdings is 4, the lamp D13 and the lamp D14 blink.

The game control device 100 controls the special figure 1 hold indicator 54 and the special figure 2 hold indicator 55, but blinks the lamps D11-D14 at intervals of 128 ms (128 ms on, 128 ms off: cycle 256 ms). .. Therefore, it is also preferable to set the swinging period P3 of the holding objects 633 and 633a to a period close to the blinking interval of the lamps D11 to D14 of 128 ms, for example, a period of 4 frames (133 ms) or an integral multiple thereof. Thereby, the vibration of the holding objects 633 and 633a and the blinking of the lamps D11 to D14 can be associated with each other.

[Production display editing process]
FIG. 36 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the effect display edit processing relating to the large symbol objects 610A, 610B, 610C, the small symbol object 615, the holding objects 633, 633a, and the like. Rendering control device 300 (main control microcomputer 311, VDP312), in the main process (FIG. 23), one frame image data including large symbol objects 610A, 610B, 610C, small symbol object 615, reserved objects 633, 633a. It is created for each (B0017) and displayed on the display device 41 (B0020). Accordingly, in the variable display game, the large symbol objects 610A, 610B, 610C, the small symbol object 615, and the hold objects 633, 633a can be variably displayed (displayed by a moving image) in one frame unit (33.3 ms unit).

In Step B2501, the effect control device 300 generates a symbol layer. Here, the production control device 300 allocates the large symbol objects 610A, 610B, 610C and the small symbol object 615 to the symbol layers in the order of use (see FIGS. 35, 40, 44 and 47) for each frame. Note that the large symbol objects 610A, 610B, 610C and the small symbol object 615 can be selected independently, and a symbol layer is created by superimposing these as layers. It should be noted that each layer has common plane coordinates to be displayed on the display device 41, and information on the form (including identification information) of each object and position information on the plane coordinates of each object (displacement from the plane coordinate origin). Information).

In Step B2502, the effect control device 300 generates an information display layer. In the information display layer, the reserved objects 633 and 633a are allocated to the information display layer in the order of use (see FIGS. 35, 40, 44, and 47) for each frame, and the special figure 1 reserved number display portion 650 and the special figure are displayed. The information to be recognized by the player, such as the two-holding number display unit 660, the right-handed display and the left-handed display, is also appropriately allocated. Note that the right-handed display and the left-handed display indicate to the player the launch mode (right-handed or left-handed).

In Step B2503, the effect control device 300 generates a background layer. The background layer is a layer in which a background displayed on the entire screen of the display device 41 is drawn.

In addition, in step B2504, effect control device 300 generates an effect frame layer in which a predetermined effect image (effect image or the like) is drawn.

In step B2505, the effect control device 300 generates image data by superimposing the background layer, the symbol layer, the information display layer, and the effect frame layer in this order, and sets the image data in the display frame buffer. As described above, the main process (FIG. 23) is looped every 1/30 second. Therefore, the effect control device 300 can generate the image data (frame) updated every 1/30 second and display the image data on the display device 41.

[Rotation mode of large pattern object]
FIG. 37 is a diagram showing a variation mode during high-speed variation display of the large symbol object 610C (middle symbol). As described above, FIG. 37(a) has a variation mode in which the identification information is switched every time the large symbol object 610C (middle symbol) is rotated by 180 degrees. In FIG. 37(a), the large symbol object 610C changes the shape of the symbol in a mode of rotating by 60 degrees when switching one frame, and can rotate by 180 degrees by switching three frames. The VDP 312 may generate data of an object (60 degrees, 120 degrees, etc.) inclined from the data of the reference object (0 degrees or 180 degrees) stored in the image ROM 325 by image processing, or may generate the reference object ( All data of 0 degrees or 180 degrees) and tilted objects (60 degrees, 120 degrees, etc.) may be stored in the image ROM 325 in advance.

In addition, a figure in which the identification information “7” is viewed obliquely is displayed in the large design object 610C in which the front surface (or the back surface) on which the identification information is displayed is rotated by 60 degrees from the front view. The graphic may be omitted. Further, in the large symbol object 610C in a mode in which the front surface (or the back surface) is rotated by 120 degrees from the posture in a front view, the outer shape of the identification information “7” is horizontally flipped and a figure in a diagonal view is displayed. However, the figure may be omitted.

Here, the large pattern object 610C has identification information (for example, "7") written on the front surface or the back surface of a rectangular plate-shaped main body, but the main body itself is transparent except for the frame of the main body. (The same applies to the cases shown in FIGS. 37B and 37C described later).

FIG. 37(b) has a variation mode in which the identification information is switched every time the large symbol object 610C (middle symbol) is rotated by 360 degrees. In FIG. 37(b), the large symbol object 610C changes the shape of the symbol in a mode of rotating by 120 degrees when switching one frame, and can rotate by 360 degrees by switching three frames.

Also, in the large symbol object 610C in which the front surface (or the back surface) on which the identification information is displayed is viewed from the front is rotated 120 degrees, the outline of the identification information “7” is horizontally flipped and the figure is viewed obliquely. Is displayed, the figure may be omitted. Further, in the large design object 610C in a mode in which the front surface (or the back surface) is rotated by 240 degrees from the posture in a front view, the outer shape of the identification information “7” is horizontally flipped and a figure in a mode viewed obliquely is displayed. However, the figure may be omitted.

FIG. 37(c) has a variation mode in which the identification information is switched every time the large symbol object 610C (middle symbol) is rotated by 180 degrees. In FIG. 37(c), the large symbol object 610C changes the shape of the symbol in a mode of rotating by 60 degrees when switching one frame, and can rotate by 180 degrees by switching three frames.

In addition, a figure of a mode in which the identification information “7” is viewed obliquely is displayed in the large pattern object 610C in a mode in which the front surface (or the back surface) is rotated by 60 degrees from the front view, and the front surface (or the back surface) is viewed from the front. In the large symbol object 610C in which the axis is rotated by 120 degrees from the posture, the figure of the mode in which the switched identification information “8” is viewed obliquely is displayed.

[First modification of high-speed variable display]
FIG. 38 is a screen transition diagram (first stage) showing a variation mode or a variation mode (first modified example) of the large symbol objects 610A, 610B, 610C, the small symbol object 615, and the hold objects 633, 633a during high-speed variable display. .. FIG. 39 is a screen transition diagram (second stage) showing a variation mode or a variation mode (first modified example) of the large symbol objects 610A, 610B, 610C, the small symbol object 615, and the hold objects 633, 633a during high-speed variable display. .. FIG. 40 is a table showing the relationship between the large pattern objects 610A, 610B, 610C, the small pattern object 615, and the hold objects 633, 633a in the high-speed variable display, and the variation mode or variation mode (first modification) and the frame. ..

As a first modified example of the high-speed variable display, the production control device 300 (display control means) is arranged in the vertical direction in the order in which the identification information (first identification information) of the large symbol objects 610A and 610B (first large symbol object) is switched. A plurality of them are displayed side by side along a straight line route (specific route), and a plurality of first large symbol objects 610A and 610B are displayed in the same period for displaying the same large first symbol objects 610A and 610B. The first large pattern objects 610A and 610B are vertically scrolled (scrolled).

For example, as shown in (b1) of FIG. 38, the large symbol object 610A is a large symbol object 610A (A1) having identification information of “3” in order from the top, and a large symbol object having identification information of “2”. 610A (A2), a large pattern object 610A (A3) provided with identification information of "1", forms an object row. Similarly, the large symbol object 610B includes a large symbol object 610B (B1) having identification information of "5", a large symbol object 610B (B2) having identification information of "4", and "3" in order from the top. A large pattern object 610B (B3) having identification information is formed to form an object row.

The large symbol objects 610A (A1, A2, A3) and the large symbol objects 610B (B1, B2, B3) are the same as the large symbol objects 610A (A1, A2, A3) by making the same identification information display periods. And the vertical scroll of the large symbol object 610B (B1, B2, B3) can be displayed. For example, considering the case where the identification information is switched once, in the large design object 610A (A3), the identification information before the switching disappears, and the identification information displayed by the large design object 610A (A2) before the switching is displayed. It Further, in the large symbol object 610A (A2), the identification information before switching disappears, and the identification information displayed by the large symbol object 610A (A1) before switching is displayed. In the large symbol object 610A (A1), the identification information before switching is replaced with the identification information after switching.

Similarly, in the large symbol object 610B (B3), the identification information before switching disappears, and the identification information displayed by the large symbol object 610B (B2) before switching is displayed. Further, in the large symbol object 610B (B2), the identification information before switching disappears, and the identification information displayed by the large symbol object 610B (B1) before switching is displayed. In the large symbol object 610B (B1), the identification information before switching is replaced with the identification information after switching.

Therefore, every time the switching is repeated, the same identification information is scrolled from top to bottom, in order from the identification numbers appearing in the large symbol object 610A (A1) and the large symbol object 610B (B1). It should be noted that the identification information is displayed in a cycle of 1 to 9 by scrolling from the top to the bottom, and is displayed in a cycle of 1 to 9 again.

Note that the large symbol objects 610A (A1, A2, A3) and the large symbol objects 610B (B1, B2, B3) have identification information displayed on a rectangular plate-shaped body, but the scrolling is performed. Although the scroll of the identification information can be recognized, it may be difficult to recognize the scroll of the main body.

Therefore, although omitted in the figure, in the large symbol object 610A (A1, A2, A3) and the large symbol object 610B (B1, B2, B3), the main body is also associated with the identification information by associating the main body color with the identification information. It can be recognized as scrolling. For example, as (identification information, color information), (1, red), (2, green), (3, blue), (4, red), (5, green), (6, blue), (7, red) ), (8, green), (9, blue), it is possible to recognize that the main body having the same identification information is scrolling from top to bottom. In particular, according to the above-mentioned association, the same color does not appear in two or more places in the object row at the same time, so that it is possible to easily recognize that the main body having the same identification information is scrolling from top to bottom. Further, as different patterns, (1, green), (2, blue), (3, red), (4, blue), (5, green), (6, blue), (7, red), (8 , Blue) and (9, green). That is, the large symbol object 610A (A1) and the large symbol object 610A (A2) have different color arrangements, and the large symbol object 610A (A2) and the large symbol object 610A (A3) have different color arrangements. Similarly, the large symbol object 610B (B1) and the large symbol object 610B (B2) have different color arrangements, and the large symbol object 610B (B2) and the large symbol object 610B (B3) have different color arrangements. The colors (1, green) and (9, green) are the same, but different color arrangements may be used for at least one cycle of the plurality of pieces of identification information 1 to 9, and conversely, the identification information 1 is dared to correspond. The first large symbol object and the last large symbol object corresponding to the identification information 9 may be colored in the same color to facilitate the recognition of the round.

Therefore, a plurality of large symbol objects 610A (A1, A2, A3) and large symbol objects 610B (B1, B2, B3) are arranged along the specific route (vertical direction) in the order in which the one round of identification information is switched, and the identification information is set. It is preferable to display the colors associated with the large pattern objects 610A and 610B adjacent to each other along the specific route so as to have different color arrangements. That is, the identification information and the color information are associated so that the same color is not continuously displayed in the scroll. Thereby, the player can easily recognize that not only the identification information but also the object bodies of the large symbol objects 610A (A1, A2, A3) and the large symbol objects 610B (B1, B2, B3) are scrolling. it can.

This will be described according to (b1) to (b11) shown in FIGS. 38 and 39. Since the transition modes of the hold objects 633 and 633a and the small symbol object 615 are the same as the transition modes shown in FIGS. 33 and 34, the description thereof will be omitted.

In the frame 101 shown in (b1) of FIG. 38, the large symbol object 610A is arranged in an object sequence in which identification information of “3” (A1), “2” (A2), and “1” (A3) are arranged in order from the top. The large symbol object 610B is an object string in which identification information of "5" (B1), "4" (B2), and "3" (B3) are arranged in order from the top. The object row of the large symbol object 610A and the object row of the large symbol object 610B may be different identification information rows as shown in the figure, or may be the same identification information row. Further, the large symbol object 610C is displayed in a state where the identification information “7” is viewed from the front.

In the frame 102 shown in (b2) of FIG. 38, the object row of the large symbol object 610A and the object row of the large symbol object 610B maintain the identification information displayed in the frame 101, respectively. Further, the large symbol object 610C is displayed in a state in which the object body is rotated by 60 degrees about the axis, and the figure in a state in which the identification information “7” is viewed obliquely is displayed.

In the frame 103 shown in (b3) of FIG. 38, the object row of the large symbol object 610A and the object row of the large symbol object 610B maintain the identification information displayed in the frames 101 and 102, respectively. Further, the large symbol object 610C is displayed in a state in which the object main body is rotated by 120 degrees, and the outline of the identification information “7” is horizontally flipped and a figure in a perspective view is displayed.

In the frame 104 shown in (b4) of FIG. 38, the large symbol object 610A is arranged in an object sequence in which identification information of “4” (A1), “3” (A2), and “2” (A3) are arranged in order from the top. The large symbol object 610B is switched to an object string in which identification information of "6" (B1), "5" (B2), and "4" (B3) are arranged in order from the top. Further, the large symbol object 610C is displayed in a state in which the identification information is switched to “8” and is viewed from the front.

In the frame 105 shown in (b5) of FIG. 38, the object row of the large symbol object 610A and the object row of the large symbol object 610B maintain the identification information displayed in the frame 104, respectively. Further, the large symbol object 610C is displayed in a state in which the object body is rotated by 60 degrees about the axis, and displays a figure in a state in which the identification information “8” is viewed obliquely.

In the frame 106 shown in (b6) of FIG. 38, the object column of the large symbol object 610A and the object column of the large symbol object 610B maintain the identification information displayed in the frames 104 and 105, respectively. Further, the large symbol object 610C is displayed in a state in which the object main body is rotated by 120 degrees, and the outline of the identification information “8” is horizontally flipped and a figure in a perspective view is displayed.

In the frame 107 shown in (b7) of FIG. 38, the large symbol object 610A is an object string in which identification information of “5” (A1), “4” (A2), and “3” (A3) are arranged in order from the top. The large symbol object 610B is switched to an object string in which identification information items “7” (B1), “6” (B2), and “5” (B3) are arranged in order from the top. Further, the large symbol object 610C is displayed in a state in which the identification information is switched to "9" and is viewed from the front.

In the frame 108 shown in (b8) of FIG. 38, the object row of the large symbol object 610A and the object row of the large symbol object 610B maintain the identification information displayed in the frame 107, respectively. Further, the large symbol object 610C is displayed in a state in which the object body is rotated by 60 degrees about the axis, and displays a figure in a state in which the identification information “9” is viewed obliquely.

In the frame 113 shown in (b9) of FIG. 39, the large symbol object 610A is an object string in which identification information of “7” (A1), “6” (A2), and “5” (A3) are arranged in order from the top. The large pattern object 610B is switched to an object sequence in which identification information of "9" (B1), "8" (B2), and "7" (B3) are arranged in order from the top. Further, the large symbol object 610C is displayed in a state in which the identification information is switched to “2” and is viewed from the front.

In the frame 119 shown in (b10) of FIG. 39, the large symbol object 610A is arranged in an object sequence in which identification information of “9” (A1), “8” (A2), and “7” (A3) are arranged in order from the top. The large symbol object 610B is switched to an object string in which identification information of "2" (B1), "1" (B2), and "9" (B3) are arranged in order from the top. Further, the large symbol object 610C is displayed in a state in which the identification information is switched to “4” and is viewed from the front.

In the frame 125 shown in (b11) of FIG. 39, the large symbol object 610A is arranged in an object sequence in which identification information of “2” (A1), “1” (A2), and “9” (A3) are arranged in order from the top. The large symbol object 610B is switched to an object string in which identification information of "4" (B1), "3" (B2), and "2" (B3) are arranged in order from the top. Further, the large symbol object 610C is displayed in a state in which the identification information is switched to “6” and is viewed from the front.

FIG. 40 is a table summarizing the contents shown in the transition diagrams of FIGS. 38 and 39. As shown in FIG. 40, the large symbol object 610A (FIG. 40: left (A1, A2, A3)) and the large symbol object 610B (FIG. 40: right (B1, B2, B3)) have the same identification in three frames. We keep the information. Further, in the large symbol object 610C (FIG. 40: middle), the same identification information is maintained in one frame, but by displaying a figure in a mode in which the identification information is rotated using two frames. There is. Therefore, in the large symbol object 610A, the large symbol object 610B, and the large symbol object 610C, the period until the identification information is switched is the same. As described above, the identification information of the small symbol object 615 is switched frame by frame.

The hold objects 633 and 633a illustrated in FIGS. 38 and 39 transit according to “Hold A” in FIG. 40, the period for displaying the same form is 6 frames (200 ms), and the cycle in which the form changes is 24 frames. (800 ms). By the way, the effect control device 300 performs the look-ahead effect (holding change notice, etc.) on the hold display (holding objects 633, 633a) as described above (FIG. 28: B1712), and becomes more prominent as the expectation of a big hit increases. By changing the mode (here, color), an effect that suggests the degree of expectation is performed.

For example, “Hold A” in FIG. 40 is a look-ahead notice effect when the degree of expectation is “Small”, and the colors of the hold objects 633, 633a are also displayed in white, for example. "Hold B" in FIG. 40 is a look-ahead notice effect when the degree of expectation is "medium," and is displayed in blue, for example. In the case of "hold B", the period for displaying the same form is 4 frames (133 ms), and the period in which the form changes is 16 frames (533 ms). "Holding C" in FIG. 40 is, for example, a look-ahead notice effect when the degree of expectation is "high", and is displayed in red, for example. Then, in the case of "holding C", the period for displaying the same form is 2 frames (67 ms), and the period for changing the form is 8 frames (267 ms). Of course, the hold objects 633 and 633a may be changed in shape every time one frame is switched. As described above, when the shape is repeatedly changed to “large”, “medium”, “small”, “medium”, and “large”, the cycle is changed. Is 4 frames (133 ms).

As described above, when the “holding A”, “holding B”, and “holding C” are used to represent the expectation degree of the big hit, they can be used separately according to the expectation degree of each holding object 633, 633a. it can.

Further, any one of the form changes (shape changes) of “holding A”, “holding B”, and “holding C” may be applied to all the holding objects 633, 633a. For example, during reach, During the probability change state and during the generation of the pseudo continuous effect, "holding B" or "holding C" is applied to all the holding objects 633, 633a, and when these are completed, "holding" is performed for all the holding objects 633, 633a. “A” may be applied. It should be noted that the pseudo continuous effect is an effect in which a pseudo variation in which the identification information is varied and temporarily stopped is performed a predetermined number of times in one variation display game.

In addition, when there is a pseudo change three times in the pseudo continuous effect, the form change of “holding A” is applied to all the hold objects 633 and 633a in the first pseudo change, and all the change is performed in the second pseudo change. It is also possible to apply the morphological change of "Holding B" to the pending objects 633, 633a, and apply the morphological change of "Holding C" to all the pending objects 633, 633a in the third pseudo variation. As described above, it is also preferable to appropriately change the cycle in which the form of the hold objects 633, 633a changes according to the game state.

FIG. 41 is a diagram showing a change mode (change mode) of the hold objects 633, 633a, where (a) shows a large change (change) amplitude and (b) shows a medium change (change) amplitude. In some cases, (c) shows the case where the amplitude of change (fluctuation) is small. In the present embodiment, the pending objects 633, 633a are displayed so that the width changes (changes or deforms) in one direction (width direction, lateral direction), but the entire objects are displayed toward the center (in the radial direction). It may be displayed so as to contract and expand.

As described above, the hold objects 633 and 633a can change the cycle in which the form changes. However, when the cycle has a long cycle and the cycle has a short cycle, the same amplitude of change may give an unnatural impression. is there. Therefore, in the case of “holding A”, a large amplitude is applied as shown in (a), and in the case of “holding B”, a smaller amplitude is applied as shown in (b) and “holding A” is applied. In the case of "C", it is preferable to apply a smaller amplitude than that of (b) as shown in (c) so that the periodical changes of the holding objects 633, 633a are more natural.

[Variable display mode of low-speed variable display at the start of game]
FIG. 42 is a screen transition diagram (first stage) showing the variation mode or variation mode of the large symbol objects 610A, 610B, 610C, the small symbol object 615, and the hold objects 633, 633a at the start of the variable display game. FIG. 43 is a screen transition diagram (second stage) showing a variation mode or a variation mode of the large symbol objects 610A, 610B, 610C, the small symbol object 615, and the hold objects 633, 633a at the start of the variable display game. FIG. 44 is a table showing the relationship between the large pattern objects 610A, 610B, 610C, the small pattern object 615, the hold objects 633, 633a at the start of the variable display game, and the frames, and the variation mode or change mode.

Here, the variation mode or variation mode of the large symbol objects 610A, 610B, 610C, the small symbol object 615, and the hold objects 633, 633a at the start of the variable display game will be described.

The variable display game is started when the hold object 633a is displayed in the hold exhausting area 640.

When the variable display game is started, the small symbol object 615 switches the identification information each time one frame is switched as in the case of the high speed fluctuation. The hold objects 633 and 633a are switched in form every 6 frames (4 frames, 2 frames, or 1 frame may be selected) regardless of execution of the variable display game.

On the other hand, the large symbol objects 610A, 610B, and 610C perform a preliminary operation, and then shift to low speed fluctuation (low speed fluctuation 1). In the preliminary operation, the large symbol object 610C has not yet rotated, and the large symbol objects 610A, 610B, and 610C simultaneously move in the opposite direction of the scroll direction, that is, move upward, and then start vertical scrolling. When the 610C returns to the initial position, it stays in its place and starts rotation fluctuation. Also, during the preliminary movement, the large symbol objects 610A, 610B, 610C are displayed larger than normal (for example, during low speed variation, medium speed variation, high speed variation), and return to the original size when the preliminary movement ends. It is like this. Further, during the preliminary operation, the periods during which the large symbol objects 610A, 610B, 610C display the identification information are the same.

In frame 1 shown in (c1) of FIG. 42, each holding object 633 is moved to the right by the holding shift and the holding object 633a is displayed in the holding exhaustion area 640, and the large symbol objects 610A, 610B, 610C are displayed in the variable display area 610. Is displayed at the center in the height direction (initial position).

Here, the large symbol object 610A displays the identification information “2”, the large symbol object 610B displays the identification information “4”, and the large symbol object 610C displays the identification information “7”, but each is arbitrary. Identification information may be displayed. Similarly to the above, two hold objects 633 are displayed on the hold display unit 630a, the number of hold "2" is displayed on the special figure 1 hold number display unit 650, and the special figure 2 hold number display unit 660 is displayed. Indicates that the number of holdings “0” is displayed.

The form of the hold object 633a is assumed to switch from the shape "medium" to the shape "large" at the same time when the variable display game starts, but the timing of starting the variable display game and the timing of switching the form of the hold objects 633, 633a are the same. It doesn't have to be. Further, the small symbol object 615 displays the identification information “seven”.

In the frame 7 shown in (c2) of FIG. 42, the large symbol objects 610A, 610B, and 610C have a height position in the middle of the preliminary operation from the initial position (for example, 300 pixels or 240 pixels in a pixel unit (pixel) of the display device 41). ) Has moved to. At this time, the large symbol objects 610A, 610B, and 610C can be displayed in a manner of moving in steps (for example, 50 pixels or 40 pixels) at a predetermined interval for each frame (the same applies hereinafter), but every 2 frames, 3 You may make it move for every frame. The forms of the hold objects 633 and 633a are switched from the shape "large" to the shape "medium". Further, the small symbol object 615 displays the identification information “four”.

In the frame 12 shown in (c3) of FIG. 42, the large symbol objects 610A, 610B, and 610C have moved to the highest position in the preliminary movement (for example, a position that is 550 pixels or 440 pixels higher than the initial position). The hold objects 633 and 633a maintain the form (shape "medium"). In addition, the small symbol object 615 displays the identification information “9”.

In the frame 13 shown in (c4) of FIG. 42, the large symbol objects 610A, 610B, and 610C are moved one position (for example, 50 pixels or 40 pixels) lower from the highest position in the preliminary movement. The form of the hold objects 633, 633a is switched from the shape "medium" to the shape "small". Further, the small symbol object 615 displays the identification information “1”.

In the frame 19 shown in (c5) of FIG. 42, the large symbol objects 610A, 610B, and 610C are moved from the highest position in the preliminary movement to a position lower by 7 stages (for example, 350 pixels or 280 pixels). The form of the hold objects 633, 633a is switched from the shape "small" to the shape "medium". Further, the small symbol object 615 displays the identification information “seven”.

In the frame 23 shown in (c6) of FIG. 42, the large symbol objects 610A, 610B, and 610C have moved to the initial positions, respectively, whereby the preliminary operation ends. After that, the large symbol object 610C stops moving in the vertical direction from this frame 23 and starts low-speed fluctuation display due to rotation fluctuation. Further, the large symbol objects 610A and 610B continue to move vertically, and start low-speed variable display by vertical scrolling. Further, the large pattern objects 610A, 610B, 610C are returned to the normal size. The hold objects 633 and 633a maintain the form (shape "medium"). In addition, the small symbol object 615 displays identification information “two”.

In the frame 25 shown in (c7) of FIG. 42, the large symbol objects 610A and 610B are respectively moved from the initial position to a position two steps lower. The large symbol object 610C is displayed in a mode in which the identification information "7" is rotated by a predetermined angle (for example, 60 degrees) from the posture in which the identification information "7" is viewed from the front, and a graphic in a mode in which the identification information "7" is viewed obliquely is displayed. ing. The form of the hold objects 633, 633a is switched from the shape "medium" to the shape "large". Further, the small symbol object 615 displays the identification information “four”.

Here, the large symbol object 610C has a display mode in which the frame is rotated by 30 degrees per frame (FIG. 44: rotation 1), and the identification information is rotated by 360 degrees from the posture in which the identification information is viewed from the front. Shall be switched. Further, the large symbol object 610C displayed in (c7) represents a figure in which the identification information is rotated by less than 180 axes from the posture in which the identification information is viewed from the front, and is displayed in (c8) described later. The symbol object 610C represents a figure in a mode in which the identification information is rotated by 180 degrees or more and less than 360 degrees from the posture in which the identification information is viewed from the front.

In the frame 31 shown in (c8) of FIG. 42, the large symbol objects 610A and 610B are respectively moved from the initial position to a position 8 steps lower. The large symbol object 610C is displayed in a state in which the identification information “7” is rotated by 240 degrees from the posture in which the identification information “7” is viewed from the front, and the outer shape of the identification information “7” is horizontally flipped and a figure in a perspective view is displayed. doing. The form of the hold objects 633, 633a is switched from the shape "large" to the shape "medium". Further, the small symbol object 615 displays the identification information “1”.

In the frame 35 shown in (c9) of FIG. 43, the large symbol objects 610A and 610B are displayed at the top. Then, the identification information of the large symbol object 610A is switched from "2" to "3", and the identification information of the large symbol object 610B is switched from "4" to "5". After that, the large symbol objects 610A and 610B move by two stages each time one frame is switched. The large symbol object 610C is displayed in a state where the identification information is switched to "8" and "8" is viewed from the front. The hold objects 633 and 633a maintain the form (shape "medium"). Further, the small symbol object 615 displays the identification information “five”.

In the frame 37 shown in (c10) of FIG. 43, the large symbol objects 610A and 610B are displayed at positions which are lowered by four steps from the top row. The large symbol object 610C is displayed in a mode in which the identification information "8" is rotated by a predetermined angle (for example, 60 degrees) from the posture in which the identification information "8" is viewed from the front, and a graphic in a mode in which the identification information "8" is viewed obliquely is displayed. ing. The form of the hold objects 633, 633a is switched from the shape "medium" to the shape "small". Further, the small symbol object 615 displays the identification information “seven”.

In the frame 43 shown in (c11) of FIG. 43, the large symbol objects 610A and 610B are respectively moved from the initial position to a position five steps lower. The large symbol object 610C is displayed in a mode in which the identification information “8” is rotated by 240 degrees from the posture in which the identification information “8” is viewed from the front, and the outer shape of the identification information “8” is horizontally flipped and a figure in a mode viewed obliquely is displayed. doing. The form of the hold objects 633, 633a is switched from the shape "small" to the shape "medium". Further, the small symbol object 615 displays the identification information “four”.

In the frame 47 shown in (c12) of FIG. 43, the large symbol objects 610A and 610B are displayed at the top. Then, the identification information of the large symbol object 610A is switched from "3" to "4", and the identification information of the large symbol object 610B is switched from "5" to "6". The large symbol object 610C is displayed in a state where "9" is viewed from the front while the identification information is switched to "9" by rotating 360 axes from the posture of the frame 35. The hold objects 633 and 633a maintain the form (shape "medium"). Further, the small symbol object 615 displays identification information “eight”.

Thereafter, in the variable display game, the variable display shifts in the order of medium speed fluctuation, high speed fluctuation, medium speed fluctuation, and low speed fluctuation (low speed fluctuation 2) (described later). Although it has been described that the small pattern object 615 is variably displayed from the time of the frame 1, the variably display may be started after the frame 23, that is, after the preparation operation is completed.

44, the number of frames in the transition diagram of FIGS. 42 and 43, the identification information and position of the large symbol objects 610A (FIG. 44: left symbol), 610B (FIG. 44: right symbol), the large symbol object 610C (FIG. 44: It is a table showing the relationship between the identification information of the middle pattern) and the position or rotation angle, the form change of the holding objects 633, 633a, and the identification information of the small pattern object 615.

Here, the “position” (the number of steps) in FIG. 44 is the position in the height direction on the display device 41, and “0” indicates the initial position (center in the height direction). Further, “−1” is a position which is raised by one step in the upward direction with respect to the initial position, and for example, one step can be applied to 50 pixels or 40 pixels using the pixel unit (pixel) of the display device 41. On the contrary, “+1” indicates a position which is lowered by one step from the initial position. Further, "rotation" is the rotation angle of the axis rotation of the large symbol object 610C, and there are four patterns of "rotation 1", "rotation 2", "rotation 3", and "rotation 4" as described later. 42 and 43, "rotation 1" is applied.

As described above, the small pattern object 615 switches the identification information every time one frame is switched. The hold objects 633 and 633a display the same form for 6 frames, and change the form periodically using 24 frames.

The large symbol objects 610A, 610B, and 610C move up one step each time the frame is switched from the initial position of the frame 1, reach the highest position in the frame 12, and then descend one step each time the frame is switched. The preliminary operation is completed by returning to the initial position in the frame 23. At this time, the large symbol object 610C has not changed its rotation yet.

After the frame 23, the low speed fluctuation (low speed fluctuation 1) is started, and the large symbol objects 610A and 610B continue to descend one step each time the frame is switched to reach the lowest position in the frame 34. On the other hand, the large symbol object 610C starts rotation fluctuation in a mode of rotating by 30 degrees every time the frame is switched, and rotates by 330 degrees in the frame 34. Here, it is preferable that the large symbol object 610C perform an overshoot operation in which the height position after the start of rotation fluctuation is not stopped at the initial position, but the initial position is passed once and then returned to the initial position. For example, as shown in FIG. 44, the frame 24-26 is lowered one step at a time, and then the frames 27-29 are raised one step at a time to return to the initial position. Thereby, the sense of object of the large symbol object 610C can be enhanced.

In the frame 35, the large symbol objects 610A and 610B are displayed at a position 11 steps higher than the initial position (uppermost step), and the identification information is switched. Further, the large symbol object 610C also rotates 360 degrees about the axis, and the identification information is switched. After that, the large symbol object 610C is rotated by 30 degrees every time the frame is switched, as in the previous time. On the other hand, the large symbol objects 610A and 610B descend two steps each time the frame is switched.

In the frame 46, the large symbol objects 610A and 610B move to a position 11 steps lower than the initial position (lowermost stage), and the large symbol object 610C rotates about 330 degrees like the previous time.

In the frame 47, the large symbol objects 610A and 610B are displayed at a position 11 stages higher than the initial position (uppermost stage), and the identification information is switched. Further, the large symbol object 610C also rotates 360 degrees about the axis, and the identification information is switched. As a result, the low speed fluctuation (low speed fluctuation 1) can be ended, and a transition can be made to a medium speed fluctuation and a high speed fluctuation.

In the medium speed fluctuation, the large symbol objects 610A and 610B perform vertical scrolling in seven stages of -11, -7, -3, 0, +3, +7, and +11 using the position of FIG. 44 as the first stage. As the second stage, vertical scrolling may be performed in five stages of -11, -6, 0, +6 and +11. Then, in high speed fluctuation, vertical scrolling may be performed in three stages of -11, 0 and +11.

Further, the large symbol object 610C, as the first stage of the medium speed variation, performs rotation variation in seven stages of 0 degree, 60 degrees, 120 degrees, 180 degrees, 240 degrees, 270 degrees, 330 degrees, and as the second stage. , 0 degrees, 72 degrees, 144 degrees, 216 degrees, and 288 degrees, the rotation fluctuations are performed in five steps, and at high speed fluctuations, the rotation fluctuations are performed in three steps of 0 degrees, 120 degrees, and 240 degrees (FIG. 37(b)). Just go.

42 and 43, the low-speed variable display is performed from frame 24 to frame 46, but the display period at this time is 23 frames (766 ms). The low-speed variable display may be from frame 24 to frame 35. In this case, the display period of the low-speed variable display is 12 frames (400 ms). Further, it is preferable that the display period of the medium speed fluctuation display (first stage) is 462 ms (14 frames) and the display period of the medium speed fluctuation display (second stage) is 333 ms (10 frames). Further, it is preferable to lengthen the display period of the high speed variable display in accordance with the variable time of the special figure variable display game. In the normal game state, for example, 60 frames (2000 ms) are performed when there is no reach.

On the other hand, in the time saving state, the preliminary operation is omitted and the low-speed fluctuation is started from the frame 23 (the large symbol object 610C does not perform the overshoot operation), and the medium-speed fluctuation is omitted from the frame 35 and thereafter. It is sufficient to move to high-speed fluctuation. Further, the display time of high-speed fluctuation may be shorter than that in the case of playing the variable display game in the normal playing state, and may be, for example, 9 frames (300 ms) when there is no reach.

By the way, at the time of low speed fluctuation, the rotation fluctuation due to "rotation 1" of the large symbol object 610C represents a state in which the large symbol object 610C is continuously rotating. However, by applying the "rotation 2", "rotation 3", and "rotation 4" in FIG. 44, the cycle of switching the identification information of the large symbol object 610C (360° axis rotation after the large symbol object 610C starts rotating and stops). Then, it is possible to stop the large symbol object 610C for a while in a state of being viewed from the front without changing the period until the next rotation starts).

When "Rotation 2" of FIG. 44 is applied, the large symbol object 610C is displayed in a mode in which after the frame 23, each time the frame is switched, a 32.7 degree axis rotation (in FIG. 44, the decimal point is rounded off and displayed). The frame 34 is rotated 360 degrees to switch the identification information, the identification information is viewed in front, and the frame 35 is also maintained in the front view. Accordingly, the large symbol object 610C can be stopped in a state where the identification information is viewed from the front for one frame (33.3 ms).

When “Rotation 3” in FIG. 44 is applied, the large symbol object 610C is displayed in a mode in which the frame 23 and subsequent frames are rotated by 36 degrees each time the frame is switched, and the frame 33 is rotated by 360 degrees and the identification information is switched. At the same time, the identification information is viewed from the front, and the frames 34 and 35 also maintain the state of being viewed from the front. Accordingly, the large symbol object 610C can be stopped in a state where the identification information is viewed from the front for only two frames (66.6 ms).

When “Rotation 4” of FIG. 44 is applied, the large symbol object 610C is displayed in a mode of rotating the frame 23 degrees after the frame 23 by 45 degrees each time the frame is switched, and the frame 31 is rotated by 360 degrees and the identification information is switched. At the same time, the identification information is viewed from the front, and the state where the identification information is viewed from the front is maintained between the frame 31 and the frame 35. As a result, the large symbol object 610C can be stopped in a state where the identification information is viewed from the front only for four frames (133 ms).

The production control device 300, with respect to the large symbol object 610C, "rotation 1" (expectation degree: small), "rotation 2" (expectation degree) according to the degree of expectation of the jackpot of the variable display game being executed or the hold object 633a. : Medium), “Rotation 3” (Expectation level: Large), and “Rotation 4” (Expectation level: Extra large) may be applied. Further, the size of the large pattern object 610C may be changed depending on the way of rotation, for example, “rotation 1” (expectation degree: small)<“rotation 2” (expectation degree: medium)<“rotation 3” (expectation degree) : Large)<"Rotation 4" (expectation: extra large). At that time, the identification information may also be displayed so as to be larger than the reference size (for example, the size when “rotation 1”) in the front-view posture.

Further, the effect control device 300 applies "rotation 1" to the large symbol object 610C, for example, in the initial state (normal game state), and during the reach, the probability change state, and the pseudo continuous effect generation, "rotation 2". , “Rotation 3” or “rotation 4” may be applied. Further, the effect control device 300, when the pseudo continuous effect occurs, for the large symbol object 610C, "rotation 1", "rotation 2", "rotation 3", "rotation 4" in order of repeating the pseudo variation. You may apply.

[Display mode of low-speed variable display at end of variable display game]
FIG. 45 is a screen transition diagram (first stage) showing the variation mode or the variation mode of the large symbol objects 610A, 610B, 610C, the small symbol object 615, and the hold objects 633, 633a at the end of the variable display game (or the freeze effect). is there. FIG. 46 is a screen transition diagram (second stage) showing the variation mode or the variation mode of the large symbol objects 610A, 610B, 610C, the small symbol object 615, and the hold object 633.633a at the end of the variable display game (or freeze effect). is there. FIG. 47 is a table showing the relationship between the frame and the variation mode or variation mode of the large symbol objects 610A, 610B, 610C, the small symbol object 615, and the hold objects 633, 633a at the end of the variable display game (or freeze effect). Is.

Here, a variation mode or a variation mode of the large symbol objects 610A, 610B, 610C, the small symbol object 615, and the hold objects 633, 633a before the end of the variable display game will be described.

The low-speed variation (low-speed variation 2) at the end of the variable display game is performed after a high-speed variation and a medium-speed variation (in the order of the second stage and the first stage). In the low-speed fluctuation, the rotation fluctuation ends in a state where the large symbol object 610C has the identification information viewed from the front, and the large symbol objects 610A, 610B, 610C perform a so-called shaking fluctuation (temporary stop display) that moves up and down in the scroll direction.

When the identification information is switched, the large symbol objects 610A and 610B are displayed at the uppermost position (-11) as described above, and at this time, the large symbol object 610C is also displayed with the identification information viewed from the front. However, the variable display of the large symbol objects 610A and 610B may be temporarily stopped until the large symbol objects 610A and 610B scroll downward and reach the same height as the large symbol object 610C.

The hold objects 633 and 633a are, unlike the above, circular flat-plate characters, and have the same display form as the large symbol object 610C while maintaining the same shape regardless of the execution of the variable display game. Shall be provided. The small symbol object 615 switches the identification information each time the frame is switched until the variable display ends. Further, the special figure 1 reserved number display section 650 and the special figure 2 reserved number display section 660 respectively display a number "2" indicating the special figure 1 reserved number and a number "0" indicating the special figure 2 reserved number. ing.

In the frame 301 shown in (d1) of FIG. 45, the large symbol object 610A and the large symbol object 610B display the same identification information “3” and the same height as the large symbol object 610C (FIG. 47: position “0” (FIG. 44, the same height position as the position “0”))). The large symbol object 610C is also displayed in a state where the identification information "3" is viewed from the front. Each of the hold objects 633 and 633a is displayed in a state where the character is viewed from the front. The small symbol object 615 displays, for example, identification information “1”.

In the frame 307 shown in (d2) of FIG. 45, the large symbol objects 610A, 610B, and 610C display the same identification information “3” and descend one step each time the frame 301 is switched (eg, 25 per step). Pixel, or 20 pixels), to the lowest stage (Fig. 47: position "+6") in the shake fluctuation.

The holding objects 633 and 633a are rotated by 15 degrees (FIG. 47: rotation 1) every time one frame is switched from the case of the frame 301, so that the reserved objects 633 and 633a are rotated by 90 degrees, and the characters are displayed in a manner of viewing the character from the end face direction. Here, the rotation direction may be such that the left side of the rotation axis faces the back and the right side of the rotation axis faces the front, or may rotate in the opposite direction. The small pattern object 615 displays the identification information “seven”.

In the frame 313 shown in (d3) of FIG. 45, the large symbol objects 610A, 610B, and 610C are moved up one step each time the frame 307 is switched while displaying the same identification information "3", and the swing fluctuation is started. It has moved to the initial position (FIG. 47: position “0”). The hold objects 633 and 633a are rotated by 90 degrees by rotating the frame 307 by 15 degrees (FIG. 47: rotation 1) each time the frame is switched to the frame 307. Is viewed from the back). The small symbol object 615 displays the identification information “four”.

In the frame 319 shown in (d4) of FIG. 45, the large symbol objects 610A, 610B, and 610C display the same identification information “3” and rise one step each time the frame 313 switches, and become the highest in the fluctuation fluctuation. It has moved to the position (FIG. 47: position “−6”). The holding objects 633 and 633a are rotated by 15 degrees (FIG. 47: FIG. 1) every time the frame 319 is switched by one frame, and thereby the axes are rotated by 90 degrees. There is. The small symbol object 615 displays the identification information "1".

In the frame 325 shown in (d5) of FIG. 45, the large symbol objects 610A, 610B, and 610C display the same identification information “3” and descend one step each time the frame 325 is switched, and the initial position of the fluctuation ( Figure 47: Moving to position "0"). The reserved objects 633 and 633a are further rotated by 15 degrees (FIG. 47: rotation 1) every time one frame is switched from the case of the frame 319, thereby rotating by 90 degrees. As a result, the large symbol object 610C is rotated 360 degrees from the posture of the frame 301, and is displayed in a state in which the character is viewed from the front as in (d1). The small pattern object 615 displays the identification information “seven”.

In the frame 331 shown in (d6) of FIG. 45, the large symbol objects 610A, 610B, and 610C are lowered by one step each time the frame 325 is switched by one frame while displaying the same identification information "3", and the lowest step in the swing fluctuation. (FIG. 47: Position “+6”). The reserved objects 633 and 633a are rotated by 90 degrees by rotating the frame by 15 degrees (FIG. 47: rotation 1) every time the frame 301 is switched by one frame, and are displayed in a mode in which the character is viewed from the end face direction. .. The small symbol object 615 displays the identification information “four”.

In the frame 337 shown in (d7) of FIG. 45, the large symbol objects 610A, 610B, and 610C are moved up one step each time the frame 331 is switched while displaying the same identification information "3", and the swing fluctuation is started. It has moved to the initial position (FIG. 47: position “0”). The hold objects 633 and 633a are rotated by 90 degrees by rotating the frame 331 by 15 degrees (FIG. 47: rotation 1) every time the frame is switched to the frame 331, and the character is horizontally flipped from (d5). Is viewed from the back). The small symbol object 615 displays the identification information "1".

In the frame 343 shown in (d8) of FIG. 45, the large symbol objects 610A, 610B, 610C are raised by one step every time the frame 337 is switched by one frame while displaying the same identification information "3", and become the highest in shake fluctuation. It has moved to the position (FIG. 47: position “−6”). The hold objects 633 and 633a are rotated by 90 degrees by rotating the frame 319 by another 15 degrees (FIG. 47: rotation 1) every time the frame is switched to the frame 319, and the characters are displayed as viewed from the end face direction. There is. The small pattern object 615 displays the identification information “seven”.

In the frame 349 shown in (d9) of FIG. 46, the large symbol objects 610A, 610B, 610C are lowered by one step each time the frame 325 is switched while displaying the same identification information "3", and the initial position of the shake fluctuation ( Figure 47: Moving to position "0") ends the swing fluctuation. The reserved objects 633 and 633a are rotated by 90 degrees by rotating the frame 343 by 15 degrees (FIG. 47: rotation 1) every time one frame is switched. As a result, the large symbol object 610A is rotated 360 degrees from the posture of the frame 325, and is displayed in a state where the character is viewed from the front. Further, at this time, when the variable display game ends, the hold object 633a disappears. The small symbol object 615 displays the identification information “four”, and when the fluctuation of the swing stops, the variable display of the small symbol object 615 also ends. Then, for example, from the frame 349 to the frame 354, the contents of the frame 349 are maintained, and then a big hit fanfare effect (FIG. 32: B2102) is performed.

In (d10) of FIG. 46, the character information of the identification information "333" at the time of the big hit and "Congratulations on the big hit" is displayed. When (d1) to (d9) of FIG. 46 is the freeze effect, thereafter, the scroll object or the rotation object does not disappear, the scroll variation or the rotation variation restarts, or the pending object 633a disappears and the next object is displayed. Shift to floating display game. In the temporary stop display period (swing variation display period), the large symbol objects 610A, 610B, and 610C display the same identification period, respectively.

47, the frame number in the screen transition diagram of FIG. 45 and FIG. 46, the position of the large symbol objects 610A, 610B, 610C (FIG. 47: large symbol), the rotation angle of the axis rotation of the holding objects 633, 633a, the small symbol object It is a table showing the relationship of the identification information 615.

46 and 47, the description is omitted in the temporary stop display period (sway fluctuation display period) and the stop symbol display period (previous stop display time), but the effect control device 300, the preliminary operation display shown in FIG. 42. As described above, the size of the large symbol objects 610A, 610B, and 610C may be displayed so as to be larger than the size in the high-speed variable display period. As a result, the degree of attention to the temporary stop display period (sway fluctuation display period) and the stop symbol display period (stop display time) can be increased, and the high speed variable display shifts to the stop symbol display period (including the temporary stop display period). The variable display mode of the large symbol objects 610A, 610B, 610C can be easily recognized.

As shown in FIG. 47, the large symbol objects 610A, 610B, and 610C start shaking fluctuation from the frame 301 and make one round trip at the frame 325. Therefore, the swing cycle of the large symbol objects 610A, 610B, 610C is 24 frames. Further, the hold objects 633 and 633a (which are rotated by "rotation 1") are also rotated 360 degrees in the frame 325 with respect to the frame 301. Therefore, the rotation cycle of the hold objects 633 and 633a is 24 frames (800 ms). The small pattern object 615 (FIG. 47: small pattern) has its identification information switched every time one frame is switched, but when the variable display of the large symbol objects 610A, 610B, 610C is stopped in the frame 349, the variable display of the small symbol object 615 is also changed. finish.

Further, other rotation modes can be applied to the hold objects 633 and 633a. For example, when “Rotation 2” of FIG. 47 is applied, by displaying in a mode in which the axis is rotated by 7.5 degrees each time one frame is switched, the cycle is twice as large as the swing cycle of the large symbol objects 610A, 610B, and 610C. The shaft can be rotated.

Further, in the hold objects 633 and 633a, a display mode in which the axis rotation is stopped for a predetermined time while the character is viewed from the front is also possible. For example, when “Rotation 3” is applied, the character is rotated by 18 degrees for each frame switching based on the state where the character is viewed from the front in the frame 301, and the character is rotated by 360 degrees in the front view of the character again. However, the display mode is maintained in frames 322 to 325. Therefore, in the "rotation 3", the hold objects 633 and 633a can be stopped for four frames of the frames 321 to 324 (133 ms).

When “Rotation 3” is applied, the character is displayed in front view by rotating the frame by 30 degrees each time the frame is switched by 30 degrees, and rotating by 360 degrees by the frame 313, based on the state where the character is viewed from the front in the frame 301. However, the display mode is maintained in frames 314-325. Therefore, in "rotation 3", the holding objects 633 and 633a can be stopped for 12 frames (400 ms) of the frames 313 to 324.

Here, for example, "rotation 1", "rotation 3", and "rotation 4" can be applied to represent the expectation of the big hit for the special figure variation display game related to the holding objects 633, 633a. It is possible to assign "Rotation 1" (small expectation), "Rotation 3" (medium expectation), and "Rotation 4" (high expectation). Of course, similarly to the above, the colors of the hold objects 633 and 633a may be changed according to the degree of expectation. Further, "rotation 1", "rotation 3", and "rotation 4" can be separately used according to the degree of expectation of each of the holding objects 633 and 633a.

Note that it is also preferable to display the holding object 633, 633a larger as the proportion of the time of making the front view of the holding object 633, 633a is larger. For example, the size of the holding object 633, 633a at the time of “rotation 1”< The size may be displayed such that the size of the holding objects 633, 633a at "rotation 3"<the size of the holding objects 633,633a at "rotation 4". Further, the size of the holding objects 633, 633a is larger than the reference size (for example, the size of the holding objects 633, 633a at the time of "rotation 1") only when the characters of the holding objects 633, 633a are viewed from the front. May be displayed so that it becomes larger.

Further, for example, either "rotation 3" or "rotation 4" may be applied to all the hold objects 633, 633a. For example, during hold, during the probability change state, or during pseudo continuous effect generation, all hold “Rotation 3” or “rotation 4” may be applied to the objects 633, 633a, and “Rotation 1” may be applied to all the reserved objects 633, 633a when these are completed.

In addition, when there are three pseudo changes in the pseudo continuous effect, "rotation 1" is applied to all the hold objects 633 and 633a in the first pseudo change, and all the hold objects in the second pseudo change. “Rotation 3” may be applied to 633, 633a, and “rotation 4” may be applied to all the reserved objects 633, 633a in the third pseudo variation. As described above, in the time until the characters of the hold objects 633, 633a are viewed in front according to the game state, that is, in the time until the hold objects 633, 633a start rotating and stop the characters in front view and start rotating again. It is also preferable to appropriately change the ratio of the time in which the character is viewed from the front. Further, the size of the holding objects 633, 633a may be, for example, the holding objects 633, 633a to which "rotation 1" is applied <the holding objects 633 and 633a to which "rotation 3" is applied, and the holding object 633 to which "rotation 4" is applied. , 633a may be displayed in that order.

Note that, in FIG. 47, one cycle from "rotation 1" to "rotation 4" may be controlled at the same time (48 frames). The effect control device 300 can manage 48 frames in association with the control pointers 0 to 47. In this case, "rotation 1", "rotation 3", and "rotation 4" have a rotation mode that makes two rotations in 48 frames, and "rotation 2" has a rotation mode that makes one rotation in 48 frames. Thereby, even if the effect control device 300 changes the rotation mode of one of the holding objects 633 and 633a at a predetermined timing (for example, changes from "rotation 2" to "rotation 3"), the rotation after the transition is performed. Starting from the same value of the control pointer as the other holding objects 633, 633a, it is possible to keep the rotation synchronization in all the holding objects 633, 633a. Further, the rotation mode (variable mode) of the hold object 633, 633a can be changed based on the cycle of "rotation 2" in FIG. 47, that is, the cycle in which the change mode of the hold object 633, 633a completes once when 48 frames are switched. it can. It is assumed that the holding object 633 is viewed from the front in the frame 301 of FIG. 47 and starts to rotate from the frame 302. At this time, "rotation 3'" is newly provided, and in "rotation 3'", the holding objects 633 and 633a are rotated by 9 degrees clockwise (or counterclockwise may be rotated) axially, and are held in the frame 340. The object 633, 633a may be rotated once to be viewed from the front, and the reserved object 633, 633a may be stationary from the frame 341 to the frame 349. In addition, by newly providing "rotation 4'", in "rotation 4'", the holding objects 633 and 633a are rotated by 15 degrees clockwise (or counterclockwise may be rotated) axially, and are held in the frame 325. The objects 633 and 633a may be rotated once to be viewed from the front, and the reserved objects 633 and 633a may be stationary from the frame 326 to the frame 349. At this time, "rotation 1'" (= "rotation 1") is rotated at twice the rotation speed as in the case of "rotation 2" by retrieving every other angle information used in "rotation 2". It will be. Therefore, “rotation 1′”, “rotation 2”, “rotation 3′”, and “rotation 4′” have different rotation modes but the same rotation cycle (variable cycle) (for “rotation 1′”, Double the cycle). Therefore, when the rotation mode (variable mode) of the hold objects 633, 633a is changed, the rotation mode of the hold objects 633, 633a is changed from "rotation 1'" to "rotation 4'" according to the game state, the stage of production, etc. Even in the case of arbitrarily changing the holding objects 633a and 633a, the control for displaying the holding objects 633 and 633a can be easily performed.

FIG. 48 is a transition diagram showing a variation mode or variation mode (modification example) of the large symbol objects 610A, 610B, 610C, the small symbol object 615, and the hold objects 633, 633a at the end of the variable display game (or freeze effect). is there. In FIG. 48, the reserved objects 633 and 633a do not rotate by themselves. However, the hold objects 633, 633a include a decorative object 633b that goes around the hold objects 633, 633a. For example, when "Rotation 1" of FIG. 47 is applied, the decoration object 633b is one frame based on the state in which it is arranged at the highest position of the periphery (outer shape) of the character of the holding objects 633, 633a in the frame 301 (frame 325). It has a display mode of moving along the peripheral edge (outer shape) of the character in such a manner as to rotate 15 degrees in the circumferential direction with the center of the character as a rotation axis each time it is switched. As the decoration object 633b, it is preferable to apply the decoration object 633b having, for example, the shape of a sun or a star and having a higher brightness than the holding objects 633, 633a.

In FIG. 48, the transitions of the large symbol objects 610A, 610B, 610C, the small symbol object 615, the holding objects 633, 633a, and the decorative object 633b are described by copying from (d5) to (d10) of FIGS. 45 and 46. Therefore, the description of the large symbol objects 610A, 610B, 610C, the small symbol object 615, etc. will be appropriately omitted.

In the frame 325 shown in (d5) of FIG. 48, the holding objects 633 and 633a are stationary with the character in front view, and do not move until the holding object 633a is consumed. The decoration object 633b is arranged at the highest position (head) on the periphery of the characters of the holding objects 633 and 633a.

In a frame 331 shown in (d6) of FIG. 48, the decorative object 633b rotates clockwise (even in a counterclockwise direction) along the peripheral edge of the character in such a manner that the decorative object 633b rotates in the circumferential direction by 15 degrees about the center of the character as a rotation axis every time the frame is switched. It is located at a position (left cheek) moved along the peripheral edge of the character in such a manner as to move 90 degrees circumferentially from the position (head) related to the frame 325.

In the frame 337 shown in (d7) of FIG. 48, the decorative object 633b is arranged at a position (jaw) moved along the peripheral edge of the character in a mode of rotating 90 degrees clockwise from the position (left cheek) related to the frame 331. Has been done.

In the frame 343 shown in (d8) of FIG. 48, the decorative object 633b is arranged at a position (right cheek) moved along the peripheral edge of the character in a mode of rotating 90 degrees clockwise from the position (jaw) related to the frame 337. Has been done.

In the frame 349 shown in (d9) of FIG. 48, the decorative object 633b is arranged at the position (head) moved along the peripheral edge of the character in a mode of rotating 90 degrees clockwise from the position (right cheek) related to the frame 337. As a result, the decorative object 633b makes one round around the periphery of the character. At this time, the large symbol objects 610A, 610B, and 610C also perform the swing fluctuation for one cycle with the frame 325 as a reference. Then, in (d10) of FIG. 48, when the hold object 633a disappears, the decoration object 633b that decorates it also disappears.

Note that "rotation 2", "rotation 3", and "rotation 4" can be applied to the decoration object 633b as well as the hold objects 633 and 633a depending on the game state.

When "Rotation 2" is applied, the decorative object 633b orbits the peripheral edge of the character (holding objects 633, 633a) at a cycle twice the swing cycle.

When "Rotation 3" is applied, the period from when the decorative object 633b starts to orbit around the character's edge to when it stops at the character's head and starts to orbit again is "rotation 1", where the decorative object 633b moves around the character's edge. Although the period is the same as the period of the circuit, the display mode is such that the decorative object 633b stops at the character's head for four frames (133 ms).

When "Rotation 4" is applied, the decoration object 633b moves around the edge of the character until the decoration object 633b starts to go around the edge of the character until it stops at the head of the character and starts to go around again. Although the period is the same as the period of rotation, the display mode is such that the decorative object 633b stops at the character's head for 12 frames (400 ms).

In addition, the sizes of the decoration objects 633b are displayed in the order of, for example, decoration object 633b to which "rotation 1" is applied<decoration object 633b to which "rotation 3" is applied<decoration object 633b to which "rotation 4" is applied. Good.

Note that the decorative object 633b has been described as being arranged around the holding objects 633 and 633a and rotating around the holding objects 633 and 633a by moving along the circumference of the holding objects 633 and 633a. It may be arranged in the same manner and rotated in the same manner.

Similar to the holding objects 633 and 633a, the rotation mode of the decoration object 633b is based on the cycle of "rotation 2" in FIG. 47, that is, when the decoration object 633b rotates 360 degrees around the character when the frame is switched. (Variable mode) can be changed. Consider a case where the decorative object 633b is arranged at the highest position (head) on the periphery of the character in the frame 301 of FIG. At this time, in “Rotation 3′”, the decoration object 633b rotates 9 degrees clockwise (or counterclockwise may be used) around the character for each frame, and the decoration object 633b goes around the character in the frame 340. The decorative object 633b is arranged at the highest position (head) on the periphery of the character, and the decorative object 633b from the frame 341 to the frame 349 may be stationary at the arranged position. In the “rotate 4′”, the decoration object 633b rotates 15 degrees clockwise (or counterclockwise may be used) around the character for each frame, and the decoration object 633b makes a round around the character in the frame 325. The decorative object 633b may be arranged at the highest position (head) on the periphery of the character, and the decorative object 633b from the frame 326 to the frame 349 may be stationary at the arranged position. At this time, "rotation 1'" (= "rotation 1") is rotated at twice the rotation speed as in the case of "rotation 2" by retrieving every other angle information used in "rotation 2". It will be. Therefore, “rotation 1′”, “rotation 2”, “rotation 3′”, and “rotation 4′” have different rotation modes but the same rotation cycle (variable cycle) (for “rotation 1′”, Double the cycle). Therefore, when the rotation mode (variable mode) of the decoration object 633b is changed, the rotation mode of the decoration object 633b is arbitrarily changed between "rotation 1'" and "rotation 4'" according to the game state, the production stage, etc. Even in the case of performing the control, the control for displaying the decorative object 633b can be easily performed.

[Second Modification of Variation Mode During High-Speed Variation Display]
FIG. 49 is a screen transition diagram (first stage) showing a variation mode or a variation mode (second modified example) of the large symbol objects 610A, 610B, 610C, the small symbol object 615, and the hold objects 633, 633a during high-speed variable display. .. FIG. 50 is a screen transition diagram (second stage) showing the variation mode or variation mode (second modified example) of the large symbol objects 610A, 610B, 610C, the small symbol object 615, and the hold objects 633, 633a during high-speed variable display. .. In the second modified example, a case will be described in which the time (the number of frames) when the character is viewed from the front changes depending on the size of the holding objects 633 and 633a. It should be noted that although FIGS. 49 and 50 exemplify the case of high speed fluctuation, the present invention is also applicable to the case of low speed fluctuation.

As in the case shown in FIGS. 45 and 46, the hold objects 633, 633a are circular flat plate-shaped characters and have a display mode of axial rotation. For example, the front side of the hold objects 633, 633a appears. When the size of the reserved object 633, 633a is in a state of being viewed from the front, the reserved object 633, 633a is not updated for several frames in the effect display editing process shown in FIG. 36. After that, a display mode is possible in which the update is restarted and the size is returned to the original size.

In the frame 113 of (a9) of FIG. 49 (the same timing as (a9) of FIG. 34), the large symbol objects 610A and 610B respectively display the identification information “2” at the uppermost position, and the large symbol object 610C is displayed. Although the identification information “2” is displayed in a front view in the central portion, the identification information may be different in the large symbol objects 610A, 610B, 610C. At this time, the hold objects 633 and 633a are displayed in a manner of viewing the character from the end face direction. The small symbol object 615 displays the identification information “1”. The special figure 1 reserved number display section 650 and the special figure 2 reserved number display section 660 respectively display the number "2" indicating the special figure 1 reserved number and the number "0" indicating the special figure 2 reserved number. (The same applies hereafter).

In the frame 119 of (a10) of FIG. 49, the large symbol objects 610A, 610B and 610C respectively display the identification information "4" at the same position as described above. The holding objects 633 and 633a are displayed in a mode of rotating by 7.5 degrees for each frame (FIG. 47: rotation 2), and the character is rotated diagonally by 45 degrees from the posture displayed in the frame 113 so that the character is slanted on the back surface ( It is displayed in a manner viewed from the arrangement in which the left side from the rotation axis is on the front side). The small pattern object 615 displays the identification information “seven”.

In the frame 125 of (a11) of FIG. 49, the large symbol objects 610A, 610B and 610C respectively display the identification information "6" at the same positions as described above. The hold objects 633 and 633a are displayed in a manner in which the back surface of the character is viewed from the front by rotating by 45 degrees from the posture displayed in the frame 119 as described above. The small symbol object 615 displays the identification information “four”.

In the frame 131 of (a12) of FIG. 49, the large symbol objects 610A, 610B, and 610C each display the identification information "8" at the same position as described above. The reserved objects 633 and 633a are displayed in a manner that the character is viewed obliquely from the back surface (the arrangement in which the right side is on the front side from the rotation axis) by rotating by 45 degrees from the posture displayed on the frame 125 as described above. The small symbol object 615 displays the identification information “1”.

In the frame 137 of (a13) of FIG. 49, the large symbol objects 610A, 610B, 610C each display the identification information "1" at the same position as described above. The holding objects 633 and 633a are displayed in a manner in which the character is viewed from the end face direction by rotating by 45 degrees from the posture displayed in the frame 125 as described above. The small pattern object 615 displays the identification information “seven”. Thereafter, the enlargement effect of the holding objects 633 and 633a is started.

In the frame 143 of (a14) of FIG. 49, the large symbol objects 610A, 610B and 610C respectively display the identification information "3" at the same position as described above. The reserved objects 633 and 633a are enlarged and displayed in a manner that the surface of the character is viewed obliquely (position where the left side from the rotation axis comes to the front) by rotating by 45 degrees from the posture displayed in the frame 137 as described above. Has been done. The small symbol object 615 displays the identification information “four”.

In the frame 149 of (a15) of FIG. 49, the large symbol objects 610A, 610B and 610C respectively display the identification information “5” at the same position as described above. The suspended objects 633 and 633a are enlarged and displayed, and are rotated in the same manner as described above in the posture displayed in the frame 143 by 45 degrees to display the front surface of the character. The small symbol object 615 displays the identification information “1”. Note that the hold objects 633 and 633a may be gradually expanded each time one frame is switched from the frame 137 to the frame 149. Further, at the stage of the frame 138, it may be displayed so as to have the same size (vertical size) as the hold objects 633 and 633a shown in the frame 149.

In the frame 155 of (a16) in FIG. 49, the large symbol objects 610A, 610B, and 610C each display the identification information “7” at the same position as described above. The reserving objects 633 and 633a are kept updated from the frame 149, and maintain the display of the front view of the surface of the character. The small pattern object 615 displays the identification information “seven”.

In the frame 161 of (a17) of FIG. 50, the large symbol objects 610A, 610B and 610C respectively display the identification information "9" at the same position as described above. The reserving objects 633 and 633a continue to be updated from the frame 155 and maintain the display of the front view of the surface of the character. The small symbol object 615 displays the identification information “four”.

In the frame 167 of (a18) of FIG. 50, the large symbol objects 610A, 610B and 610C respectively display the identification information "1" at the same position as described above. The reserving objects 633 and 633a are displayed in a manner that the surface of the character is viewed obliquely (the right side from the rotation axis comes to the front) by resuming updating from the frame 161 and rotating by 45 degrees from the posture displayed in the frame 161. ing. The small symbol object 615 displays the identification information “1”.

In the frame 173 of (a19) of FIG. 50, the large symbol objects 610A, 610B and 610C respectively display the identification information “3” at the same positions as described above. The hold objects 633 and 633a are displayed in a manner of viewing the character from the end face direction by rotating the posture displayed on the frame 167 by 45 degrees. The small pattern object 615 displays the identification information “seven”. In the frame 173, the enlargement effect of the holding objects 633 and 633a ends and the original size is restored. At that time, the size may be gradually reduced each time the frame 161 is switched by one frame, or the same size (vertical size) may be maintained from the frame 161 to the frame 172 and the original size may be maintained in the frame 173. You may return it.

In the frame 179 of (a20) of FIG. 50, the large symbol objects 610A, 610B and 610C respectively display the identification information "5" at the same position as described above. The reserved objects 633 and 633a are displayed in a manner that the surface of the character is viewed obliquely (arranged so that the left side of the rotation axis comes to the front) by rotating by 45 degrees from the posture displayed in the frame 173, but it is enlarged. There is no such thing. The small symbol object 615 displays the identification information “four”.

It should be noted that, at the timing when the identification information of the large symbol object 610C is viewed from the front during the high speed change, the large symbol object 610C is not updated for several frames in the effect display editing process shown in FIG. 36, and then the update is restarted. It is also possible to perform a pause effect. At that time, the size of the large symbol object 610C may be enlarged in proportion to the period (the number of frames) in which the large symbol object 610C is stopped, and may be returned to the original size after the end of the pause effect. Further, in synchronization with the large symbol object 610C, it is possible to perform a temporary stop effect for the small symbol object 615 by the effect edit processing shown in FIG. 36 without updating the identification information for several frames.

In the second modified example, the enlarging effect may not be performed on the holding object 633, and the enlarging effect may be performed only on the holding object 633a corresponding to the start memory of the special figure variation display game being executed. At this time, the rectangular frame indicating the reserved digestion area 640 may be displayed so that the reserved object 633a may be projected out of the frame without performing the enlarging effect. Further, the hold object 633 can be displayed not only on the special figure 1 hold display section 660 (hold display section 630a) but also on the special figure 2 hold display section (hold display section 630b). Therefore, when there is a hold object 633 in the special figure 2 hold display section, the enlargement effect may be similarly applied to the hold object 633. In this case, regardless of whether the hold object 633a is the hold object 633 in the special figure 1 hold display section or the hold object 633 in the special figure 2 hold display section, the enlargement effect is applied to all the hold objects 633, 633a. It may be configured to perform. Further, in the case where the holding object 633a is related to the holding object 633 in the special figure 1 holding display section, even if the holding object 633a and the holding object displayed in the special figure 1 holding display section are enlarged, Good. Similarly, when the hold object 633a is related to the hold object 633 in the special figure 2 hold display section, a configuration for performing enlargement effect on the hold object 633a and the hold object displayed in the special figure 2 hold display section But it's okay.

[Third modification of high-speed variable display]
FIG. 51 is a screen transition diagram (first stage) showing a variation mode or a variation mode (third modified example) of the large symbol objects 610A, 610B, 610C, the small symbol object 615, and the hold objects 633, 633a during high-speed variable display. .. FIG. 52 is a screen transition diagram (second stage) showing the variation mode or variation mode (third modified example) of the large symbol objects 610A, 610B, 610C, the small symbol object 615, and the hold objects 633, 633a during high-speed variable display. ..

In the third modified example, the large symbol objects 610A and 610B change in rotation, and the large symbol object 610C changes in vertical scroll, but this configuration is also applicable to low-speed variable display. Note that (e1) to (e11) of FIGS. 51 and 52 correspond to (a1) to (a11) of FIGS. 33 and 34, and the transition modes of the hold objects 633, 633a and the small symbol object 615 are 33, the description thereof is omitted because it is the same as the transition mode shown in FIG.

In the frame 101 shown in (e1) of FIG. 51, the large symbol object 610C is displayed at the upper center of the display device 41 and displays the identification information “7”. The large symbol object 610A is displayed in a state in which the identification information “7” is viewed from the front at a position on the left side of the display device 41 and at the center in the height direction. The large symbol object 610B is displayed in a state where the identification information “7” is viewed from the front at a position on the right side of the display device 41 and at the center in the height direction.

In the frame 102 shown in (e2) of FIG. 51, the large symbol object 610C is displayed in the center of the display device 41 and displays the identification information “7”, but it moves in the horizontal direction as compared with the frame 101. Not (and so on).

The large symbol objects 610A and 610B are displayed in a state in which the entire object is axially rotated 60 degrees from the posture in which the identification information "7" is viewed from the front, and the identification information "7" is viewed obliquely. Is displayed. Here, as for the direction of shaft rotation, the left side moves from the rotation shaft to the back and the right side comes to the front, but it may rotate in the opposite direction. The large symbol objects 610A and 610B have not moved in the horizontal direction and the vertical direction as compared with the frame 101 (the same applies hereafter).

In the frame 103 shown in (e3) of FIG. 51, the large symbol object 610C is displayed in the lower center of the display device 41 and displays the identification information “7”. The large symbol objects 610A and 610B are displayed in such a manner that the entire object is rotated by 120 degrees from the posture in which the identification information "7" is viewed from the front.

In the frame 104 shown in (e4) of FIG. 51, the large symbol object 610C displaying the identification information “7” disappears, and the large symbol object 610C displaying the identification information “8” is displayed in the upper center of the display device 41. It The large symbol objects 610A and 610B are displayed in such a manner that the entire object is rotated by 180 degrees from the posture in which the identification information “7” is viewed from the front and the back surface is viewed from the front, and the identification information “8” is displayed on the back surface. it's shown.

In the frame 105 shown in (e5) of FIG. 51, the large symbol object 610C is displayed at the center of the display device 41 and displays the identification information “8”. The large symbol objects 610A and 610B are displayed in a mode in which the entire object is rotated by 60 degrees from the posture in which the identification information "8" is viewed from the front, and a figure in a mode in which the identification information "8" is viewed obliquely is displayed. doing.

In the frame 106 shown in (e6) of FIG. 51, the large symbol object 610C is displayed at the lower center of the display device 41 and displays the identification information “8”. The large symbol objects 610A and 610B are displayed in such a manner that the entire object is rotated by 120 degrees from the posture in which the identification information “8” is viewed from the front, and the outer shape of the identification information “8” is horizontally flipped and viewed obliquely. The figure in the different mode is displayed.

In the frame 107 shown in (e7) of FIG. 51, the large symbol object 610C displaying the identification information “8” disappears, and the large symbol object 610C displaying the identification information “9” is displayed in the upper center of the display device 41. It The large symbol objects 610A and 610B are displayed in such a manner that the entire object is rotated by 180 degrees from the posture in which the identification information “8” is viewed from the front and the surface is viewed from the front, and the identification information “9” is displayed on the surface. doing.

In the frame 108 shown in (e8) of FIG. 51, the large symbol object 610C is displayed at the center of the display device 41 and displays the identification information “9”. The large symbol objects 610A and 610B are displayed in a mode in which the entire object is rotated by 60 degrees from the posture in which the identification information "9" is viewed from the front, and the figure in a mode in which the identification information "9" is viewed obliquely is displayed. ing.

In the frame 113 shown in (e9) of FIG. 52, a large symbol object 610C displaying the identification information “2” is displayed at the upper center of the display device 41. The large symbol objects 610A and 610B are displayed in a state where the surface is viewed from the front, and the identification information "2" is displayed on the surface.

In a frame 119 shown in (e10) of FIG. 52, a large symbol object 610C displaying the identification information “4” is displayed in the upper center of the display device 41. The large symbol objects 610A and 610B are displayed in a state where the surface is viewed from the front, and the identification information “4” is displayed on the surface.

In a frame 125 shown in (e11) of FIG. 52, a large symbol object 610C displaying the identification information “6” is displayed at the upper center of the display device 41. The large symbol objects 610A and 610B are displayed in a state where the surface is viewed from the front, and the identification information "6" is displayed on the surface.

As shown in FIG. 51 and FIG. 52, the large symbol object 610C moves in the order of the central upper part, the central part, and the central lower part of the display device 41 in a state (identical form) having the same identification information using three frames. Is displayed. In the large symbol objects 610A and 610B, the same identification information (identification information to be viewed from the front) is displayed only in one frame.

In the present embodiment, it is possible to change the combination of the variation modes (variation display mode) of the large symbol objects 610A, 610B, 610C according to the game state. For example, at the start of the normal game state, the large symbol objects 610A and 610B are set to the vertical scroll variation, and the large symbol object 610C is set to the rotational variation, and then, for example, when the production stage changes, or when the probable state or It is also possible to change the large symbol objects 610A and 610B into rotational fluctuations and the large symbol object 610C into vertical scroll fluctuations when the pseudo-continuous effect occurs. Further, in the case of the pseudo continuous effect, a large symbol object (for example, a large symbol object 610C) that performs the rotation fluctuation and a large symbol object that performs the vertical scroll fluctuation during the pseudo fluctuation after the temporary stop of the pseudo fluctuation (for example, It is also possible to alternately switch the variation modes of the large symbol objects 610A and 610B).

Further, it is also possible to change the combination of the variation modes in accordance with the special figure variation display game being executed and the expectation degree of the big hit of the hold object 633a. When the expectation degree is "small", the large symbol object 610A, 610B is set to vertical scroll variation, and large symbol object 610C is set to rotation variation. When the degree of expectation is "medium", the large symbol object 610A (or 610B) is set to the vertical scroll variation, and the large symbol object 610C and the large symbol object 610B (or the large symbol object 610A) are set to the rotational variation. When the degree of expectation is “large”, it is possible to change the large symbol objects 610A, 610B, and 610C to change in rotation, and the like.

[Operation/Effect of First Embodiment]
According to the first embodiment, the display device 41 is provided with display control means (effect control device 300) that variably displays a plurality of large symbol objects 610A, 610B, 610C to perform a variably display game, and the result of the variably display game is In the gaming machine 10 that can generate a special game state advantageous to the player when a special result is obtained, the plurality of large symbol objects 610A, 610B, 610C are the first large symbol objects (for example, large symbol objects 610A, 610B). ) And a first large symbol object (for example, large symbol objects 610A and 610B) and a second large symbol object (for example, large symbol object 610C) in which the variable display mode is different,
The variable display game includes a high-speed variable display period in which the fluctuation speed of the large symbol objects 610A, 610B, and 610C is faster than the period immediately after the start of the variable display game, and the display control means (effect control device 300) uses the display device 41. , Together with the variable display of a plurality of large symbol objects 610A, 610B, 610C, the variable display of the small symbol object 615 is performed, and in the high-speed variable display period, the second large symbol object (for example, the large symbol object 610C) is continuously displayed in the same manner. The period (T2) to be displayed as is shorter than the period (T1) in which the first large symbol objects (for example, large symbol objects 610A and 610B) are continuously displayed in the same mode, and the small symbol object 615 is in the same mode. The period (S1) to be continuously displayed in is made equal to the period (T2) to continuously display the second large symbol object (for example, the large symbol object 610C) in the same manner.

With the above configuration, it is possible to easily recognize the variation mode of the large symbol objects 610A, 610B, 610C in the variable display game, and it is possible to improve the interest.

In the first embodiment, the display control means (production control device 300), under a predetermined condition (for example, when the production stage is changed or when the pseudo continuous production is temporarily stopped), a first large symbol object (for example, a large symbol object). 610A, 610B) and the display position of the second large symbol object (for example, large symbol object 610C) and/or the display number are exchanged.

As a result, it is possible to enhance the effect of the effect without adding a new effect element and to improve the enjoyment of the game.

In the first embodiment, the first large symbol object (for example, large symbol objects 610A and 610B) includes the first identification information (identification information), and the second large symbol object (for example, large symbol object 610C) is the second. The identification information (identification information) is provided, and the display control unit (production control device 300) is a first large symbol object (for example, large image) in a variable display mode that scrolls along a specific path provided on the screen of the display device 41. The symbol objects 610A and 610B) are variably displayed, and the second large symbol object (for example, the large symbol object 610C) is variably displayed in a variable display mode of rotating at a predetermined position.

This makes it possible to easily recognize the variable display modes of the large symbol objects 610A, 610B, 610C in the variable display game even if the variable display modes of different variable display modes are simultaneously displayed.

In the first embodiment, the display control unit (production control device 300) displays the second large symbol object (for example, the large symbol object 610C) in a mode in which the shaft is gradually rotated, and the second identification information (identification information). ) Is displayed such that the front surface or the back surface is alternately viewed from the front, and the second large pattern in a mode in which the second identification information (identification information) is switched every time the front surface and/or the back surface is viewed from the front. The object (for example, large pattern object 610C) is variably displayed.

Accordingly, it is possible to easily grasp the switching of the second identification information (identification information) due to the rotation fluctuation.

In the first embodiment, the display control unit (production control device 300) disappears by moving the first large symbol object (for example, large symbol objects 610A and 610B) from the base end of the specific route toward the end of the specific route. After that, the first identification information (identification information) is switched to the first large symbol object (for example, large symbol objects 610A, 610B) from the base end toward the end, and disappears in a mode that repeats, The first large symbol object (for example, large symbol objects 610A and 610B) is scrolled.

This makes it possible to easily grasp the switching of the first identification information (identification information) by vertical scrolling (unidirectional scrolling).

In the first embodiment, the display control means (production control device 300) includes a plurality of first large symbol objects (for example, large symbol objects 610A and 610B) along a specific path in the order in which the first identification information (identification information) is switched. While displaying side by side, a plurality of first large symbol objects (for example, large symbol objects 610A and 610B) are continuously displayed in the same manner for a plurality of first large symbol objects (for example, large symbols). Objects 610A and 610B) are scrolled.

Thereby, it is possible to easily grasp the switching of the first identification information (identification information) by the vertical scroll (unidirectional scroll) in which a plurality of the first identification information (identification information) are arranged at the same time.

In the first embodiment, the display time of the variable display game in the specific game state (for example, the time saving state) in which the specific game can be executed after the special game state ends is the variable display game in the normal game state in which the specific game cannot be executed. Is shorter than the display time of.

As a result, it is possible to reliably perform the specific game state (for example, a time saving state), and it is possible to easily recognize the variation mode of the large symbol objects 610A, 610B, 610C during the specific game state.

According to the first embodiment, the display device 41 is provided with display control means (effect control device 300) that variably displays a plurality of large symbol objects 610A, 610B, 610C to perform a variably display game, and the result of the variably display game is In the gaming machine 10 capable of generating a special game state advantageous to the player when a special result is obtained, the plurality of large symbol objects 610A, 610B, 610C are first large symbol objects (for example, large symbol objects 610A, 610B). ) And a first large symbol object (for example, large symbol objects 610A and 610B) and a second large symbol object (for example, large symbol object 610C) having a variable display mode, and display control means (production control device). 300), on the display device 41, performs a variable display of a plurality of large symbol objects 610A, 610B, 610C and a variable display of the small symbol object 615, and performs a predetermined period (preliminary operation period, temporary stop display period) during the variable display game. ), in a period in which the second large symbol object (for example, large symbol object 610C) is continuously displayed in the same manner, the first large symbol object (for example, large symbol object 610A, 610B) is continuously continuously changed in the same manner. It is equal to the display period, and in a specific display period (slow-speed fluctuation display period, medium-speed fluctuation display period, high-speed fluctuation display period) other than the predetermined period during the variable display game, the second large symbol object (for example, large symbol object 610C). ) Is continuously displayed in the same manner, the period of the first large symbol object (eg, large symbol objects 610A, 610B) is continuously displayed in the same manner, and the small symbol object 615 is kept in the same manner. The period during which the second large symbol object (for example, large symbol object 610C) is continuously displayed is set to be equal to the period during which the second large symbol object (for example, large symbol object 610C) is continuously displayed in the same manner.

With the above configuration, it is possible to easily recognize the variation mode of the large symbol objects 610A, 610B, 610C in the variable display game, and the first large symbol object (for example, large symbol objects 610A, 610B) in a predetermined period, and By making the switching cycle of the identification information of the two large symbol objects (for example, the large symbol object 610C) equal, it is possible to avoid the occurrence of strangeness in the variable display, and thereby to improve the interest.

In the first embodiment, the specific display period includes a high-speed variable display period in which the variable speed is faster than the predetermined period, and the predetermined period includes a preliminary motion display period in which a preliminary motion at the start of the variable display game is displayed. The first large symbol object (for example, large symbol objects 610A and 610B) includes first identification information (identification information), and the second large symbol object (for example, large symbol object 610C) includes the second identification information (identification). Information), the display control means (production control device 300) specifies the first large symbol object (for example, large symbol objects 610A and 610B) on the screen of the display device 41 in the high-speed variable display period. The first identification information (identification information) is variably displayed in a mode (vertical scroll) that scrolls along the route, and the second large symbol object (for example, large symbol object 610C) is displayed in a mode in which the shaft is rotated stepwise. Then, the front surface or the back surface on which the second identification information (identification information) is displayed is alternately displayed as viewed from the front, and the second identification information (identification is displayed every time the front surface and/or the back surface is viewed from the front. (Information) is variably displayed in a mode (rotational fluctuation) to be switched, and in the preliminary operation display period, the first large symbol object (for example, large symbol objects 610A and 610B) is maintained while maintaining the first identification information (identification information). From the initial position of the first large symbol object (for example, large symbol objects 610A, 610B) to the display position of the first large symbol object (for example, large symbol objects 610A, 610B), the first large symbol object (for example, large symbol object 610A, 610B) moves in a direction opposite to the scrolling direction by a predetermined distance and then variably displays in a mode of returning to the initial position of the first large symbol object (for example, large symbol objects 610A and 610B), and the second large symbol object (for example, , Large symbol object 610C), while maintaining the second identification information (identification information), the display position of the second large symbol object (for example, large symbol object 610C) is the second large symbol object (for example, large symbol object 610C) From the initial position of the first large symbol object (for example, large symbol objects 610A, 610B) a predetermined distance in the direction opposite to the scrolling direction, and then the initial position of the second large symbol object (for example, large symbol object 610C) The display is variably displayed in a manner returning to the first large symbol object (for example, large symbol object 610A). , 610B) and the second large symbol object (for example, large symbol object 610C) are moved in synchronization with each other.

As a result, the first large symbol object (for example, large symbol objects 610A and 610B) and the second large symbol object (for example, large symbol object 610C) are caused to perform the same operation in the preliminary movement even if the variable display modes are different. Therefore, the effect at the start of the variable display game can be naturally performed.

In the first embodiment, the display control means (production control device 300) is a preliminary operation display of the first large symbol object (for example, large symbol objects 610A and 610B) and the second large symbol object (for example, large symbol object 610C). The size in the period is made larger than the size in the high-speed variable display period of the first large symbol object (for example, large symbol objects 610A and 610B) and the second large symbol object (for example, large symbol object 610C).

This makes it possible to draw attention to the preliminary movement, and to make the size of the large symbol objects 610A, 610B, 610C appropriately smaller than the size at the time of the preliminary movement in the high-speed change display so that it can be easily seen. Makes it easy to recognize the scroll, and thus the variable display of the large symbol objects 610A, 610B, 610C can be easily recognized. Further, in the high-speed variable display, the size of the large symbol objects 610A, 610B, 610C is made smaller than the size at the time of the preliminary change, so that the sense of speed of scrolling can be enhanced.

Here, even if the size of the large symbol object (for example, the large symbol object 610C) is defined as the size of the second large symbol object (for example, the large symbol object 610C) as it is, the size of the identification information is the same. The entire size including the object body (frame, character, etc.) on which the information is displayed may be defined as the size of the second large symbol object (for example, large symbol object 610C). Therefore, for example, even if the size of the identification information does not differ between the preliminary movement display period and the high speed variation display period, the object body (frame, character) is displayed together with the identification information during the preliminary movement display period, and the high speed variation display is performed. Even when the object body (frame, character) disappears and only the identification information is displayed in the period (and the slow-moving display period), the size of the large symbol object in the preliminary motion display period is larger than that in the fast-moving display period. It can be considered large.

In the first embodiment, the display control means (production control device 300), immediately after the end of the preliminary operation display period, the second large symbol object (for example, large symbol object 610C), the second large symbol object (for example, large). A mode in which the display position of the symbol object 610C) converges to the initial position of the second large symbol object (for example, large symbol object 610C) while vibrating around the initial position of the second large symbol object (for example, large symbol object 610C). To change display.

Thereby, the second large symbol object (for example, the large symbol object 610C) can be physically operated.

In the first embodiment, the predetermined period includes a temporary stop display period (swing fluctuation display period) performed after the specific display period, and the display control unit (production control device 300) is the first large symbol in the temporary stop display period. Object (for example, large symbol objects 610A, 610B) and second large symbol object (for example, large symbol object 610C), the display position of the first large symbol object (for example, large symbol objects 610A, 610B) and the second large symbol The display position of the object (for example, the large pattern object 610C) is variably displayed in a manner in which the display positions are synchronized with each other and periodically change in the same direction.

This allows the player to be naturally informed that the game is in the temporary stop state immediately before the end of the variable display game.

According to the first embodiment, the display device 41 is provided with display control means for variably displaying a plurality of large symbol objects (large symbol objects 610A, 610B, 610C) to perform a variable display game, and the result of the variable display game is special. In the case of the result, in the gaming machine 10 capable of generating a special game state advantageous to the player, the starting memory is stored as the execution right of the variable display game based on the passage of the game ball to the starting area (for example, the starting winning opening 36). Equipped with a memorable start storage means (game control device 100), a plurality of large symbol objects (large symbol objects 610A, 610B, 610C), a first large symbol object (for example, large symbol objects 610A, 610B), 1 large symbol object, for example, large symbol objects 610A, 610B) and a second large symbol object different in variation mode, for example, large symbol object 610C), the variable display game, from the period immediately after the start of the variable display game Also includes a high-speed fluctuation display period in which the fluctuation speed of the large symbol objects (large symbol objects 610A, 610B, 610C) is fast, and the display control means (production control device 300) causes the display device 41 to display a plurality of large symbol objects (large symbols). Objects 610A, 610B, 610C) together with the variable display of the small symbol object 615 and the display of the hold objects 633, 633a corresponding to the starting memory, and the second large symbol object ( For example, a period (T2) in which the large symbol objects 610C) are continuously displayed in the same manner, a period (T1) in which the first large symbol objects (for example, large symbol objects 610A and 610B) are continuously displayed in the same manner. Shorter than, the period (S1) in which the small symbol object 615 is continuously displayed in the same manner, the period (T2) in which the second large symbol object (for example, large symbol object 610C) is continuously displayed in the same manner. And hold objects 633, 633a are continuously displayed in the same manner for a period (H1), while a first large symbol object (for example, large symbol objects 610A, 610B) is continuously displayed for the same period ( It is longer than T1).

As a result, the player naturally directs his or her line of sight to the person who is moving fast, so that the line of sight of the player can be directed to the large symbol objects 610A, 610B, and 610C when the player is moving at high speed. Further, when the large symbol objects 610A, 610B, 610C are stopped (including the temporary stop state), the line of sight can be directed to the pending objects 633, 633a that are variably displayed. As described above, the interest of the game can be improved by appropriately performing the effects of the large symbol objects 610A, 610B, 610C in the variable display game.

In the first embodiment, the display control means (production control device 300) variably displays the hold objects 633, 633a in such a manner that the form of the hold objects 633, 633a changes periodically, and the large symbol objects 610A, 610B, 610C is variably displayed in a mode in which the display positions of the large symbol objects 610A, 610B, and 610C are changed at the time of temporary stop, and the cycle (P3) in which the form of the hold objects 633, 633a is changed is temporarily stopped. The display positions of the large symbol objects 610A, 610B, 610C are made equal (synchronized) with the cycle.

As a result, the variable display cycle (P3) of the hold objects 633, 633a and the fluctuation cycle of the large symbol objects 610A, 610B, 610C at the time of temporary stop can be aligned (synchronized), and the entertainment of the game is improved. In addition, it is possible to eliminate the unnaturalness caused by the non-synchronization.

In the first embodiment, the display control means (production control device 300) variably displays the hold objects 633, 633a in a form in which the form of the hold objects 633, 633a changes periodically, and the hold objects 633, 633a are displayed. The cycle in which the form changes can be shortened when the expectation that the result of the variable display game related to the hold objects 633, 633a is a special result is high.

As a result, it is possible to visually understand the difference in the degree of expectation of suspension related to the suspension objects 633 and 633a.

In the first embodiment, the display control means (production control device 300) reduces the amplitude when the form of the holding objects 633, 633a changes as the cycle of changing the form of the holding objects 633, 633a becomes shorter.

As a result, it is possible to eliminate the unnatural relationship between the cycle and the amplitude in which the forms of the holding objects 633 and 633a change.

In the first embodiment, the hold objects 633, 633a include a decoration object 633b displayed in a manner of orbiting along the outline of the hold objects 633, 633a, and the display control means (production control device 300) uses the hold object 633. , 633a is changed to a cycle in which the decorative object 633b goes around the contours of the holding objects 633, 633a.

Accordingly, since it is not necessary to move the main body (character) of the holding objects 633, 633a in the variable display, the variable display (variable display) of the holding objects 633, 633a can be easily performed.

In the first embodiment, the holding objects 633, 633a include decoration objects 633b, and the display control means (production control device 300) rotates the holding objects 633, 633a in a manner in which the position of the decoration object 633b goes around. The cycle in which the decoration objects 633b are displayed and the form of the holding objects 633 and 633a changes is defined as the cycle in which the decoration object 633b orbits.

Accordingly, since it is not necessary to move the main body (character) of the holding objects 633, 633a in the variable display, the variable display (variable display) of the holding objects 633, 633a can be easily performed.

According to the first embodiment, the display device 41 is provided with display control means (effect control device 300) that variably displays a plurality of large symbol objects 610A, 610B, 610C to perform a variably display game, and the result of the variably display game is In the gaming machine 10 capable of generating a special game state advantageous to the player when a special result is obtained, the plurality of large symbol objects 610A, 610B, 610C are first large symbol objects (for example, large symbol objects 610A, 610B). ) And a first large symbol object (for example, large symbol objects 610A and 610B) and a second large symbol object (for example, large symbol object 610C) having a variable display mode, and display control means (production control device). 300), on the display device 41, performs a variable display of a plurality of large symbol objects 610A, 610B, 610C and a variable display of a small symbol object 615, and a second large symbol object (for example, a large symbol object 610C) is predetermined. It can be variably displayed in a mode in which the axis rotates at a position (rotational fluctuation), and can be displayed in a predetermined period in a state where the identification information included in the second large symbol object (for example, large symbol object 610C) is viewed from the front, The predetermined period can be changed based on the size of the second large symbol object (for example, the large symbol object 610C).

Thereby, the visibility of the identification information during the variable display of the second large symbol object (for example, the large symbol object 610C) can be improved. In this way, the interest can be improved by appropriately performing the effects of the large symbol objects 610A, 610B, 610C in the variable display game.

In the first embodiment, the display control means (production control device 300) changes the size of the second large symbol object (for example, large symbol object 610C) based on the game state.

As a result, it is possible to suggest to the player which game state is occurring without adding a new effect element.

In the first embodiment, the display control means (production control device 300) determines the size of the second large symbol object (for example, large symbol object 610C) when the identification information is viewed from the front, and the identification information is changed to the front view. It is made larger than the size of the second large symbol object (for example, large symbol object 610C) when it does not become.

Thereby, the identification information displayed on the second large symbol object (for example, the large symbol object 610C) can be emphasized.

In the first embodiment, the display control means (production control device 300), after the second large symbol object (for example, large symbol object 610C) starts the axis rotation, the second large symbol object (for example, large symbol object 610C). ), the second large symbol object (for example, large symbol object 610C) is temporarily stopped for a predetermined period in a state where the identification information included in the symbol is viewed from the front, and the second large symbol object (for example, large symbol object 610C). Changes the ratio occupied by the predetermined period in the cycle from when the axis rotation starts to when the pause ends, based on the size of the second large symbol object (for example, large symbol object 610C).

Thereby, the visibility of the identification information during the variable display of the second large symbol object (for example, the large symbol object 610C) can be improved. Further, since the cycle of the axis rotation of the second large symbol object (for example, the large symbol object 610C) does not change regardless of the predetermined period, the cycle of the axis rotation of the second large symbol object (for example, the large symbol object 610C) Synchronization with the scroll cycle of the first large symbol object (for example, large symbol objects 610A and 610B) becomes easy, and a more natural variable display effect can be performed.

According to the first embodiment, the display device 41 is provided with the display control means (production control device 300) for playing the variable display game, and when the result of the variable display game is a special result, a special game state advantageous to the player. In the gaming machine 10 capable of generating, a starting storage means (game control device 100) capable of storing a starting memory as a right to execute a variable display game based on passage of a game ball to a starting area (start winning opening 36 etc.) The display control means (production control device 300) displays the hold objects 633, 633a corresponding to the start memory on the display device 41, rotates the hold objects 633, 633a, and rotates at a specific rotation angle (the character is viewed from the front). Or a rotation angle other than the above, which is a rotation angle at which the character of the character can be recognized, etc.) is variably displayed in a mode of temporarily stopping, and the hold object 633, 633a is temporarily stopped for a period. It can be changed based on the size of 633a.

As a result, the visibility of the image relating to the specific rotation angle of the holding objects 633, 633a (the rotation angle at which the character is viewed from the front, or the rotation angle at which the character is recognizable and other than the rotation angle) can be improved. It can be increased, and the pause time is changed according to the size of the hold objects 633, 633a. Therefore, the variable display (variable display) of the holding objects 633 and 633a is not monotonous, and the player pays close attention, so that the interest can be improved.

In the first embodiment, the display control means (production control device 300) changes the size of the hold objects 633, 633a based on the game state.

As a result, it is possible to suggest to the player which game state is occurring without adding a new effect element.

In the first embodiment, the display control unit (production control device 300) variably displays a plurality of large symbol objects 610A, 610B, 610C on the display device 41 to execute the variable display game, and at the time of temporary stop, The large symbol objects 610A, 610B, 610C are variably displayed in such a manner that the display positions of the large symbol objects 610A, 610B, 610C are periodically changed, and the suspension objects 633, 633a start axis rotation until the suspension is completed. Is synchronized with the cycle in which the display positions of the large symbol objects 610A, 610B, and 610C change during temporary stop.

As a result, the vibration of the display positions of the large symbol objects 610A, 610B, 610C and the rotation of the holding objects 633, 633a can be harmonized to provide a natural effect.

In the first embodiment, the display control unit (production control device 300) causes the hold object 633, 633a to hold the percentage of the hold object 633, 633a in the cycle from the start of the axis rotation to the end of the hold. It is changed based on the size of 633a.

As a result, the visibility of the image relating to the specific rotation angle of the holding objects 633, 633a (the rotation angle at which the character is viewed from the front, or the rotation angle at which the character is recognizable and other than the rotation angle) can be improved. Can be increased. Further, since the rotation cycle including the suspension of the hold objects 633, 633a is invariable, the rotation cycle of the hold objects 633, 633a and the scroll cycle or rotation cycle of the large symbol objects 610A, 610B, 610C can be easily synchronized. It is possible to produce a more natural effect.

According to the first embodiment, the display device 41 displays a plurality of large symbol objects 610A, 610B, 610C in a variably displayed manner to perform a variably displayed game, and a game ball has a predetermined firing cycle. In the gaming machine 10 which is capable of generating a special game state advantageous to the player when the result of the variable display game is a special result, the starting area (for example, the start winning opening 36). A plurality of large symbol objects 610A, 610B, 610C are provided with a first large symbol object 610A, 610B, 610C having a starting memory means (game control device 100) capable of storing a starting memory as a right to execute a variable display game based on passage of a game ball to (For example, the large symbol objects 610A, 610B) and the first large symbol object (for example, the large symbol objects 610A, 610B) and the second large symbol object (for example, the large symbol object 610C) in which the variable display mode is different, Including, the variable display game includes a high-speed variable display period in which the fluctuation speed of the large symbol objects 610A, 610B, 610C is faster than the period immediately after the start of the variable display game, and the display control means (effect control device 300) is a display device. In 41, together with the variable display of the plurality of large symbol objects 610A, 610B, 610C, the variable display of the small symbol object 615 is performed, and the hold objects 633, 633a corresponding to the starting memory are displayed on the display device 41 and the hold objects 633. Variable display in a form in which the form of 633a changes cyclically, in the high-speed variable display period, a period in which the second large symbol object (for example, large symbol object 610C) is continuously displayed in the same manner, the first large symbol. Objects (for example, large symbol objects 610A and 610B) are made shorter than a period in which they are continuously displayed in the same mode, and a period in which small symbol objects 615 are continuously displayed in the same mode is the second large symbol object (for example, The large symbol object 610C) is set to be equal to the period for continuously displaying in the same mode, and the period for continuously displaying the hold objects 633, 633a is the first large symbol object (for example, large symbol objects 610A, 610B). ) Is made longer than the period in which it is continuously displayed in the same manner, and the cycle in which the form of the hold objects 633, 633a changes is made longer than the firing cycle of the game ball.

The game ball is emitted by the ball launching device by the sound and vibration generated by the player. Therefore, with the above configuration, by making the cycle (swing cycle P3) in which the form of the hold objects 633, 633a changes slower than the firing cycle, the player can relax and enjoy the game leisurely. it can.

According to the first embodiment, the display device 41 is provided with a display control unit (effect control device 300) that variably displays a plurality of symbol objects (for example, large symbols 610A and 610B) to perform a variably display game. When the result is a special result, a symbol object (for example, large symbol 610A (A1, A2, A3), 610B (B1, B2, B3)) in the gaming machine 10 that can generate a special gaming state advantageous to the player. Is variably displayed in a variable display mode in which the variable display mode scrolls along a specific route (vertical route) provided on the screen of the display device 41 with identification information, and the variable display game is displayed immediately after the start of the variable display game. Including the high-speed fluctuation display period in which the fluctuation speed of the symbol object is faster than the period, the display control means (production control device 300), in the high-speed fluctuation display period, the symbol object (for example, large symbol 610A (A1, A2, A3), 610B). A plurality of (B1, B2, B3)) are arranged along the specific route in the order in which the round of identification information is switched, and the colors associated with the identification information are different from each other with the large pattern objects adjacent to each other. As described above, the symbol object related to the one round of the identification information is displayed.

With the above configuration, not only the identification information but also the object body of the large symbol object (for example, the large symbols 610A (A1, A2, A3), 610B (B1, B2, B3)) on which the identification information is displayed is scrolled. The player can easily recognize that.

According to the first embodiment, the display device 41 is provided with the display control means (production control device 300) for playing the variable display game, and when the result of the variable display game is a special result, a special game state advantageous to the player. In the gaming machine 10 capable of generating, a start storage means (game control device 100) capable of storing a start memory as a right to execute a variable display game based on passage of a game ball to a start area (for example, the start winning opening 36) The display control means (production control device 300) displays the hold object (hold object 633, 633a, decoration object 633b) corresponding to the start-up memory on the display device 41, and the hold object hold object 633, 633a, decoration object 633b). Can be variably displayed in any one of a plurality of different variable modes (“rotation 1′”, “rotation 2”, “rotation 3′”, “rotation 4′”), and a variable cycle of the plurality of variable modes. Are the same as each other.

With the above configuration, when the rotation mode (variable mode) of the holding objects (holding objects 633, 633a, decoration object 633b) is changed, the rotation mode (variable mode) of the holding objects (holding objects 633, 633a, decoration object 633b) is changed. In the case of arbitrarily changing between a plurality of variable modes (rotation mode (“rotation 1′”, “rotation 2”, “rotation 3′”, “rotation 4′”)) according to the game state, the stage of production, etc. Even if there is, the control for displaying the hold objects (hold objects 633, 633a, decoration object 633b) can be easily performed.

According to the first embodiment, the display device 41 is provided with the display control means (effect control device 300) that variably displays a plurality of symbol objects (large symbol objects 610A, 610B 610C) to perform a variably displayed game, and When the result is a special result, in the gaming machine 10 capable of generating a special game state advantageous to the player, the variable display game has a preliminary operation display period for displaying a preliminary operation at the start of the variable display game, The variable speed includes a high-speed fluctuation display period that is faster than the fluctuation speed of the period immediately after the completion of the preliminary operation display (low-speed fluctuation 1, medium-speed fluctuation), and the display control means (production control device 300) is a symbol object (large symbol). The size of the objects 610A, 610B, 610C) in the preliminary operation display period is made larger than the size in the high speed variable display period.

With the above configuration, attention can be paid to the preliminary movement, and the size of the symbol object (large symbol objects 610A, 610B, 610C) in the high-speed variable display is appropriately made smaller than the size at the time of the preliminary variation to enter the field of view. By making it easier, the scroll can be easily recognized, and thereby the variable display of the symbol objects (large symbol objects 610A, 610B, 610C) can be easily recognized. Further, in the high-speed variable display, the size of the symbol objects (large symbol objects 610A, 610B, 610C) is made smaller than the size at the time of preliminary variation, so that the sense of speed of scrolling can be enhanced.

According to the first embodiment, the display device 41 is provided with a display control means (effect control device 300) for variably displaying a plurality of symbol objects (large symbol objects 610A, 610B, 610C and performing a variably display game). When the result is a special result, in the gaming machine 10 capable of generating a special game state that is advantageous to the player, the variable display game starts from the period immediately after the start of the variable display game (low speed change 1, medium speed change). Also includes a high-speed fluctuation display period in which the fluctuation speed of the symbol objects (large symbol objects 610A, 610B, 610C) is fast, and the display control means (production control device 300) is temporarily stopped or stopped at the end of the variable display game. The size of the symbol object (including large symbol objects 610A, 610B, 610C) is made larger than the size of the symbol object in the high-speed variable display period.

With the above configuration, it is possible to increase the degree of attention to the temporary stop display period (sway variation display period) and the stop symbol display period, and to move from the high-speed variable display to the stop symbol display period (including the temporary stop display period). The variable display mode of the pattern objects 610A, 610B, 610C) can be easily recognized.

According to the first embodiment, the display device 41 is provided with a display control means (production control device 300) that variably displays a plurality of symbol objects (large symbol objects 610A, 610B, 610C) to perform a variably display game, and variably displays. When the game result is a special result, in the gaming machine 10 capable of generating a special game state advantageous to the player, the plurality of symbol objects large symbol objects 610A, 610B, 610C are the first symbol objects (for example, Large design object 610A, 610B), the 1st design object (for example, large design object 610A and 610B) the 2nd design object (for example, large design object 610C) where the variable display aspect differs, it includes, the indicatory control means. (Production control device 300), during a predetermined period (preliminary operation period, temporary stop display period) during the variable display game, a period for continuously displaying the second symbol object (for example, large symbol object 610C) in the same manner. , The first symbol object (for example, the large symbol objects 610A, 610B) is made equal to the period in which the symbols are continuously displayed in the same manner, and a specific display other than a predetermined period (preliminary operation period, temporary stop display period) during the variable display game In the period (low-speed fluctuation display period, medium-speed fluctuation display period, high-speed fluctuation display period), a period for continuously displaying the second symbol object (for example, large symbol object 610C) in the same manner as the first symbol object (for example, , Large pattern objects 610A, 610B) are made shorter than a period in which they are continuously displayed in the same manner.

With the above configuration, it is possible to easily recognize the variation mode of the symbol objects (large symbol objects 610A, 610B, 610C) in the variable display game, and the first symbol object (for example, large symbol objects 610A, 610B) in a predetermined period. Then, by making the switching cycle of the identification information of the second symbol object (for example, the large symbol object 610C) the same, it is possible to avoid the occurrence of discomfort in the variable display, thereby improving the interest.

According to the first embodiment, the display device 41 is provided with a display control means (production control device 300) that variably displays a plurality of symbol objects (large symbol objects 610A, 610B, 610C) to perform a variably display game, and variably displays. When the game result is a special result, in the gaming machine 10 capable of generating a special game state advantageous to the player, the plural symbol objects (large symbol objects 610A, 610B, 610C) are the first symbol objects (eg, , Large symbol objects 610A, 610B) and a first symbol object (for example, large symbol objects 610A, 610B) and a second symbol object (for example, large symbol object 610C) in which the variable display mode is different, and display control is included. The means (production control device 300) can variably display the second symbol object (for example, the large symbol objects 610A and 610B) in a mode of axial rotation at a predetermined position, and the second symbol object (for example, the large symbol object 610A). , 610B) can be displayed in a predetermined period with the identification information included in the front view, and the predetermined period can be changed based on the size of the second symbol object (eg, large symbol objects 610A, 610B). is there.

Thereby, the visibility of the identification information during the variable display of the second symbol object (for example, the large symbol object 610C) can be improved. In this way, the interest can be improved by appropriately performing the effects of the symbol objects (large symbol objects 610A, 610B, 610C) in the variable display game.

According to the first embodiment, the display device 41 is provided with the display control means (production control device 300) for playing the variable display game, and when the result of the variable display game is a special result, a special game state advantageous to the player. In the gaming machine 10 capable of generating, the display control means (production control device 300) displays objects (holding objects 633, 633a, large symbol object 610C (middle symbol)) on the display device 41, and objects (holding object 633). , 633a, the large symbol object 610C (middle symbol), and a specific rotation angle (a rotation angle at which the character or the identification information is viewed from the front, or a rotation angle other than the specific rotation angle and the characteristics of the character or the identification information). It is possible to variably display in a mode in which the object is temporarily stopped at a recognizable predetermined rotation angle, etc., and the period in which the object is temporarily stopped can be changed based on the size of the object.

Thereby, the specific rotation angle of the object (holding object 633, 633a, large pattern object 610C (middle pattern)) (the rotation angle at which the character or identification information is viewed from the front, or any other rotation angle that is the character or identification) The visibility of an image related to a predetermined rotation angle or the like at which the feature of information can be recognized can be improved, and the pause time can be changed according to the size of the object. Therefore, the variable display (variable display) of the object is not monotonous, and the player gazes at it, which can enhance the interest.

According to the first embodiment, the display device 41 is provided with a display control unit (effect control device 300) that variably displays a plurality of symbol objects (for example, large symbols 610A and 610B) to perform a variably display game. When the result is a special result, a symbol object (for example, large symbol 610A (A1, A2, A3), 610B (B1, B2, B3)) in the gaming machine 10 that can generate a special gaming state advantageous to the player. Is variably displayed by a variable display mode that scrolls along a specific path (vertical path) provided on the screen of the display device 41 with the identification information, and the display control means (effect control device 300) is a symbol. A plurality of objects (for example, large patterns 610A (A1, A2, A3), 610B (B1, B2, B3)) are arranged along a specific route in the order in which a round of identification information is switched, and the colors are associated with the identification information. The symbol objects related to the one round of the identification information are displayed so that the color patterns are different from each other between the large symbol objects adjacent to each other.

With the above configuration, not only the identification information but also the object body of the large symbol object (for example, the large symbols 610A (A1, A2, A3), 610B (B1, B2, B3)) on which the identification information is displayed is scrolled. The player can easily recognize that.

According to the first embodiment, the display device 41 is provided with the display control means (production control device 300) for playing the variable display game, and when the result of the variable display game is a special result, a special game state advantageous to the player. In the gaming machine 10 capable of generating, the display control means (production control device 300) displays the objects (holding objects 633, 633a, decoration object 633b) on the display device 41, and the objects (holding objects 633, 633a, decoration object). 633b) is a plurality of variable modes ((rotation 1), “rotation 2”, “rotation 3”, “rotation 4”) or (“rotation 1′”, “rotation 2”, “rotation 3′”). , “Rotation 4′”)), and the variable periods of the plurality of variable modes are the same.

With the above configuration, when the rotation mode (variable mode) of the objects (holding objects 633, 633a, decoration object 633b) is changed, the rotation modes (variable mode) of the objects (holding objects 633, 633a, decoration object 633b) are changed to a plurality of modes. Variable mode (rotation mode ((“rotation 1”, “rotation 2”, “rotation 3”, “rotation 4”) or (“rotation 1′”, “rotation 2”, “rotation 3′”, “rotation 4′) Controlling for displaying the objects (holding objects 633, 633a, decorative object 633b) can be easily performed even when arbitrarily changing between "))) according to the game state, the production stage, or the like. it can.

According to the first embodiment, the display device 41 is provided with the display control means (effect control device 300) that variably displays a plurality of symbol objects (large symbol objects 610A, 610B 610C) to perform a variably displayed game, and When the result is a special result, in the gaming machine 10 capable of generating a special game state that is advantageous to the player, the display control means (production control device 300) displays the symbol objects (large symbol objects 610A, 610B, 610C). The size in the preliminary operation display period is made larger than the size in the display period after the preliminary operation display period (for example, high-speed variable display period).

With the above configuration, while paying attention to the preliminary movement, the size of the symbol object (large symbol objects 610A, 610B, 610C) is preliminary in the variable display (for example, high-speed variable display) in the display period after the preliminary motion display period. It is possible to easily recognize the scroll by making the size smaller than the size at the time of change to easily enter the field of view, and thereby easily recognize the variable display of the symbol objects (large symbol objects 610A, 610B, 610C). .. Further, in the variable display (for example, high-speed variable display) of the display period after the preliminary operation display period, the size of the symbol object (large symbol objects 610A, 610B, 610C) is made smaller than the size at the time of the preliminary variation, and thus the scrolling speed. You can increase the feeling.

According to the first embodiment, the display device 41 is provided with a display control means (effect control device 300) for variably displaying a plurality of symbol objects (large symbol objects 610A, 610B, 610C and performing a variably display game). When the result is a special result, in the gaming machine 10 capable of generating a special game state advantageous to the player, the display control means (production control device 300) displays a temporary stop display or a stop display at the end of the variable display game. The size of the symbol object (including large symbol objects 610A, 610B, 610C) that is made larger than the size of the symbol object in a specific display period (low-speed fluctuation display period, medium-speed fluctuation display period, high-speed fluctuation display period) To do.

With the above configuration, it is possible to increase the attention to the temporary stop display period (sway fluctuation display period) and the stop symbol display period, and stop from the fluctuation display (low speed fluctuation display, medium speed fluctuation display, high speed fluctuation display) in the specific display period. It is possible to easily recognize the variable display mode of the symbol objects (large symbol objects 610A, 610B, 610C) that shift to the symbol display period (including the temporary stop display period).

[Second Embodiment]
The gaming machine 10 according to the second embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 53 to 64. The configuration other than that described below may be the same as that of the first embodiment. Further, in the following embodiments, the same reference numerals are used for the configurations that perform the same functions as those of the first embodiment, and redundant description will be appropriately omitted.

[Reflections on the glass frame before and after moving the production button]
FIG. 53 is a diagram illustrating an area where the effect button 25 is reflected on the glass frame 15 before and after the effect button 25 according to the second embodiment is moved, and FIG. 54 is an effect button 25 according to the second embodiment. It is a figure explaining the area|region where the player can visually recognize the virtual image of the effect button 25 reflected in the back of the glass frame 15 before and after movement. 53 and 54 are schematic cross-sectional side views of a cross section including one life nail 36b (described later) in the lateral direction (left-right direction).

As shown in FIGS. 53 and 54, a game area 32 is provided between the glass frame 15 and the game board body 30a of the game board 30. In the game area 32, for example, a start winning opening 36 attached to the game board body 30a and a life nail 36b attached substantially above the starting winning opening 36 are arranged. The life nail 36b is a game ball dropped from the stage portion 40b after rolling on the stage portion 40b (see FIG. 2), a windmill or a road nail arranged in the game area 32 (between the starting winning opening 36 and the windmill). It is a nail (obstruction nail, obstruction member, guide member) that guides the game ball that has flowed down toward the starting winning opening 36 by means of one row of obstruction nails). Normally, there are two life nails 36b, and the starting winning opening 36 is located directly below the gap between the two life nails 36b. Note that, in the diagrams viewed from the lateral direction (left-right direction) of FIGS. 53 and 54, the two life nails 36b overlap each other, so only one life nail 36b is shown.

Inside the effect button 25 provided in the center of the upper part of the upper plate unit (see FIG. 1), a plurality of LEDs 25c (for example, three) are arranged so as to be able to emit light according to the progress state of the game, and the LED 25c is a frame. It is configured as a part of the decoration device 18 (see FIG. 4). The LED 25c may be a full-color LED or a single-color LED, but is preferably a full-color LED so that various light emitting modes are possible. Further, the effect button 25 is arranged so as to be movable near the center of the upper portion of the upper plate unit. For example, the effect button 25 may have a sliding member that fits in a groove-shaped member that extends in the substantially front-rear direction, and may move (slide) in the substantially front-rear direction along the groove-shaped member. An elastic member such as a spring may be attached to the effect button 25, and the effect button 25 may be configured to be held at the initial position (normal position) by the elastic member as long as no force is applied.

Then, for example, when the LED 25c emits light, the light from the effect button 25 is emitted as direct light toward the surroundings including the eyes of the player.

On the other hand, a part of the light from the effect button 25 emitted to the glass frame 15 (here, the cover glass 14) is reflected by the glass frame 15 and reflected toward the front (front side, player side). Become. In the present embodiment, the reflection by the cover glass 14 (transparent member) held by the glass frame 15 (transparent member holding frame) is mainly dealt with. In addition to the cover glass 14, an acrylic plate or the like can be used as the transparent member. Although the cover glass 14 of the glass frame 15 is configured as a transparent member that allows the player to see the game board 30, it is not completely transparent (reflectance=0) but has a predetermined reflectance and thus can be reflected.

Light from the effect button 25 is reflected at various positions on the glass frame 15. Further, the intensity (reflectance) of the reflected light depends on the incident angle from the effect button 25, and tends to gradually increase as the incident angle decreases. In the present embodiment, the incident angle is defined as the angle formed by the incident direction and the surface (reflection surface) of the cover glass 14.

Here, as shown in FIG. 53, for example, when the effect button 25 is located at the initial position, the player moves the life nail 36b from the area A in front of and above the glass frame 15 (on the player's face or head). The reflection of the effect button 25 when visually recognizing is described.

When the player visually recognizes the life nail 36b from the area A, the virtual image (initial position (virtual image)) of the effect button 25 located at the initial position appears to overlap with the life nail 36b, as shown by the broken line in FIG. Of the reflected light emitted from the effect button 25 and reflected by the glass frame 15 (cover glass 14), the reflected light toward the area A overlaps with the life nail 36b, and a virtual image is formed in the glass frame 15 (cover glass 14). This is because it reflects. The virtual image of the effect button 25 is reflected more clearly (firmly and clearly) as the light emission of the LED 25c of the effect button 25 becomes stronger.

The virtual image of the effect button 25 is not limited to the case where the LED 25c of the effect button 25 emits light, and the effect button 25 is illuminated by the LED of the frame decoration device 18, the LED of the board decoration device 46, the illumination of the game hall, and the like. Even if it does, it can be reflected in the glass frame 15.

Further, as described above, when the angle of incidence of the light emitted from the effect button 25 at the initial position on the glass frame 15 (the angle between the incident direction and the surface of the cover glass 14) is small, the intensity of the reflected light becomes strong, and the life nail. There is a strong tendency that the virtual image of the effect button 25 is clearly reflected in the glass frame 15 at a position overlapping with 36b.

Subsequently, as shown in the post-movement position in FIGS. 53 and 54, when the effect button 25 is pulled forward (front side, player side), the effect button 25 emits it as shown by the thick solid line in FIG. The incident angle of the received light with respect to the glass frame 15 increases, and the reflected light whose intensity is attenuated goes to the region B slightly above the glass frame 15 (on the chest side of the player).

As a result, when the player visually recognizes the life nail 36b from the area A in the upper front of the glass frame 15 (the player's face or head side), it is possible to prevent the virtual image of the effect button 25 from overlapping the life nail 36b. Since the visibility of the nail 36b is improved, the enjoyment of the game can be improved.

If the player visually recognizes the life nail 36b from the area B (chest side of the player), as shown by the broken line in FIG. 54, the virtual image of the effect button 25 at the position after the movement (after the movement (virtual image)). Appears to overlap life nail 36b. However, since the intensity of the reflected light is attenuated as the incident angle increases, even if the player visually recognizes the life nail 36b from the region B, it is possible to prevent the visibility of the life nail 36b from being deteriorated. be able to. The player's eyes are usually in the area A, but the player's eyes may move to the area B if the posture is forcibly collapsed.

The player can move the effect button 25 manually or by controlling the effect control device 300. For example, the effect control device 300 can move the effect button 25 under a predetermined condition (for example, at the start of right-handed operation, when returning from right-handed operation to left-handed operation), or according to the operation of the player. Note that the player may manually move the effect button 25. Further, for example, in the normal game state, left-handed is advantageous, so it returns from right-handed to left-handed, and in the specific game state (time saving state, probability variation state) or special game state (big hit state, etc.), right-handed is advantageous. Therefore, it is in a right-handed state.

In addition, in FIG. 53 and FIG. 54, when visually recognized from the area A, the effect button 25 is moved in order to prevent the virtual image (initial position (virtual image)) of the effect button 25 from overlapping the life nail 36b. However, the effect button 25 may be moved to avoid overlapping with the start winning opening 36.

Further, not only when the virtual image of the effect button 25 reflected in the glass frame 15 overlaps with the life nail 36b and the starting winning opening 36, various board elements attached to the game board 30 (components or constituent members of the game board 30). , The second gaming machine component), the effect button 25 may be moved. For example, as a board element that may overlap the virtual image of the effect button 25, an obstacle nail other than the life nail 36b, the stage portion 40b, the warp passage 40e, the universal figure starting gate 34, the special winning opening of the special variation winning device 39, ordinarily. Variable winning device (second starting winning opening) 37, display screen of display device 41, LED of panel decoration device 46, LED of collective display device 50 (particularly LED indicating design, hold, right-handed state), left-handed The target position (target position, bulging position, position where the game ball is landed when hitting left), the LED of the lamp display device 80, and the like can be mentioned. In addition, on the board surface of the game board 30 (for example, the upper right corner or the upper left corner of the game area 32, the vicinity of the operation handle 24, the left side of the outlet 30b, etc.), "Unauthorized monitoring (magnetic/radio wave sensor mounted, etc.)" When performing the display (indication of big hit probability or number of prize balls) or “prevention of getting stuck” regarding notification, suggestion, or reminder to a player or a hall clerk, a virtual image of the effect button 25 appears on the display portion. The effect control device 300 can control the movement of the effect button 25 so as not to be included. In addition, even when the display regarding the notification, suggestion, and attention to the player or the hall clerk is displayed on the display screen of the display device 41, the effect control device 300 does not show the virtual image of the effect button 25 on the display of the display screen. Thus, the movement of the effect button 25 can be controlled.

Further, the target of the virtual image reflected in the glass frame 15 so as to overlap the life nail 36b and the like is not limited to the effect button 25, and is installed in the projecting effect unit 13 on the side of the frame, the upper part of the frame, the speaker 19, the plate unit, or the like. Various frame elements (first game machine constituent elements) such as the LED and the sub liquid crystal of the frame decoration device 18 to be formed are also given as targets of the virtual image reflected in the glass frame 15. In the present embodiment, the frame element is a component or member of the open/close frame including the glass frame 15.

The virtual image such as the effect button 25 is not limited to the glass frame 15, but can be reflected on a glossy member such as the surface of the game board 30 or the surface of various decorative members. The surface of the game board 30 and the surface of various decorative members are, for example, metal-plated, film-coated, or made of a resin material, and can reflect the light of the effect buttons 25 and the like. Further, for example, when the light guide plate is attached to the front of the game board 30, the virtual image of the effect button 25 or the like can be reflected on the light guide plate.

The effect control device 300 may perform control so that the light emission intensity when the effect button 25 is in the initial position is lower than the light emission intensity when (or during) the operation of the effect button 25 (initial). Light emission intensity at position<light emission intensity after movement (or during operation)). In this way, by suppressing the light emission intensity when the effect button 25 is in the initial position, it is possible to reduce the reduction in visibility due to glare. Further, when the player moves the effect button 25 by a manual operation, the player can freely move the effect button 25 according to the reflection condition, and the operation surface of the effect button 25 is the player. Since the light emission of the LED directly reaches the player, it is possible to easily observe the light emission mode such as rainbow color or red color. Therefore, when displaying the operation suggestion image of the effect button 25 on the display screen of the display device 41 at the time of operating the effect button 25, for example, the player observes the effect button 25 that glows in the same color development or light emitting mode as the operation suggestion image. It becomes easier and the operability and decoration can be improved.

Further, the emission intensity when the effect button 25 returns to the initial position may be reversed from the above case, and the emission intensity after the movement may be maintained (the emission intensity when returning to the initial position≧after the movement) (Or during operation) emission intensity). In particular, when the operation of the effect button 25 is performed at the time of notifying the big hit, the player tends not to pay attention to the start winning hole 36 as the special winning opening of the special variation winning device 39 is opened. Therefore, even if the visibility is reduced due to the glare, the effect is reduced. Therefore, the effect control device 300 controls the emission intensity of the effect button 25 so that the decorativeness is enhanced, so that the fanfare effect, the round effect, or the like. The effect of can be enhanced.

[Specific example of aspect in which effect button is reflected on glass frame]
Next, with reference to FIG. 55, a specific example of a mode in which the effect button 25 according to the second embodiment is reflected on the glass frame 15 (here, the cover glass 14) will be described. FIG. 55 is a perspective view of the gaming machine 10 according to the second embodiment, and is a view for explaining the flow of light rays from the effect button 25 entering the player's view.

In FIG. 55, the light emitting mode of the effect button 25 is displayed in black so that the reflection in the glass frame 15 can be easily understood.

When the LED 25c of the effect button 25 emits light, the player's eyes receive direct light from the effect button 25 shown by the solid line arrow in FIG. 55 and reflected light reflected by the glass frame 15 shown by the broken line arrow.

By the reflected light entering the eyes of the player, the player can visually recognize the virtual image of the effect button 25 reflected in the glass frame 15. Therefore, the virtual image of the effect button 25 reflected in the glass frame 15 appears to overlap with a member behind the glass frame 15, that is, a board element such as a life nail 36b attached to the game board 30, so that the board element Visibility tends to deteriorate.

Therefore, the effect control device 300 can reduce the light emission intensity of the LED 25c of the effect button 25 under a predetermined condition (for example, when starting right-handing and returning to left-handing). The effect control device 300 may turn off the LED 25c of the effect button 25.

According to such an aspect, the virtual image of the effect button 25 reflected in the glass frame 15 can be thinned, so that when the player looks at the board element, the virtual image of the effect button 25 appears to overlap with the board element. Even in this case, it is possible to prevent the visibility of the board element from being deteriorated.

[Modification example of reflection on the glass frame before and after moving the production button]
FIG. 56 is a diagram illustrating a region in which the effect button 25 is reflected in the glass frame 15 before and after the effect button 25 of the modified example according to the second embodiment is moved, and FIG. 57 is a modification according to the second embodiment. It is a figure explaining the area|region where the player can visually recognize the virtual image of the effect button 25 reflected in the back of the glass frame 15 before and after the movement of the example effect button 25. Note that, in the following drawings, the description of the configuration similar to the effect button 25 and the like in FIGS. 53 and 54 will be appropriately omitted.

As shown in FIG. 56 and FIG. 57, in the present modification, the effect button 25 can be moved, for example, from the initial position so that the upper portion is obliquely inclined toward the player.

Therefore, as shown in the post-movement position in FIGS. 56 and 57, when the effect button 25 is tilted obliquely, part of the light emitted from the effect button 25 causes life as shown by the thick solid line in FIG. It goes into the glass frame 15 at the position where it overlaps with the nail 36b.

The incident angle of the light emitted from the effect button 25 after the movement with respect to the glass frame 15 is smaller than that at the initial position, but since the effect button 25 is inclined forward at an angle, the effect button 25 The amount of light (intensity) toward the rear of, that is, toward the glass frame 15 decreases (becomes weak). Further, in response to the decrease in the incident angle, the direction of the reflected light reflected by the glass frame 15 is also close to the glass frame 15, and goes to the region B above the player's overhead.

As a result, when the player visually recognizes the life nail 36b from the area A in the upper front of the glass frame 15 (the player's face or head side), it is possible to prevent the virtual image of the effect button 25 from overlapping the life nail 36b. Since the visibility of the nail 36b is improved, the enjoyment of the game can be improved.

Further, if the player visually recognizes the life nail 36b from the area B (above the normal position of the player's head), as shown in FIG. 57, the life nail 36b is slanted toward the rear of the game board 30 at the position after the movement. The virtual image (after movement (virtual image)) of the tilted effect button 25 appears to overlap with the life nail 36b. However, since the region B is located above the normal position of the player's head, unless the player dares to look into the glass frame 15 from above in front of the glass frame 15, the life nail 36b and the virtual image of the effect button 25 are displayed. Do not appear to overlap, and it is possible to prevent the visibility of the life nail 36b from deteriorating in a normal seated state.

Further, the gaming machine 10 is provided with a decoration device 18a protruding forward from the center of the upper portion of the glass frame 15 (see FIG. 1). Therefore, by locating the region B inside the decoration device 18a, the head of the player who is looking into the device comes into contact with the decoration device 18a, the glass frame 15, etc., and cannot be seen unless it is in an unnatural posture. The virtual image of the effect button 25 can be made substantially invisible. In addition, since the light emission of the effect button 25 is reflected when the region B is located inside the decoration device 18a, it is possible to improve the decoration of the decoration device 18a.

Furthermore, since the amount of light directed to the glass frame 15 is reduced by the amount that the effect button 25 is tilted forward, even when the player visually recognizes the life nail 26b from the area B, the visibility of the life nail 36b is deteriorated. Can be suppressed.

[Movement Mode of Effect Button of Second Modification]
FIG. 58 is a diagram illustrating a movement mode of the effect button 25 of the second modified example according to the second embodiment.

As shown in FIG. 58(A), the effect button 25 of the second modified example is a lever portion (lever stick, lever stick) including a grip portion 25d that can be gripped by the operator and a shaft portion 25e that supports the grip portion 25d. Joystick) configured as. The grip 25d is provided with an LED 25c (not shown) capable of emitting light.

Then, the shaft portion 25e can be tilted forward, backward, leftward, and rightward while supporting the grip portion 25d as shown in FIG. 58(B), and the effect button 25 allows the player to perform a direction input operation (lever operation). It is possible to accept.

The grip portion 25d and the shaft portion 25e may be configured to be movable downward, and a push input operation of pressing the effect button 25 from above toward the upper plate unit may be accepted.

In this way, by configuring the effect button 25, it is possible to move the LED 25c of the grip portion 25d and change the light emitting direction (angle). Therefore, similarly to the case where the entire effect button 25 of FIG. 56 and FIG. 57 described above is obliquely inclined, the visibility of the life nail 36b can be improved by the effect button 25 of the second modified example, and the game can be performed. The interest can be improved.

[Movement Mode of Effect Button of Third Modification]
FIG. 59 is a diagram illustrating a movement mode of the effect button 25 of the third modified example according to the second embodiment.

As shown in FIG. 59(A), the effect button 25 of the third modified example is configured as a lever portion including a grip portion 25d and a shaft portion 25e, and is movable left and right on the upper plate unit. An escape groove is formed in the upper plate unit so that the effect button 25 can be moved left and right.

Then, the effect button 25 can be moved to the left and right along the clearance groove of the upper plate unit, as shown in FIG. 59(B). In the example of FIG. 59(B), the effect button 25 is moved to the left of the upper plate unit.

In this way, the effect button 25 is configured, so that the effect button 25 can be moved to a position where it does not overlap the life nail 36b, and the visibility of the life nail 36b can be improved, and the enjoyment of the game can be improved. it can.

[Fourth Modification Example of Reflection Button Reflected in Glass Frame]
FIG. 60 shows a region in which the effect button 25 of the fourth modified example according to the second embodiment is reflected in the glass frame 15, and a region in which the player can visually recognize the virtual image of the effect button 25 reflected in the back of the glass frame 15. It is a figure explaining.

As shown in FIG. 60, in the present modification, a case will be described in which the stage portion 40b and the virtual image of the effect button 25 reflected in the glass frame 15 appear to overlap each other.

The stage section 40b has LEDs and the like (not shown) that can emit light, and is configured to be able to emit light according to the effect, the gaming state, and the like. The distance from the player-side end of each board member (stage 40b, life nail 36b, start winning opening 36) to the cover glass 14 becomes shorter in the order of the stage 40b, the start winning opening 36, and the life nail 36b ( Stage 40b>starting winning opening 36>life nail 36b (see FIG. 60)). The distance from the end of each board member to the cover glass 14 may be shortened in the order of the stage 40b, the life nail 36b, and the starting winning opening 36 (stage 40b>life nail 36b>starting winning opening 36). ..

Further, the effect button 25 has an LED 25c and is configured to emit light, and a part of the light emitted from the effect button 25 to the glass frame 15 is reflected by the glass frame 15 to be forward (front side, player side). ) Is reflected light toward. When the player visually recognizes the stage unit 40b from the area A, the virtual image of the effect button 25 (effect button (virtual image)) appears to overlap with the stage unit 40b as shown by the broken line in FIG.

Here, when the light emission intensity of the stage unit 40b is equal to or higher than the light emission intensity of the effect button 25, even if the virtual image of the effect button 25 is reflected in the glass frame 15 so as to overlap with the stage unit 40b, the player still has the stage unit. It becomes relatively easy to visually recognize 40b. Therefore, even if the effect button 25 is lit, the player can easily follow the movement of the game ball rolling on the stage section 40b and can enjoy the game, so that the enjoyment of the game can be improved. it can.

On the other hand, when the light emission intensity of the stage unit 40b is less than the light emission intensity of the production button 25, when the virtual image of the production button 25 is reflected in the glass frame 15 so as to overlap with the stage unit 40b, the stage unit 40b is visually recognized. The sex becomes worse.

Therefore, the effect control device 300 sets the light emission intensity of the LED 25c of the effect button 25 under a predetermined condition (for example, when the player changes from right-handed to left-handed due to a change in the game state or when the number of holdings is reduced to 2 or less). By weakening, the reflection of the virtual image of the effect button 25 on the glass frame 15 can be suppressed. As a result, it is possible to prevent the visibility of the stage portion 40b from being deteriorated, so that the enjoyment of the game can be improved. The effect control device 300 may turn off the LED 25c of the effect button 25.

Further, since the light emission intensity of the stage section 40b is higher than that of the effect button 25, even if the light amount of the effect button 25 is small, the light from the stage section 40b having a large light amount is reflected by the effect button 25. The light emission of the effect button 25 can be supplemented. As a result, the light from the stage section 40b can be supplementarily utilized to light the effect button 25 while suppressing the emission intensity from the effect button 25, so that the light from the effect button 25 reflected by the glass frame 15 is reflected. This can be reduced, and it is possible to prevent the visibility of the stage unit 40b from being deteriorated due to the virtual image of the effect button 25 being reflected in the glass frame 15.

[Protruding production unit]
Next, with reference to FIG. 61, the structure of the projection effect unit 13 of the gaming machine 10 according to the second embodiment will be described. FIG. 61 is a cross-sectional view of the protrusion effect unit 13 of the gaming machine 10 according to the second embodiment. On the right side of the glass frame 15, a projecting effect unit 13 that extends in the vertical direction of the gaming machine 10 and projects toward the front (player side) is provided. The protrusion effect unit 13 is an effect device capable of executing a light emission effect or the like according to the progress state of the game.

An outer lens member 13a is provided on the right projection surface (outside the gaming machine 1) of the projection effect unit 13. A model character is drawn on the surface of the outer lens member 13a so that it can be visually recognized by a player passing from the right side to the left side of the gaming machine 1, for example. The game machine maker name and the game machine name may be drawn.

Inside the projection effect unit 13, a side light emitting substrate 13d having a plurality of outside LEDs 13b (for example, 6 pieces) and inside LEDs 13c (for example, 14 pieces) is arranged substantially parallel to the game board 30, and the frame decoration is provided. Configured as part of device 18 (see FIG. 4). Although the outer LED 13b and the inner LED 13c are arranged on the side light emitting substrate 13d, they may be arranged separately. Further, the outside LED 13b may be an LED panel arranged substantially parallel to the outside lens member 13a.

An outer lens member 13a, a light guide plate 13e, a side base member 13f, and an inner lens member 13g are provided in order from the outside in front of the side light emitting substrate 13d, and a cover member 13h is further provided to cover the periphery of these members. Be prepared.

The light guide plate 13e is disposed substantially vertically in front of the outer LED 13b of the side light emitting substrate 13d, and diffuses the light of the outer LED 13b taken in from the rear end surface to uniformly emit the surface light, thereby the outer lens member 13a. Can be illuminated with a constant illuminance.

The side base member 13f is disposed on the left side of the light guide plate 13e, and the light guide plate 13e is fitted to the adjacent surface. Further, the side base member 13f is integrated with the inner lens member 13g. The side base member 13f functions as a reflection plate that refracts light in the forward direction of the inside LED 13c and converts it into light in the left direction, and the inside lens member 13g is caused by the light from the inside LED 13c via the side base member 13f. Illuminated.

[Specific example of a mode in which the projection effect unit is reflected in the glass frame]
Next, with reference to FIG. 62, a specific example of a mode in which the effect button 25 according to the second embodiment is reflected on the glass frame 15 (here, the cover glass 14) will be described. FIG. 62 is a perspective view of the gaming machine 10 according to the second embodiment, and is a view for explaining the flow of light rays from the projection effect unit 13 that enters the player's view. In FIG. 62, the aspect in which the projection effect unit 13 emits light is displayed in black.

When the projection effect unit 13 emits light, the direct light from the projection effect unit 13 indicated by the solid line arrow in FIG. 62 and the reflected light reflected by the glass frame 15 (cover glass 14) indicated by the broken line arrow are shown to the player's eyes. And enter.

When the reflected light enters the eyes of the player, the player visually recognizes the virtual image of the projection effect unit 13 reflected in the glass frame 15. Therefore, since the virtual image of the projection effect unit 13 reflected in the glass frame 15 appears to overlap with the board element such as the life nail 36b in the glass frame 15, the visibility of the board element is likely to deteriorate.

Therefore, the effect control device 300 can reduce the light emission intensity of the inside LED 13c of the protrusion effect unit 13 under a predetermined condition (for example, when starting right-handing and returning to left-handing). The effect control device 300 may turn off the LED 13c for the inside of the protrusion effect unit 13.

According to such an aspect, the virtual image of the projection effect unit 13 reflected in the glass frame 15 can be thinned, so that the virtual image of the projection effect unit 13 overlaps with the board element when the player looks at the board element. Even when it is visible, it is possible to prevent the visibility of the board element from being deteriorated.

Further, as shown by the broken line arrow in FIG. 62, a part of the light of the projecting effect unit 13 is reflected by the effect button 25 so as to enter the visual field of the player, thereby assisting the light emission of the effect button 25. May be. In this way, by using the reflected light of the projection effect unit 13 in the effect button 25, it is possible to suppress the emission of the LED 25c and suppress the virtual image of the effect button 25 from being reflected in the glass frame 15, and the board element It is possible to suppress deterioration of the visibility.

[Specific example of a mode in which the projection effect unit is reflected in the glass frame]
FIG. 63 is a perspective view of the game board 30 according to the second embodiment, and is a view for explaining the flow of light rays from the stage portion 40b and the start winning opening 36 which are within the player's view.

As shown in FIG. 63, the start winning opening 36 can be provided with an LED that can emit light according to the effect, the gaming state, the winning, etc., similarly to the stage section 40b.

Further, the game board 30 is configured as a part of the upper performance unit 40c or the side performance unit 40d and is housed in the game board 30 according to the performance from the rear of the cover glass 14 (back side, game board). 30 side) and a movable movable accessory 40f is attached substantially in front of the display device 41. The movable accessory 40f has a reflection member (may be metal plating) capable of reflecting light incident from below from the front (front side, player side). The reflecting member may be inclined, for example, so as to face forward and downward in order to easily reflect light incident from below from the front.

Here, the light emitted from the LEDs of the stage portion 40b and the starting winning opening 36 can not only enter the eyes of the player as direct light, but can also illuminate the periphery of the game board 30 as shown in FIG.

For example, the light from the stage 40b and the start winning opening 36 is reflected by the surface of the effect button 25 and reaches the eyes of the player. Therefore, it is possible to effectively perform the light emission effect of the effect button 25 while suppressing the emission intensity of the effect button 25 to suppress the reflection of the virtual image of the effect button 25 on the glass frame 15.

The light from the stage 40b and the start winning opening 36 is reflected by the reflecting member of the movable accessory 40f that operates behind the cover glass 14 and substantially in front of the display device 41 and reaches the eyes of the player. You can also Therefore, even if the movable accessory 40f does not include an LED, it is possible to perform an effect as if the movable accessory 40f emitted light, so that it is possible to suppress the number of parts and enhance the decorativeness at low cost. The interest of can be improved.

In the above description, the visibility of the board element is deteriorated because the virtual image of the frame element (the constituent member of the glass frame 15) reflected in the glass frame 15 (cover glass 14) does not overlap the board element. Suppressed that.

However, the virtual effect of the frame element reflected in the glass frame 15 may be overlapped with the board element to enhance the effect. For example, the effect control device 300 causes a decorative member provided on the right side of the game board 30 such as the protrusion effect unit 13 to emit light when hitting to the right, and causes a virtual image of the decorative member to be reflected on the right side of the game area 32, thereby playing the game. Can make a right-handed suggestion. At that time, the effect control device 300 also causes the body part (board element) of the side effect unit 40d to emit rainbow color, for example, when the protrusion effect unit 13 or the like (frame element) emits rainbow color. It is possible to adopt a mode in which the effect of making the right hit to the player easier to understand by the effect.

On the other hand, the effect control device 300, when, for example, the protrusion effect unit 13 and the like (frame element) emit yellow light, the body part (board element) of the side effect unit 40d is also blue, which is a complementary color to yellow. It may be made to appear inconspicuous white by causing the player to emit light, and the apparent glare of the light emission may be reduced when the player is instructed to hit the right side.

Further, the effect control device 300 may also cause the body part (board element) of the side effect unit 40d to emit green when the protrusion effect unit 13 or the like (frame element) emits red light. In this way, the light of the frame element that emits a color (red) different from that of the board element is reflected on the light emission of the board element (green), and the light is overlapped (red + green) to obtain an apparent color of light. May be changed to create a yellow-looking area, and the decorativeness due to the light emission of the board element and the frame element may be improved.

Further, the effect control device 300 moves the effect button 25 in the reverse direction from the position after the movement as shown in FIG. 53 to the initial position when the life nail 36b and the starting winning opening 36 are desired to be noticed when returning to left-handed driving. By doing so, the virtual image of the effect button 25 reflected in the glass frame 15 may be intentionally overlapped with the board element such as the life nail 36b. According to such an aspect, the virtual image of the frame element such as the effect button 25 reflected in the glass frame 15 overlaps with the board element such as the life nail 36b, and the board element becomes brighter in a manner different from the normal one. It is possible to improve the enjoyment of the game.

Further, when the right-handed stroke is finished (when returning to the left-handed stroke), a left-hand suggestion can be given to the player by displaying a virtual image of the decorative member on the left side of the game area 32. Furthermore, the virtual image of the decorative member is reflected on the opening/closing door 39c of the special variation winning device 39 that opens the special winning opening, the specific area 86 (V winning opening), the universal figure starting gate 34 (pounding gate), etc. You may suggest a game to. According to such an aspect, since it is possible to perform an optical effect using reflected light even in a member such as the opening/closing door 39c where it is difficult to attach an LED, it is possible to easily and inexpensively enhance the decorative property, and to play the game. The interest of can be improved.

The effect control device 300 can enhance the effect of effect by intentionally overlapping the virtual image of the frame element reflected in the glass frame 15 with the board element, but the board surface of the game board 30 or the display screen of the display device 41. If you want to display notifications, suggestions, or warnings such as "Unauthorized monitoring (magnetic/radio wave sensor installed)", "Specification display (display of big hit probability and number of prize balls)" and "Prevention of intrusion", Instead, the position of the frame element can be controlled so that the virtual image of the frame element (effect button 25 or the like) does not appear in the display portion.

[Example of timing chart when executing variable display game]
FIG. 64 is an example of a timing chart when the effect control device 300 according to the second embodiment executes the variable display game (decorative special figure variable display game).

When the variable display game is executed at time (A) in FIG. 64, on the display screen of the display device 41, a decorative special symbol (decorative first symbol A to C, a large symbol) and a decorative second symbol (small symbol) are displayed. Is variably displayed.

Before and after the time (A), that is, before and after the start of the variable display game, the effect control device 300 weakens the light emission intensity of the LED of the panel decoration device 46 as a panel element and the LED of the frame decoration device 18 as a frame element. I have to. Therefore, the game board 30 and its surroundings are illuminated relatively weakly by the board element and the frame element.

At time (B), effect control device 300 executes effect 1 on the display screen of display device 41. The effect 1 is the first effect of an effect including a plurality of consecutive single effects (for example, effects 1 to 3) such as a pseudo continuous effect or a step-up notice.

Here, the pseudo continuous production is a pseudo variation (single production, in which the decoration special symbol that is variably displayed is pseudo temporarily stopped (pseudo stop display) from the start to the end of one variation display game. Sub-effects, sub-variations) are effects that are continuously performed a predetermined number of times.

In addition, at the time of the pseudo stop display, the pseudo continuous symbol suggesting the pseudo continuous effect may be stopped and displayed. In addition, the pseudo continuous effect is that, during the period from the start to the end of one variation display game, the pseudo variation is continuously displayed for a predetermined number of times without temporarily displaying the decorative special symbols that are variably displayed. It may be an effect that makes it appear as if it is being executed multiple times. At this time, the effect control device 300 displays a display such as “NEXT” on the display screen of the display device 41 even if the temporary stop display is not performed, so that the effect of moving to the next pseudo variation is achieved. Can be performed.

The step-up notice is an effect in which single effects (sub-effects) set in a plurality of stages are sequentially executed from a lower stage (step) to a predetermined stage (step).

The pseudo continuous effect and the step-up notice are composed of a plurality of continuous single effects, and the greater the number of times, the higher the expectation of a big hit.

At time (B), the effect control device 300 changes the light emission intensity of the frame decoration device 18 (frame element) from weak to strong in accordance with the effect 1. Therefore, for example, the virtual image of the frame element such as the effect button 25 is strongly reflected in the glass frame 15 and clearly overlaps with the board element such as the life nail 36b. In this way, the effect control device 300 can emphasize that the effect is executed by clearly reflecting the virtual image of the frame element in the initial stage of the effect (effect 1) in the variable display game.

On the other hand, the production control device 300 maintains the light emission intensity of the board decoration device 46 (board element) as weak.

When the effect 1 ends at time (C), the effect control device 300 changes the light emission intensity of the frame decoration device 18 (frame element) from strong to weak. Therefore, the reflection of the virtual image of the frame element in the glass frame 15 is reduced, and the visibility of the board element such as the life nail 36b is improved. If the effect 1 is a pseudo variation, the decorative special symbol on the display screen of the display device 41 is pseudo stopped and displayed here.

Therefore, the light emission of the frame element is after the middle stage of the production (after the production 1) in the variable display game in which the player is likely to carefully determine whether or not the starting memory is accumulated up to the upper limit (for example, four). Since it weakens and the visibility of the board element is improved, it is easy for a player who is considering stop hitting to observe the game ball winning the starting winning opening 36 and the game ball rolling on the stage 40b above it. As a result, the game can be played efficiently, and the enjoyment of the game can be improved.

Further, since the visibility of the display screen of the display device 41 behind the cover glass 14 is also improved, it becomes easier for the player to see the hold display of the display screen and the effect itself, and the interest of the game can be improved. When changing the light emission intensity of the frame decoration device 18 (frame element) from strong to weak, the frame decoration device 18 (frame element) may be moved from the initial position so that the reflection of virtual images does not overlap. Good.

Next, at a time (D) when a predetermined time (for example, 1 second) has passed since the end of the effect 1, the effect control device 300 turns off the frame decoration device 18 (frame element). Therefore, the visibility of the board elements, the game balls, and the display screen of the display device 41 becomes higher after the middle stage of the effect in the variable display game, so that the enjoyment of the game can be improved.

At time (E), effect control device 300 executes effect 2 following effect 1 on the display screen of display device 41. Rendering 2 is the second rendering of a rendering composed of a plurality of continuous single renderings (for example, rendering 1 to 3). It should be noted that the effect control device 300 can perform the pseudo change of the effect 2 so that the same pseudo change time (indication effect, notice effect time) as that of the effect 1 is achieved.

In addition, at time (E), the effect control device 300 weakly changes the light emission intensity of the frame decoration device 18 (frame element) that is in the off state in accordance with the effect 2. Therefore, as compared with the case where the frame element is in the off state, the game board 30 and its surroundings are illuminated brightly in accordance with the execution of the effect 2, so that it is possible to emphasize that the effect 2 is executed. Since the light emission intensity of the frame element is weak, the virtual image of the frame element does not appear in the glass frame 15 more than necessary, and the execution of the effect 2 can be emphasized.

After that, when the effect 2 ends, the effect control device 300 turns off the frame decoration device 18 (frame element) again.

Further, the effect control device 300 executes the effect 3 on the display screen of the display device 41 as the third effect of the effect configured by a plurality of single effects. The effect control device 300 weakly changes the light emission intensity of the frame decoration device 18 (frame element) that has been turned off in accordance with the execution of the effect 3. Therefore, similarly to the effect 2, the effect control device 300 can emphasize the execution of the effect 3 without the virtual image of the frame element being reflected in the glass frame 15 more than necessary.

Subsequently, when the effect 3 is finished at time (F), the effect control device 300 turns off the frame decoration device 18 (frame element) and also turns off the panel decoration device 46 (board element) (inclination off). Therefore, the game board 30 and its surroundings temporarily become dark. In this way, the effect control device 300 is turned off before executing the SP reach effect described later, so that the game board 30 and its surroundings are temporarily darkened, which is a mode different from the normal effect, which is unexpected. As a result, the player's sense of expectation can be fueled and the enjoyment of the game can be improved.

At time (G), the effect control device 300 executes the SP reach effect on the display screen of the display device 41. At that time, the effect control device 300 increases the light emission intensity of the board decoration device 46 (board element) and the frame decoration device 18 (frame element) that have been turned off. Therefore, since the game board 30 and its surroundings are illuminated brightly, the execution of the SP reach effect can be emphasized.

Further, at time (G), since the emission intensity of the frame element becomes strong, the reflection of the virtual image of the frame element in the glass frame 15 becomes more intense. Therefore, when the SP reach effect is produced, the game board 30 and its surroundings are displayed. Brightness can be emphasized, and flashy production that enhances the production effect can be performed. That is, in the latter half stage of the production in the variable display game in which the start memory is likely to be accumulated up to the upper limit (for example, four), the player who is hitting off does not observe the game balls around the start winning opening 36, the stage 40b, and the like. Therefore, even if the virtual image of the frame element is strongly reflected in the glass frame 15, the effect of the SP reach effect can be enhanced without affecting the playability, and the interest of the game can be improved.

It should be noted that the frame decoration device 18 has a high light emission intensity and the reflection of the virtual image of the frame element in the glass frame 15 is emphasized, but the board decoration device 46 also has a high light emission intensity and emits an equivalent amount of light. Therefore, the visibility of the board elements does not deteriorate more than necessary, and the player can also observe the board elements.

After that, when the SP reach effect ends at time (H), the effect control device 300 changes the light emission intensity of the board decoration device 46 (board element) and the frame decoration device 18 (frame element) from strong to weak. Therefore, the player can easily recognize that the SP reach effect has ended by visually confirming that the light emission intensity of the board element and the frame element has settled down with the end of the SP reach effect on the display screen.

The effect control device 300 may not only increase the light emission intensity when emphasizing the reflection of the virtual image of the frame element in the glass frame 15, but may also emphasize the reflection by blinking. Moreover, the effect control device 300 changes the color of the virtual image of the frame element reflected in the glass frame 15 by changing the light emission color of the frame element according to the expectation degree of the big hit, and suggests the expectation degree of the big hit. Good.

Furthermore, the effect control device 300 emphasizes the effect of emphasizing the reflection of the virtual image of the frame element in the glass frame 15, in addition to the SP reach effect described above, at the time of stopping the big hit symbol, during the fanfare effect, during the ending effect, and on the right. It can be executed when hitting, returning to the left, and the like. In addition, when the jackpot pattern is stopped, a virtual area image of the frame element in the glass frame 15 may be emphasized and reflected in the specific area 86 (V winning opening), the universal figure starting gate 34 (heartbeat gate), or the like. .. In this way, the effect control device 300 controls the reflection of the virtual image of the frame element in the glass frame 15 according to the game, so that each effect can be enhanced and the player can be instructed how to hit. ..

Further, in the above timing chart, the effect control device 300 controls the light emission intensity of the frame element and the board element at the time of effect in one variable display game, and reflects the virtual image of the frame element in the glass frame 15. Although it is decided that the effect is reduced, it may be performed over a plurality of variable display games.

For example, the effect control device 300 is a start notice related to a continuous notice (a chance notice) that is an effect of displaying a decorative special symbol that is out of common in a plurality of variable display games, or a hold during standby (before digestion). When performing a pre-reading announcement that announces the jackpot expectation degree, it is possible to perform an effect in which the virtual image of the frame element is reflected in the glass frame 15.

[Operation/Effect of Second Embodiment]
The gaming machine 10 according to the present embodiment includes a game control means (game control device 100) capable of executing a game (a variable display game, a special figure variable display game), and an effect control means capable of executing an effect associated with the game ( The production control device 300) is provided, and when the result of the game is a special result (big hit), a special game state (big hit game, big hit state) advantageous to the player can be generated. The gaming machine 10 has a transparent member (for example, the cover glass 14) formed on the front surface of the game board 30 so that the game board 30 can be visually recognized, and is arranged around the transparent member according to the effect executed by the effect control means. Frame elements (effect button 25, protrusion effect unit 13, frame decoration device 18, etc.) capable of emitting light, and board elements (life nail 36b, start winning hole 36, stage portion 40b, movable part) arranged on the game board 30. Object 40f, board decoration device 46, etc.). The board element overlaps with the virtual image of the frame element reflected on the transparent member, and automatically moves according to a predetermined condition (in response to the player's operation or effect, when starting right-handing or returning to left-handing, the player In case of manual operation), the virtual image of the frame element will not overlap.

According to such a gaming machine 10, the virtual image of the frame element reflected on the transparent member can be prevented from overlapping with the board element, and the visibility of the board element is improved, so that the enjoyment of the game can be improved.

In the gaming machine 10 according to the present embodiment, the frame element does not overlap the virtual image of the frame element when a predetermined condition is satisfied from an initial position where the virtual image of the frame element reflected on the transparent member overlaps (front, back, front). It can be moved to a tilted position, sideways).

According to such a gaming machine 10, it is possible to avoid that the virtual image of the frame element reflected on the transparent member overlaps with the board element due to the physical movement of the frame element. It can be improved and the enjoyment of the game can be improved.

In addition, the gaming machine 10 according to the present embodiment is provided on the front surface of the gaming board 30 with a transparent member (for example, the cover glass 14) formed so that the gaming board 30 can be visually recognized, and performance control provided around the transparent member. Frame elements (production button 25, projecting production unit 13, frame decoration device 18, etc.) that can emit light in accordance with the production executed by the means (production control device 300), and board elements (life nails) arranged on the game board 30. 36b, a starting winning opening 36, a stage portion 40b, a movable accessory 40f, a board decoration device 46, etc.). The board element does not overlap with the virtual image of the frame element reflected on the transparent member, and overlaps with the virtual image of the frame element when a predetermined condition (at the time of right-handed striking, at the time of right-handed striking) is satisfied.

According to such a gaming machine 10, since the virtual image of the frame element reflected in the transparent member is made to overlap the board element when the predetermined condition is satisfied, unexpectedness occurs and the staging effect can be enhanced. At the same time, it is possible to suggest a game (indication of how to hit the game), and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

Further, by reflecting the virtual image of the frame element on the board element where it is difficult to provide the light emitting member (LED), an optical effect using reflected light can be performed, so that the decorative property can be easily and inexpensively enhanced. , The interest of the game can be improved.

In the gaming machine 10 according to the present embodiment, when the predetermined condition is satisfied, the board element (movable accessory) does not overlap the virtual image of the frame element reflected on the transparent member from the initial position (the accommodation position in the game board 30). It can be moved (operable and movable) to a position (behind the transparent member) that overlaps the virtual image of the frame element. Alternatively, the frame element (for example, the effect button 25) is a frame element when a predetermined condition is satisfied from a position (for example, a position after movement in FIG. 53) where the virtual image of the frame element reflected on the transparent member does not overlap with the board element. Is movable (movable and movable) to a position (for example, the initial position shown in FIG. 53) where the virtual image of (3) overlaps the disk element.

According to such a gaming machine 10, since the virtual image of the frame element reflected on the transparent member overlaps with the board element, the board element becomes brighter in a manner different from the normal one. Can be improved.

Further, the gaming machine 10 according to the present embodiment, a game control means (game control device 100) capable of executing a game (variable display game, special figure variable display game), and effect control capable of executing an effect associated with the game. Means (production control device 300). The gaming machine 10 is provided with a transparent member (for example, the cover glass 14) arranged in front of the gaming machine 10, and a first gaming machine configuration arranged in front of the gaming machine 10 with respect to the transparent member and capable of emitting light in a predetermined mode. Elements (frame elements (effect button 25, projecting effect unit 13, frame decoration device 18, etc.)) and second game machine constituent elements (board element (life nail 36b, life nail 36b, which is arranged rearward of the game machine 10 with respect to the transparent member. The starting winning opening 36, the stage portion 40b, the movable accessory 40f, the board decoration device 46, etc.)). The second game machine component overlaps with the virtual image of the first game machine component reflected on the transparent member, and starts right-handing when automatically moving in accordance with a predetermined condition (corresponding to operation or effect of the player). When returning to the time or left-handed driving, in the case of the manual operation by the player), the virtual image of the first game machine constituent element does not overlap.

According to such a gaming machine 10, it is possible to prevent the virtual image of the first gaming machine constituent element (frame element) reflected on the transparent member from overlapping with the second gaming machine constituent element (board element), and thus the second gaming mechanism. Since the visibility of the constituent elements is improved, the enjoyment of the game can be improved.

Further, the gaming machine 10 according to the present embodiment, a display means (display screen of the display device 41) capable of displaying a predetermined effect, a transparent member (for example, the cover glass 14) arranged in front of the gaming machine 10, A first gaming machine component (frame element (effect button 25, projecting effect unit 13, frame decorating device 18, etc.)) which is disposed in front of the transparent member and is capable of emitting light in a predetermined mode, and transparent And a second game machine constituent element (board element (life nail 36b, start winning hole 36, stage portion 40b, movable accessory 40f, board decoration device 46, etc.)) disposed behind the game machine with respect to the member. .. The second game machine component overlaps with the virtual image of the first game machine component reflected on the transparent member, and when the predetermined condition (for example, pseudo continuous effect) is satisfied, it does not overlap with the virtual image of the first game machine component. The effect control means (effect control device 300) can execute a specific effect (for example, effects 2 and 3 (second and third single effects of pseudo continuous effect)) on the display means when a predetermined condition is satisfied.

According to such a gaming machine 10, the specific effect is executed in a state where the virtual image of the first gaming machine constituent element (frame element) reflected on the transparent member does not overlap with the second gaming machine constituent element (board element). Therefore, the visibility of the second gaming machine component and the display means is improved, and the interest of the game can be improved.

The present invention is not limited to the embodiments described above, and various modifications and changes can be made within the scope of the technical idea thereof, and it is clear that they are also included in the technical scope of the present invention. Is. For example, it is possible to combine a plurality of embodiments. Further, for example, the present invention can be applied to other types of gaming machines (slot machines, etc.). The scope of the present invention is shown by the claims, and is intended to include all modifications within the meaning and scope of equivalency of the claims.

For example, when the frame element or the board element has a specific light emission mode, an image notifying that the frame element or the board element has the specific light emission mode is located at a position where the virtual image of the frame element is not reflected (for example, area A to area B in FIG. 53). Other than the above, a display area (a display area on the display screen of the display device 41 or a display area of another board element or frame element) in a display area (a position displaced from the front such as the right side portion or the upper right portion of the glass frame 15) is displayed. You may In this way, by displaying the image notifying that the light emission mode is the specific light emission mode at the position where the virtual image of the frame element is not reflected (the position not overlapping the virtual image of the frame element), the player can easily gaze at the image. Therefore, even if a reflection occurs, the player's line of sight can be diverted to another location (a display device 41 as a board element or another board element or a frame element) away from the virtual image of the frame element. The interest of can be improved.

Further, in order to make it difficult to understand that the frame element is reflected, the board element or the light emitting member arranged near the board element may have the same or the same color as the frame element. For example, when the light emission mode of the frame element is a cyclic light emission mode for switching colors, the light emission mode of the board element can also be a cyclic light emission mode. At that time, the effect control device 300 may make it easier for the player to recognize which light emission by changing the color and the circulation speed as the circulation light emission modes of the frame element and the board element. In addition, the lighting mode of the board element or the lighting mode of the light emitting member near the board element may be executed as a continuation of the lighting mode of the frame element, and a series of effects may be executed by utilizing the glare ( A natural effect may be executed. The frame element may continue the light emission mode of the board element).

Furthermore, the shapes of the board element and the frame element can be various shapes. For example, when the board element is circular and the frame element is semi-circular, even if the frame element is reflected on the circular board element, it can be made inconspicuous by overlapping with the light emission of the circular board element. Further, the virtual image of the frame element may be made relatively inconspicuous by making the light emitting mode of the board element more noticeable than that of the frame element by making the light emitting mode of the board element rainbow color or high-speed cyclic lighting. Further, the effect control device 300 makes the board element conspicuous by displaying a display (for example, an effect) corresponding to the board element on the display screen of the display device 41 near the board element (for example, the lower right corner of the display screen). You may allow it.

10 Gaming Machine 25 Production Button 30 Gaming Board 32 Gaming Area 36 First Start Winning Port (First Start Winning Area)
37 Ordinary variation prize winning device (second starting prize area)
39 special variation winning device 40 center case 41 display device 50 collective display device (LED)
100 game control device (main board)
200 payout control device 300 production control device (sub-board)
633b decoration object

Claims (1)

A display control means for variably displaying a plurality of symbol objects on a display device to perform a variably displayed game, and when the result of the variably displayed game is a special result, a game in which a special game state advantageous to the player can be generated In the machine
The plurality of the symbol objects include a first symbol object and a second symbol object whose variable display mode is different from that of the first symbol object,
The display control means,
The second symbol object can be variably displayed in a manner of axially rotating at a predetermined position, and can be displayed in a predetermined period in a state where the identification information included in the second symbol object is viewed from the front,
A game machine characterized in that the predetermined period can be changed based on a size of the second symbol object.